<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<rss version="2.0"
     xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
     xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
     xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
     xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/">
  <channel>
    <title>BlogKub — free Blogger theme guides</title>
    <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/</link>
    <atom:link href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/rss.xml" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml"/>
    <description>Guides and feature documentation from BlogKub: build a Blogger blog that ranks on Google, earns from AdSense, and looks good without writing code.</description>
    <language>en</language>
    <copyright>© 2026 BlogKub</copyright>
    <managingEditor>hello@blogkub.com (Patpisan Dathong (Ben))</managingEditor>
    <webMaster>hello@blogkub.com (Patpisan Dathong (Ben))</webMaster>
    <lastBuildDate>Fri, 31 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</lastBuildDate>
    <generator>BlogKub feed builder</generator>
    <ttl>60</ttl>
    <image><url>https://www.blogkub.com/android-chrome-512x512.png</url><title>BlogKub — free Blogger theme guides</title><link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/</link></image>
    <item>
      <title>Let Google Index Blogger Label Pages</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/label-indexing</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/label-indexing</guid>
      <pubDate>Sun, 26 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to let Google index your Blogger label pages so they work as real category pages. Covers the BlogKub switch, the robots.txt file you have to paste alongside it, the one post one label rule, and how to check it actually worked.</description>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<h1>Let Google Index Blogger Label Pages: Turning Labels Into Real Category Pages</h1>
<p class="lead">Labels are the category system that ships with Blogger, and by default Google keeps none of those pages in its index. This guide explains why that happens, how to open them up correctly without missing a step, and when you are better off leaving them closed.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 26 July 2026&nbsp;&nbsp;|&nbsp;&nbsp;About 12 minutes&nbsp;&nbsp;|&nbsp;&nbsp;Level: intermediate</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>In short:</strong> turning on <strong>Allow label pages to be indexed</strong> in BlogKub is <strong>not enough on its own</strong>. That switch only changes a meta tag inside your theme, while Blogger's default robots.txt still forbids crawlers from entering <code>/search</code>, and robots.txt outranks the meta tag. You always need both halves: flip the switch, then paste the new <strong>robots.txt</strong> that BlogKub generates in the Export window into Blogger.</p></div>

<h2>What a label page actually is</h2>
<p>When you tag a post with a label such as <em>Appliances</em>, Blogger automatically builds a page listing every post carrying that label, at a URL shaped like this:</p>
<pre><code>https://yourblog.blogspot.com/search/label/Appliances</code></pre>
<p>That page behaves like the category page of any normal website: everything on one topic gathered in one place, so a reader interested in the subject can keep browsing. For a review blog or an affiliate blog, that is genuinely useful.</p>
<p>The catch is that <strong>Google does not keep this page in its index by default</strong>, no matter how many menus you link to it from. Search for it and you will not find it.</p>

<h2>Why Google skips label pages</h2>
<p>The reason is a small file called <strong>robots.txt</strong>, a sort of signpost at the front door of your site telling search engine crawlers where they may go. Blogger ships with this:</p>
<pre><code>User-agent: *
Disallow: /search
Allow: /</code></pre>
<p>The line <code>Disallow: /search</code> means <strong>stay out of anything starting with /search</strong>. That covers both keyword searches (<code>/search?q=…</code>) and label pages (<code>/search/label/…</code>), because they live under the same path.</p>
<p>Google set that default because a site's internal search results are usually duplicate content with no value in search, and letting crawlers wander through them just burns crawl budget. The side effect is that genuinely useful label pages get swept up in the same rule.</p>

<h2>The mistake almost everyone makes</h2>
<div class="callout warn"><p><strong>robots.txt always outranks meta robots.</strong> If robots.txt says stay out, the crawler never loads the page at all, so it never gets to read the <code>&lt;meta name="robots" content="index,follow"&gt;</code> you carefully put in the theme.</p></div>
<p>This is why people flip the switch in a theme builder, upload the new theme, wait a month, and still see no label pages in Google. They only did half the job.</p>
<p>Think of it this way. Writing <code>index,follow</code> into the theme is like hanging a Welcome sign in your living room. robots.txt is the front gate. If the gate is locked, nobody ever gets far enough inside to read the sign.</p>

<h2>Before you open anything: one post, one label</h2>
<p>This matters more than it sounds, and it belongs <strong>before</strong> you flip the switch.</p>
<p>Say your post "Air fryer review" carries three labels: <em>Appliances</em>, <em>Kitchen</em> and <em>Reviews</em>. Blogger will build three category pages, each containing that same post:</p>
<pre><code>/search/label/Appliances  → contains this post
/search/label/Kitchen     → contains this post
/search/label/Reviews     → contains this post</code></pre>
<p>Index all of them and you have handed Google three near-identical pages to judge. That is <strong>duplicate content</strong>. Google has to pick one and ignore the rest, and sometimes those pages end up competing with the actual post for the same query.</p>
<p>The right approach is <strong>one primary label per post</strong>. Treat labels like shelves in a shop: an item sits on exactly one shelf. If you want people to find it from several angles, use in-article links or a related posts section instead.</p>

<h3>How to tidy your labels</h3>
<ol>
<li>Open Blogger and look at the full list of labels you currently have.</li>
<li>Merge labels that mean the same thing. <em>Reviews</em>, <em>Product reviews</em> and <em>review</em> should end up as one name.</li>
<li>Aim for at least <strong>five posts per label</strong>. A label holding a single post is too thin to be worth indexing.</li>
<li>Go back through older posts and cut each one down to a single primary label.</li>
<li>Name labels the way people actually search. <em>Home appliances</em> beats <em>Electrical</em>.</li>
</ol>
<div class="callout tip"><p><strong>Tip:</strong> a label name becomes both the category page title and part of the URL, so a descriptive phrase people really type earns you twice over.</p></div>

<h2>Turning it on, in order</h2>

<h3>Step 1: flip the switch in BlogKub</h3>
<p>There are two places to do this and they are the same value, so it makes no difference which one you use. The other view updates immediately.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>The SEO panel</strong>, under the "Labels" heading, is where you will find <strong>Allow label pages to be indexed</strong>.</li>
<li><strong>The product category menu settings</strong> on the review template carry the same switch inside the warning box.</li>
</ul>
<p>Once it is on, that box turns from amber to green and reminds you about the step that is left.</p>

<h3>Step 2: export the theme and upload it to Blogger</h3>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Export XML</strong> in the top right.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Download .xml</strong>.</li>
<li>Go to <a href="https://www.blogger.com" target="_blank" rel="noopener noreferrer">Blogger.com</a> and pick your blog.</li>
<li>In the left menu choose <strong>Theme</strong>, then click the <strong>▾</strong> arrow next to the Customise button.</li>
<li>Choose <strong>Restore</strong> and select the .xml file you downloaded.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Upload</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>Your theme now marks label pages <code>index,follow</code>, but nothing will happen until step 3.</p>

<h3>Step 3: paste the robots.txt (do not skip this)</h3>
<p>In the same Export window, click the <strong>📖 Guide</strong> button. You will find a robots.txt box that BlogKub generated to match your switch. It looks like this:</p>
<pre><code>User-agent: *
Disallow: /search?q=
Disallow: /search/label/*?
Allow: /search/label/
Allow: /

Sitemap: https://yourblog.blogspot.com/sitemap.xml</code></pre>
<p>Line by line:</p>
<ul>
<li><code>Disallow: /search?q=</code> still keeps crawlers out of keyword search results, which really are duplicate content and should not be indexed.</li>
<li><code>Disallow: /search/label/*?</code> keeps them out of label pages carrying parameters, such as pagination or sort variants, so you do not end up with several copies of one list.</li>
<li><code>Allow: /search/label/</code> <strong>lets crawlers into the label pages themselves</strong>. This is the line that does the work.</li>
</ul>
<p>Copy the whole box, then in Blogger:</p>
<ol>
<li>Open Blogger and select your blog.</li>
<li>In the left menu choose <strong>Settings</strong>.</li>
<li>Scroll down to <strong>Crawlers and indexing</strong>.</li>
<li>Turn on <strong>Enable custom robots.txt</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Custom robots.txt</strong> and paste what you copied.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Save</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<div class="callout warn"><p><strong>Careful:</strong> if you already had a robots.txt in there, delete all of it before pasting the new one. Do not append. A leftover <code>Disallow: /search</code> line will keep blocking your label pages no matter what else the file says.</p></div>

<h3>Step 4: tell Google there is something new</h3>
<p>Optional, but it speeds things up considerably.</p>
<ol>
<li>Open <a href="https://search.google.com/search-console" target="_blank" rel="noopener noreferrer">Google Search Console</a>.</li>
<li>Paste a label page URL into the <strong>URL Inspection</strong> box at the top.</li>
<li>If it reports "URL is not on Google", click <strong>Request indexing</strong>.</li>
<li>Repeat for each of your main labels.</li>
</ol>

<h2>How to check it actually worked</h2>

<h3>Check robots.txt</h3>
<p>Open this in a browser, with your own blog name:</p>
<pre><code>https://yourblog.blogspot.com/robots.txt</code></pre>
<p>You should see <code>Allow: /search/label/</code>, and you should <strong>not</strong> see a bare <code>Disallow: /search</code> line. If that line is still there, the save did not go through or you appended instead of replacing.</p>

<h3>Check the meta robots tag</h3>
<p>Open one of your label pages, right click, choose View page source, and search for <code>robots</code>. You want to see:</p>
<pre><code>&lt;meta content='index,follow,max-image-preview:large' name='robots'/&gt;</code></pre>
<p>Still seeing <code>noindex</code> means the theme upload did not take, or you exported before flipping the switch.</p>

<h3>Check in Search Console</h3>
<p>Run <strong>URL Inspection</strong> and look at two lines:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Crawl allowed</strong> must say <em>Yes</em>.</li>
<li><strong>Indexing allowed</strong> must say <em>Yes</em>.</li>
</ul>
<p>If the first says no, robots.txt is still blocking. If the first says yes but the second says no, the theme is still sending noindex.</p>

<h3>Check by searching</h3>
<p>Type this into Google:</p>
<pre><code>site:yourblog.blogspot.com/search/label/</code></pre>
<p>Results appearing means it worked.</p>
<div class="callout tip"><p><strong>Be patient.</strong> Google does not crawl every day. Expect several days to a few weeks, faster on blogs that publish often.</p></div>

<h2>When you should leave it off</h2>
<p>This feature does not suit every blog. Keep it <strong>off</strong> if any of these describe you.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>New blog, few posts.</strong> With one or two posts per label the category pages are painfully thin, and feeding Google a pile of thin pages helps nobody.</li>
<li><strong>Labels not tidied yet.</strong> If most posts still carry several labels you are about to publish a lot of duplicate content, which costs more than it earns.</li>
<li><strong>Careless label names</strong> such as <em>test</em>, <em>other</em> or <em>uncategorised</em>. Nobody searches for those.</li>
<li><strong>A personal blog you are not optimising.</strong> Leaving it off is simpler and safer.</li>
</ul>
<p>The safer route for a young blog is to <strong>build a real page per category</strong>, write two or three paragraphs introducing the topic, and link to the posts in it. That gives you a page with content of its own, which Google will index without you touching robots.txt at all. In BlogKub's product category menu settings you can set any row's link type to "Page" and point it there.</p>

<h2>Changing your mind later</h2>
<ol>
<li>Turn <strong>Allow label pages to be indexed</strong> back off in BlogKub.</li>
<li>Export the XML again and upload it to Blogger.</li>
<li>Copy the regenerated robots.txt, which goes back to <code>Disallow: /search</code>, and paste it over the old one.</li>
</ol>
<p>Google drops the label pages from its index over the following few weeks by itself. Nothing else to do.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions</h2>
<h3>Is the BlogKub switch enough on its own?</h3>
<p>No. It only writes a meta robots tag into the theme, while Blogger's default robots.txt still forbids crawlers from entering <code>/search</code>, and robots.txt wins. You always have to paste the new robots.txt as well.</p>

<h3>Why one post per label?</h3>
<p>A post carrying three labels puts the same content on three category pages, which is duplicate content competing with itself and sometimes with the post it came from.</p>

<h3>Should a brand new blog turn this on?</h3>
<p>No. If each label holds fewer than five posts the category pages are too thin to be worth indexing. Wait until you have the content.</p>

<h3>Can I turn it back off later?</h3>
<p>Yes. Turn the switch off, export again, and paste the blocking robots.txt back. Google drops the pages over the following weeks.</p>

<h3>How long does it take to show up?</h3>
<p>Usually several days to a few weeks, depending on how often Google crawls your blog. Request indexing in Search Console to hurry it along.</p>

<h3>Will label pages compete with my posts?</h3>
<p>They can, if the category page overlaps too heavily with a single post. Follow the one post one label rule and keep several posts per label, and the two end up doing different jobs: the category page answers broad queries, the post answers specific ones.</p>

<h2>Summary</h2>
<p>Indexing label pages is worth doing on a blog with a reasonable amount of content and tidy categories. Three things to remember:</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Tidy the labels first.</strong> One label per post, and enough posts per label.</li>
<li><strong>The switch and the robots.txt go together.</strong> Either one alone does nothing.</li>
<li><strong>Always verify</strong> in Search Console rather than assuming it worked.</li>
</ol>
<p>If your blog is still young, build a page per category instead. It performs better and carries none of the duplicate content risk.</p>

<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/label-indexing">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to create a page in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/create-page</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/create-page</guid>
      <pubDate>Sun, 26 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to create a page in Blogger step by step, why to title it in the Latin alphabet before renaming it, how pages differ from posts, how to link the URL to a menu item in BlogKub, and which pages your blog needs before applying to AdSense.</description>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<h1>How to create a page in Blogger and link it to your menu</h1>
<p class="lead">Menu items like About, Contact, and Privacy Policy are not made from posts. They are made from what Blogger calls Pages. This guide covers how pages differ from posts, how to create one, how to link its URL to a menu item in your theme, and which pages are worth having from day one.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 26 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 11 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>In short:</strong> go to blogger.com → <strong>Pages</strong> → <strong>New page</strong>, write it, and publish. Then <strong>copy that page URL</strong> and paste it into a Page-type menu item in BlogKub, and export the XML. Pages <strong>do not join the menu on their own</strong>: you always link them yourself. The pages to have before applying to AdSense are About, Contact, and a Privacy Policy.<br><strong>Important:</strong> title the page in the <strong>Latin alphabet first</strong>, such as <code>about</code>, publish it, and only then rename it into your own language. The URL is built from the title at first publish and cannot be changed afterwards.</p></div>

<h2>How pages differ from posts</h2>
<p>New Blogger users mix these up, because the editor looks almost identical for both. Their roles are quite different.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Posts</strong> are content tied to time. They carry a date, order newest first on the home page, take labels, appear in the RSS feed, and are the main thing that brings readers in from search.</li>
  <li><strong>Pages</strong> are static. They do not appear on the home page, take no labels, are not in the feed, and are not ordered by date. They suit information that barely changes.</li>
</ul>
<p>The simplest test is to ask <strong>whether this content will go stale.</strong> A review, a news item, or a lesson that might get a sequel should be a post. Information someone looks up to confirm the site is real, such as who you are, how to reach you, and what data the site collects, should be a page.</p>
<p>One limit worth knowing: <strong>Blogger allows up to 20 pages per blog.</strong> That sounds tight but is generous in practice, since most blogs genuinely use five or six. If you feel you are running out, some of those pages probably should have been posts.</p>

<h2 id="step1">Creating a page, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Open the Pages menu.</strong> Go to blogger.com, select the blog, and click <strong>Pages</strong> in the left menu. Not Posts.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Create the page.</strong> Click <strong>New page</strong>. You get an editor that looks like the post editor. <strong>Give it a Latin-alphabet title first</strong>, such as <code>about</code>, then write the content. The next section explains why, and it matters more than it sounds.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Publish.</strong> Click Publish at the top right. The page will show as published in the list.</li>
  <li><strong>Now rename it into your own language.</strong> Go back in and change the title to whatever your readers should see. The URL will not follow.</li>
  <li><strong>Copy the URL.</strong> Open the page in a new tab and copy the URL from the address bar.</li>
</ol>
<p>A Blogger page URL looks roughly like <code>yourblog/p/page-name.html</code>. Note the <code>/p/</code> segment, which distinguishes it from a post at <code>/2026/07/post-name.html</code>. That is an instant way to tell which kind of URL you are holding.</p>

<h2 id="naming">Title it in the Latin alphabet first, then rename it</h2>
<p>This one bites anyone writing in a non-Latin script, and once it has bitten you it cannot be undone.</p>
<p><strong>Blogger builds a page URL from the title at the moment you first publish</strong>, keeping only Latin letters and digits. If your title is written entirely in Thai, Arabic, Japanese or any other non-Latin script, every character is dropped and nothing is left to build a URL from. Blogger falls back to a generic one:</p>
<p><code>https://yourblog.blogspot.com/p/blog-page.html</code></p>
<p>Create several such pages and you get <code>blog-page_1.html</code>, <code>blog-page_2.html</code>, and so on. Nobody can tell which is which, neither you when wiring up the menu, nor Google, which treats words in a URL as one small signal about what a page covers.</p>
<p>Worse, <strong>pages have no custom permalink field the way posts do.</strong> In the post editor there is a Permalink option where you can type the slug yourself. Pages do not offer it. The title is your only lever on the URL.</p>

<h3>The way around it</h3>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Title it in the Latin alphabet first.</strong> Use a short, meaningful word: <code>about</code>, <code>contact</code>, <code>privacy</code>.</li>
  <li><strong>Publish.</strong> The URL is now locked as <code>https://yourblog.blogspot.com/p/about.html</code>.</li>
  <li><strong>Go back and rename the title</strong> into your own language, then update.</li>
  <li><strong>Check the URL did not move.</strong> It is still <code>/p/about.html</code>, while the heading readers see is in your language.</li>
</ol>
<p>You end up with both: a URL anyone can read, and a title in the language your readers actually speak.</p>
<p><strong>If you already published with a non-Latin title</strong>, that URL cannot be changed. The only route is to create a fresh page with a Latin title, move the content across, delete the old page, and update the menu link. Do it early: once other sites link to it or Google has indexed it, cleaning up gets messier.</p>
<p>For the Latin slug itself, use one word or two joined by a hyphen, all lowercase, such as <code>about</code>, <code>contact</code>, <code>privacy-policy</code>. Avoid bare numbers like <code>page1</code>, which tell you nothing when you come back to them later.</p>

<h2 id="step4">Linking the URL to a menu in a BlogKub theme</h2>
<p>The step that trips most people up is that <strong>a page you created will not appear in the menu by itself.</strong> Blogger does not add it for you. You have to tell the theme which menu slot points where.</p>
<p>In the BlogKub theme builder:</p>
<ol class="steps">
  <li>Open the menu block and add a new menu item</li>
  <li>Set its type to <strong>Page</strong></li>
  <li>Paste the URL you copied from Blogger</li>
  <li>Set the label shown on the menu, such as About</li>
  <li>Tick <strong>Page created in Blogger</strong> to record that the page really exists</li>
  <li>Export the XML and upload it in Blogger under <strong>Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>That tick box is a reminder to yourself, because the common mistake is adding the menu label in the theme and then forgetting to create the actual page in Blogger. Readers then click the menu and hit a not-found page, which costs more credibility than it sounds like it should.</p>

<h2>The pages a blog should have from the start</h2>
<p>Not every page is necessary, but three are worth having before the site gets traffic, because readers and the AdSense review both look for them.</p>

<h3>About</h3>
<p>Say who you are, why you write about this, and what a reader gets from the site. It does not need to be long, but it should sound like a person and contain detail nobody else could copy, such as your actual experience with the subject. This is one of the few places you can demonstrate that a real person is behind the site.</p>

<h3>Contact</h3>
<p>Give at least one channel that genuinely works: an email address, a contact form, or a social page. One warning: <strong>do not use the personal email you rely on for important accounts.</strong> Set up a separate address for the site, because any address published on a public page will be harvested by bots.</p>

<h3>Privacy Policy</h3>
<p>This one is required if you plan to apply to AdSense, which expects the site to tell users about cookies and the data advertising providers collect. Cover what the site collects, what it is used for, whether third parties are involved, and how readers can opt out.</p>
<p>If your site carries commission links, state that here or on a separate disclosure page. Both readers and ad platforms expect it.</p>

<h2>Other pages that help but are not required</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Terms of use</strong>, worth having if you allow comments or user submissions</li>
  <li><strong>A best-of index</strong>, which gives new readers a starting point, though it is premature while you have few posts</li>
  <li><strong>An FAQ</strong>, which cuts down repeat questions arriving through the contact page</li>
  <li><strong>A sponsorship disclosure</strong>, needed if you accept paid reviews</li>
</ul>
<p>Do not build all of these on day one. Do the three core pages properly first and add others when there is a real reason. A menu full of empty pages looks worse than a short menu where every page has substance.</p>

<h2>Common problems and fixes</h2>
<h3>The menu link leads to a not-found page</h3>
<p>Two usual causes: the page was never published, or the URL in the menu has a typo. Open that URL directly in a new tab first to confirm the page loads at all.</p>
<h3>I made a page but cannot find it in the list</h3>
<p>Check that you clicked Pages rather than Posts. The two keep separate lists, and a page accidentally made as a post will sit among the posts.</p>
<h3>I want to change the URL of a published page</h3>
<p>Possible only before the first publish. After that the URL is locked. Changing it means creating a new page and updating the menu link, which is why it pays to <strong>get the page title right the first time.</strong> See <a href="#naming">titling the page</a> for how.</p>
<h3>The page URL came out as blog-page.html</h3>
<p>The title was written entirely in a non-Latin script when you first published, so every character was stripped and nothing was left to build a URL from. It cannot be fixed in place: create a new page with a Latin-alphabet title instead. See <a href="#naming">titling the page</a>.</p>
<h3>A page is showing on the home page among the posts</h3>
<p>This should not happen, since pages do not enter the home feed. If you see it, check whether you created a post by mistake.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Keep page titles short and plain, because the title shapes a URL you cannot change later</li>
  <li>Write real content on every page. Do not leave empty pages just to pad the menu</li>
  <li>Use a separate email for the contact page, not your main personal address</li>
  <li>Test every menu link after each theme export</li>
  <li>Revisit the privacy policy whenever you add a new tool to the site, such as analytics or ads</li>
</ul>

<h2>Summary</h2>
<p>Pages are what make a blog read as a site with an owner rather than a pile of posts. The process is short: create it under <strong>Pages</strong>, publish, copy the URL, and link it to a menu item in your theme. The two things to remember are that <strong>pages never join the menu automatically</strong> and that <strong>the URL is fixed once published.</strong> Start with About, Contact, and a Privacy Policy, then add more when you have a reason.</p>
<p>The other job worth doing while setting up a new site is <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/favicon">setting the site icon</a>, since both are things readers notice before they read a word of your content.</p>

<h2>FAQ</h2>
<details><summary>What is the difference between a page and a post in Blogger?</summary><p>A post is dated content, ordered by time, shown on the home page, taggable with labels, and included in the feed. A page is static: it does not appear on the home page, takes no labels, and suits information that rarely changes, such as About and Contact.</p></details>
<details><summary>How many pages can a Blogger blog have?</summary><p>Up to 20 pages per blog, which is generous in practice, because the genuinely necessary pages number no more than five or six.</p></details>
<details><summary>Which pages should a blog have before applying to AdSense?</summary><p>At minimum About, Contact, and a Privacy Policy. AdSense requires a privacy policy covering cookies and the data collected by advertising providers. About and Contact exist to establish that a real person stands behind the site.</p></details>
<details><summary>I created a page but it does not show in the menu</summary><p>Blogger pages do not join the menu automatically. You have to link the URL yourself. In a BlogKub theme, add a menu item of type Page, paste the URL, and export the theme again.</p></details>
<details><summary>Why title the page in the Latin alphabet first?</summary><p>Blogger builds the URL from the title at first publish, keeping only Latin letters and digits. A title written entirely in a non-Latin script leaves nothing to build from, so Blogger falls back to blog-page.html, which cannot be changed. Title it about, publish, then rename the title into your own language. The URL stays /p/about.html.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I set a page URL manually like a post?</summary><p>No. The post editor has a Permalink option where you can type the slug yourself, but pages do not offer it. The title is the only way to influence a page URL, and only before the first publish.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does Google index Blogger pages?</summary><p>It can, like any other page, unless you have blocked it. But pages are rarely what brings search traffic. Their real job is to supply necessary information and make the site credible.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/create-page">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to change the favicon in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/favicon</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/favicon</guid>
      <pubDate>Sun, 26 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to upload a favicon in Blogger step by step, the 100KB square file requirement, where to find the URL for the BlogKub field, what Google needs before it shows your icon in search, and how to fix an icon that will not update.</description>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<h1>How to change the favicon in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">The favicon is the small image on the browser tab, in the bookmark list, and beside your result in mobile search. A blog that has never set one keeps the orange Blogger B, which makes the site look unfinished. This guide covers everything from preparing the file to fixing an icon that refuses to update.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 26 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>In short:</strong> make a <strong>square image, 96 or 144 pixels a side, under 100KB</strong>, then upload it at blogger.com → <strong>Layout</strong> → the <strong>Favicon</strong> box. The icon then lives at <code>yourblog/favicon.ico</code>, and that is the URL to paste into the Favicon field in BlogKub. If you still see the old icon afterwards, it is almost always the browser cache, not a setting you got wrong.</p></div>

<h2>What a favicon is, and why a blog needs one</h2>
<p><strong>A favicon is the icon a browser shows to stand in for your whole site.</strong> The tab is where people notice it most, followed by the bookmark list, browsing history, and the icon that appears when someone saves your site to a phone home screen.</p>
<p>The place most people overlook is <strong>mobile search results</strong>. Google shows a site icon next to the title in results. When someone scans a dozen results, a site with a clear icon stands out against one still showing a default. That is not a ranking factor, but it does affect whether people click.</p>
<p>Credibility matters just as much. A reader with several tabs open recognises your site by its icon. If that icon is still the Blogger default, your site reads as newly made and unattended, however good the writing inside it is.</p>

<h2>Get the file right first, and you will only upload once</h2>
<p>Blogger and Google have slightly different requirements. Satisfy both from the start and you will not have to redo it.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>It must be square.</strong> Equal width and height. A tall or wide image gets squashed, and Google may decline to show it in search at all.</li>
  <li><strong>The file must be under 100KB.</strong> That is a Blogger limit. Anything larger will not upload.</li>
  <li><strong>Use 96 or 144 pixels a side.</strong> Google states that an icon used in search should be a multiple of 48 pixels. Err large: an image can be scaled down cleanly, never up.</li>
  <li><strong>PNG is fine, .ico is not required.</strong> Google supports ICO, PNG, SVG, GIF and JPEG. PNG is easiest and supports transparency.</li>
</ul>
<p>On the design itself, one constraint outweighs everything else: <strong>the icon will be shrunk to roughly 16 pixels on a tab.</strong> Small lettering turns to mud at that size. Use a single symbol, a single letter, or a simple shape with strong contrast against its background. Do not shrink a full logo with your site name in it.</p>

<h2 id="step1">Uploading the favicon in Blogger, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Prepare the file.</strong> Make the square image to the spec above and save it as a PNG under 100KB.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Open the settings.</strong> Go to blogger.com, select the blog, and click <strong>Layout</strong> in the left menu.</li>
  <li><strong>Edit the Favicon box.</strong> It sits at the top left of the layout grid. Click the pencil icon, choose your file, and save.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Confirm the upload.</strong> Open a new tab and enter your blog URL followed by <code>/favicon.ico</code>. Seeing the new image there means it worked.</li>
</ol>
<p>If saving throws an error, check two things before anything else: the file is over 100KB, or the image is not square. Those two account for nearly every failed upload.</p>

<h2 id="step4">Using the URL in a theme built with BlogKub</h2>
<p>The BlogKub theme builder has a field for the favicon URL so the theme can declare the icon directly in the page. To find the URL:</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>On a blogspot address:</strong> <code>https://yourblog.blogspot.com/favicon.ico</code></li>
  <li><strong>On a custom domain:</strong> use that domain, for example <code>https://yourdomain.com/favicon.ico</code></li>
</ul>
<p>Paste the URL into the Favicon field, export the XML, and upload it to Blogger under <strong>Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore</strong>. The theme will then declare the icon to the browser from the first page load.</p>
<p>One warning: <strong>do not use an image URL you do not control</strong>, such as a link from a free image host or a chat attachment. The day that link dies, your icon disappears sitewide. Always use a URL on your own domain.</p>

<h2>What Google needs before it shows your icon in search</h2>
<p>Google showing your icon beside your results is not automatic. A few conditions apply.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>The file must be reachable.</strong> If robots.txt blocks the icon, Google cannot crawl it and will not show it.</li>
  <li><strong>Keep the URL stable.</strong> Changing the icon URL repeatedly forces Google to recrawl each time.</li>
  <li><strong>The icon should represent the brand.</strong> Google states the icon should stand for the site, not be unrelated or misleading imagery.</li>
  <li><strong>Expect a wait.</strong> The icon appears in results only after Googlebot recrawls your home page, which can take days or weeks. There is no way to force it.</li>
</ul>

<h2>The icon changed but I still see the old one</h2>
<p>This is the most common complaint, and it is nearly always <strong>not a settings problem</strong>. Browsers cache favicons far longer than other files because they assume icons rarely change.</p>
<p>Work through it in this order.</p>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Check the source first.</strong> Open <code>yourblog/favicon.ico</code> directly. If the new image is there, the upload worked and the problem is purely display.</li>
  <li><strong>Try a private window.</strong> Seeing the new icon there confirms it is the normal browser cache.</li>
  <li><strong>Clear the cache</strong>, or simply wait a day or two and look again. It will refresh on its own.</li>
  <li><strong>Check the phone separately.</strong> Mobile caches are independent of desktop and may lag behind.</li>
</ol>
<p>Only if <code>/favicon.ico</code> genuinely still shows the old image should you go back and check that you saved in Layout, and that the file met the 100KB and square requirements.</p>

<h2>Other problems that come up</h2>
<h3>The tab icon updated but Google search still shows the old one</h3>
<p>Normal, and it is a matter of waiting. Google crawls the icon separately from page content and refreshes on its own schedule. There is no tool to refresh only the icon. What you can do is keep the file easy to reach and stop changing its URL.</p>
<h3>The icon looks blurry or pixelated</h3>
<p>Usually the source image was too small and got scaled up. Rebuild it from something larger, such as 144 pixels a side, and let the system scale down instead.</p>
<h3>The transparent background turned white or black</h3>
<p>Some places that display the icon fill the background themselves. If you want certainty, give the icon a solid brand-coloured background rather than relying on transparency.</p>
<h3>The icon disappeared after moving to a custom domain</h3>
<p>Go back and update the URL in the BlogKub Favicon field to point at the new domain, then export the theme again.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Use one symbol or one letter. Do not shrink a full logo containing your site name.</li>
  <li>Pick colours that hold up against both white and dark backgrounds, because tabs come in light and dark themes.</li>
  <li>Keep a large master file in case you need other icon sizes later.</li>
  <li>Set it up when the blog is new, so you are not waiting on a recrawl once the site has traffic.</li>
  <li>Check the result on desktop and mobile separately, since the caches are independent.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Summary</h2>
<p>A favicon is a ten-minute job you do once, and it shapes how your blog reads every time someone opens a tab or sees you in search. Three things are worth remembering: <strong>the image must be square, the file must be under 100KB, and the URL is always /favicon.ico</strong>. As for the icon that will not update, that is nearly always caching rather than a mistake, so check the source before drawing any conclusions.</p>
<p>With the icon sorted, the next thing worth doing is <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/create-page">creating the basic pages</a> such as About and Contact, which both readers and AdSense look for.</p>

<h2>FAQ</h2>
<details><summary>What size should a Blogger favicon be?</summary><p>Blogger caps the file at 100KB and the image should be square. Use 96 or 144 pixels on each side, because Google states that an icon used in search results should be a multiple of 48 pixels.</p></details>
<details><summary>What is the favicon URL on Blogger?</summary><p>It is your blog URL followed by /favicon.ico, for example https://yourblog.blogspot.com/favicon.ico. On a custom domain, use that domain instead. Open the URL in a browser to confirm the upload worked.</p></details>
<details><summary>Why do I still see the old favicon after changing it?</summary><p>Almost always the browser cache, which holds favicons far longer than ordinary files. Try a private window or clear the cache. The icon shown in Google results updates only after Googlebot recrawls, and there is no way to speed that up.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the file have to be a .ico?</summary><p>No. Blogger accepts ordinary image files such as PNG, and Google supports ICO, PNG, SVG, GIF and JPEG. PNG is the easy choice because it is simple to produce and supports transparency.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does a favicon affect SEO?</summary><p>It is not a ranking factor, but Google shows the icon beside mobile search results. A clear, recognisable icon makes your result stand out against sites still using the default, which affects click-through.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/favicon">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Earn from Blogger with Google AdSense: the complete 2026 guide</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-adsense</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-adsense</guid>
      <pubDate>Sat, 18 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Blog</category>
      <description>The complete 2026 guide to earning from Blogger with Google AdSense, from getting your site approved, to placing ads that earn without breaking the rules, to growing revenue sustainably, plus the mistakes to avoid.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/blogger-adsense.png" type="image/png" length="834168"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/blogger-adsense.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/blogger-adsense.png" alt="Earn from Blogger with Google AdSense: the complete 2026 guide" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>Earn from Blogger with Google AdSense: the complete 2026 guide</h1>
<p class="lead">You have a blog and you want it to earn too. Google AdSense is the easiest starting point for Blogger, but a lot of people get stuck at the application, or place ads so badly that they earn little and drive readers away. This article walks you through it step by step, from preparing your site for approval, to placing ads that earn without breaking the rules, to growing revenue sustainably.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 18 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 14 minute read &nbsp; Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</p>

<div class="tldr">
  <h4>Quick summary (30 second read)</h4>
  <ul>
    <li><strong>AdSense requires approval first.</strong> Prepare quality original content plus complete About, Policy, and Contact pages.</li>
    <li><strong>Content must always be the star.</strong> Policy forbids ads being more prominent than the content.</li>
    <li><strong>Place ads in the right spots:</strong> within the article, below the header, or in the sidebar, with an "Ad" label.</li>
    <li><strong>Revenue depends on quality traffic.</strong> Good SEO is the engine of AdSense earnings.</li>
    <li><strong>Do not rely on AdSense alone.</strong> Affiliate and other channels often deliver more per reader.</li>
  </ul>
</div>

<figure>
  <img src="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/blogger-adsense.png" alt="Earning from Blogger with Google AdSense, the 2026 guide" width="820" data-original-width="1600" data-original-height="900" loading="lazy" decoding="async">
  <figcaption>AdSense is a good starting point for earning from a blog, when done the right way and while protecting the reader experience.</figcaption>
</figure>

<h2>How AdSense works, and who it suits</h2>
<p><strong>Google AdSense is a service that lets you show ads on your site and earn a share of the revenue when readers see or click them.</strong> Google is the middleman that matches ads relevant to your content and your readers. You do not have to find advertisers yourself. You just add the code and the ads display automatically.</p>
<p>AdSense suits people just starting to earn from a blog, because it is easy to set up and you do not need your own products. That said, the revenue per click in general categories is often not very high, so AdSense works best for sites with a lot of traffic. Earning meaningful revenue therefore requires steady readers, which brings us back to doing <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-seo">SEO to rank on Google's first page</a>. Good SEO is the engine that drives AdSense revenue.</p>

<h2>Step 1: prepare your site for AdSense approval</h2>
<p>The first hurdle many people hit is approval. Google decides whether your site is valuable enough to show ads. Here is what you need before applying.</p>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Quality original content.</strong> Have several valuable, self-written articles that are not copied. Thin or copied content is the number one reason for rejection.</li>
  <li><strong>Complete key pages.</strong> You need About, Privacy Policy, and Contact pages, because they are trust signals.</li>
  <li><strong>Clear navigation.</strong> Have a menu, an organized structure, and internal links that make the site feel complete.</li>
  <li><strong>A genuinely usable site.</strong> It renders well on mobile, loads fast, and has no broken pages or dead links.</li>
  <li><strong>Apply through blogger.com.</strong> Go to the "Earnings" menu in Blogger and follow the steps to connect with AdSense.</li>
</ol>
<div class="box tip"><strong>Tip:</strong> a theme with an organized structure that supports policy pages improves your odds of approval. Every BlogKub template comes with clear navigation and supports placing <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/footer">policy links in the footer</a>, so you can get your site ready more easily.</div>

<h2>Step 2: place ads that earn without breaking the rules</h2>
<p>Once approved, the next job is placing ads that pay well without ruining the reader experience or breaking policy. There are three main placements that work well on Blogger.</p>
<table>
  <tr><th>Placement</th><th>Upside</th><th>Watch out for</th></tr>
  <tr><td>In the article (middle)</td><td>Readers are engaged, good response</td><td>Do not interrupt reading too often</td></tr>
  <tr><td>Below the header (top)</td><td>Seen right on arrival</td><td>Do not push the main content too far down</td></tr>
  <tr><td>Sidebar (side)</td><td>Does not disrupt the main content</td><td>Less visible than in-content spots</td></tr>
</table>
<p>The iron rule to remember is that <strong>content must always be the star.</strong> AdSense policy forbids ads being more numerous or more prominent than the content, and you must show an "Ad" label so readers can tell them apart. Handling all this correctly is easy with the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/ad">BlogKub ad slot block</a>, which prepares placements and labels in line with AdSense guidance.</p>
<div class="box warn"><strong>A note on speed:</strong> ads load from an external source and can make content jump (CLS), which affects both the reader experience and Core Web Vitals. Place them in spots with clearly reserved space and do not overdo it, to keep the site fast.</div>

<h2>Step 3: grow revenue sustainably</h2>
<p>AdSense revenue = traffic × view/click rate × value per click. Growing revenue means looking at all three.</p>
<h3>Grow traffic with SEO and content</h3>
<p>This is the factor with the biggest impact. The more quality readers you have, the more the ads are seen. Writing content that answers people's questions and ranks on Google is an investment with long-term returns. Read how to do it in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-seo">Blogger SEO guide</a>, and use features that get people reading multiple articles, such as <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related posts</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/morefrom">latest posts</a>, to raise pages per visit.</p>
<h3>Keep readers longer and bring them back</h3>
<p>Readers who stay longer and return see more ads and generate steady revenue, so a good experience ties directly to earnings. Features like an easy-on-the-eyes <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode</a>, a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/bookmark">bookmark</a> to save for later, and a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a> that helps navigate long articles all deepen readers' bond with the site, which affects revenue over the long term.</p>
<h3>Choose topics with high ad value</h3>
<p>Some content categories have a higher value per click, such as finance, insurance, technology, and education. If your content is in these categories, revenue per click is often better than general entertainment. That said, choose topics you are genuinely good at and can write well, because content quality matters more than chasing ad value.</p>

<h2>Mistakes that get your AdSense account in trouble</h2>
<p>AdSense has strict policies, and violations can suspend your account and cost you all your revenue. Absolutely avoid these.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Do not click your own ads</strong> or ask others to click them. Google's systems detect it and treat it as fraud.</li>
  <li><strong>Do not place too many ads</strong> so that they outshine the content, or trick people into clicking by accident.</li>
  <li><strong>Do not use policy-violating content</strong> such as plagiarized, illegal, or adult content.</li>
  <li><strong>Do not buy fake traffic.</strong> Bot traffic or traffic from illegitimate sources violates policy.</li>
</ul>
<p>In short, do everything honestly, let quality content draw real readers, and let the ads work naturally. That is the only sustainable path.</p>

<div class="cta-band">
  <h3>Start with a site that is ready for AdSense</h3>
  <p>Build a Blogger theme with an organized structure, support for policy pages, and ad slots that follow the guidance, for free and with no coding.</p>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/builder.html">Open the Builder free →</a>
</div>

<h2>Revenue options beyond AdSense</h2>
<p>AdSense is a good starting point, but it is not the only path and often not the highest-earning one. Look at other options alongside it.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Affiliate marketing:</strong> recommend products and earn a commission when someone buys through your link. It suits review sites well. Use a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/proscons">Pros/Cons box</a> and a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cta">CTA button</a> to lead readers toward a purchase smoothly.</li>
  <li><strong>Sell your own products or services:</strong> courses, ebooks, or services return far more per reader than ads.</li>
  <li><strong>Sponsorships and paid articles:</strong> once the site has enough readers, brands may reach out for sponsored content.</li>
  <li><strong>Donations and memberships:</strong> for sites with a tight-knit reader community.</li>
</ul>
<p>The upside of having several channels is that you do not have to stuff the site with ads, and revenue is steadier because it does not depend on a single source. A site with a balanced mix is usually the most sustainable.</p>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>Earning from Blogger with AdSense starts with preparing a site that has quality content and complete key pages so it passes approval. From there, place ads in the right spots while keeping content the star at all times and showing the "Ad" label per policy. Growing revenue sustainably means focusing on more quality traffic through SEO, keeping readers longer and bringing them back, and avoiding the mistakes that get accounts in trouble. Most important, do not rely on AdSense alone. Affiliate and other channels often return more and disrupt readers less. When you build a genuinely valuable site and protect the reader experience, the revenue follows sustainably. If you do not have a ready site yet, <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/builder.html">start building a Blogger theme with BlogKub</a> for free right away.</p>

<hr>
<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Can Blogger apply for AdSense?</summary><p>Yes. Blogger is a Google platform and supports AdSense directly. You apply through the 'Earnings' menu in Blogger, or apply at AdSense directly. Your site needs a reasonable amount of quality original content and key pages like About, Privacy Policy, and Contact to have a chance of approval.</p></details>
<details><summary>How much traffic do I need to apply for AdSense?</summary><p>AdSense sets no official minimum traffic. What matters more is the quality and quantity of content. Your site should have several pieces of quality original content, clear navigation, and complete policy pages, rather than focusing on visitor numbers. A thin-content site often fails even with traffic.</p></details>
<details><summary>How many ad placements are appropriate?</summary><p>There is no fixed number, but the principle is that content must always be the star. AdSense policy forbids ads being more prominent than the content. Place them where they are visible but do not disrupt reading, such as within the article, below the header, or in the sidebar. Start with a few and watch the results, which is better than stuffing ads until readers leave.</p></details>
<details><summary>Why did my AdSense application fail?</summary><p>Common reasons are thin or non-original content, missing key pages (About, Privacy Policy, Contact), unclear navigation, or a site that is not genuinely ready. Fix it by adding quality original content, building complete policy pages, and organizing the site structure before reapplying.</p></details>
<details><summary>Is AdSense the best way to earn from Blogger?</summary><p>AdSense is an easy starting point suited to beginners, but it is not the only one. Many sites earn more from affiliate marketing, selling their own products or services, or sponsorships, which disrupt readers less. A balanced mix of channels is usually more sustainable than relying on AdSense alone.</p></details>

<hr>
<h2>Keep reading</h2>
<div class="related">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-seo"><b>Blogger SEO 2026</b><span>Rank on Google's first page, the engine of revenue</span></a>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/start-blogger-blog"><b>How to start a free Blogger blog</b><span>From zero to a beautiful theme</span></a>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/ad"><b>Ad slot guide</b><span>Place AdSense ads the right way</span></a>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/"><b>BlogKub Learning Center</b><span>Over 40 feature guides</span></a>
</div><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-adsense">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Blogger SEO 2026: the hands-on guide to ranking on Google&apos;s first page</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-seo</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-seo</guid>
      <pubDate>Sat, 18 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Blog</category>
      <description>A hands-on Blogger SEO guide for 2026, covering every step: base settings, URL structure, writing E-E-A-T content, on-page, speed, schema, and AEO/GEO for the AI era, with a checklist you can act on right away.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/blogger-seo.png" type="image/png" length="786792"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/blogger-seo.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/blogger-seo.png" alt="Blogger SEO 2026: the hands-on guide to ranking on Google's first page" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>Blogger SEO 2026: the hands-on guide to ranking on Google's first page</h1>
<p class="lead">A lot of people assume Blogger cannot compete with WordPress on SEO. The truth is that you really can get a Blogger blog onto the first page of Google, if you know what to focus on. This article gathers every step that works in 2026, from the base settings and content structure all the way to getting AI to cite your content, with a checklist you can follow right away.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 18 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 15 minute read &nbsp; Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</p>

<div class="tldr">
  <h4>Quick summary (30 second read)</h4>
  <ul>
    <li><strong>SEO on Blogger genuinely works.</strong> What decides rankings is content quality and user experience, not the platform.</li>
    <li><strong>Get the basics solid:</strong> set up HTTPS, meta description, URL structure, a sitemap, and a theme that is fast and supports schema.</li>
    <li><strong>Content is king:</strong> write to fully answer the search intent, with E-E-A-T and a structure that is easy to scan.</li>
    <li><strong>The new era needs AEO and GEO:</strong> shape your content so Google's featured snippets and AI (ChatGPT, Gemini, AI Overviews) pull it in and cite it.</li>
    <li><strong>Measure with Search Console</strong> and keep improving. SEO is a marathon, not a sprint.</li>
  </ul>
</div>

<figure>
  <img src="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/blogger-seo.png" alt="The Blogger SEO 2026 guide to ranking a blog on Google's first page" width="820" data-original-width="1600" data-original-height="900" loading="lazy" decoding="async">
  <figcaption>SEO on Blogger in 2026 delivers real results when you focus on quality content, good structure, and user experience.</figcaption>
</figure>

<h2>What SEO on Blogger is, and why it still works well in 2026</h2>
<p><strong>SEO (Search Engine Optimization) is the practice of tuning your site and content so they appear as high as possible in Google's results for the terms your audience searches.</strong> On Blogger, SEO is no different in principle from any other platform, because in the end Google ranks "pages", not "platforms".</p>
<p>The belief that Blogger cannot keep up with WordPress is out of date. In reality, Blogger has several advantages. It belongs to Google itself, its infrastructure is fast and stable, it includes free HTTPS, and you never have to worry about security or plugins that slow the site down. The two things that used to be real limitations were customizing the design and theme structure, and adding schema data. Both are solved by a theme designed specifically for SEO, and that is exactly what the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/builder.html">BlogKub theme builder</a> handles for you.</p>
<p>What changed in 2026 is that Google has become much smarter. It no longer counts words or matches keywords literally. Instead it understands the "meaning" and "intent" of both the query and the content. On top of that, AI Overviews and other AI tools now pull content straight into their answers. This means modern SEO has to think beyond ranking. Your content has to be the "best answer" that both people and AI choose to use.</p>

<h2>Step 1: set up the Blogger basics the SEO way</h2>
<p>Before you think about content, lay a solid foundation. These basics are set once and pay off for a long time.</p>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Turn on HTTPS.</strong> Go to Blogger settings and turn on both "HTTPS availability" and "HTTPS redirect", because HTTPS is a baseline ranking factor and builds trust.</li>
  <li><strong>Set the site meta description.</strong> Under settings, enable the search description and write a site description that clearly says what the site is about.</li>
  <li><strong>Set custom robots tags.</strong> Enable custom robots header tags so you can control indexing, and set posts and static pages to index, follow.</li>
  <li><strong>Submit your sitemap to Search Console.</strong> Connect the site to Google Search Console and submit sitemap.xml so Google can index it quickly and completely.</li>
  <li><strong>Use a fast theme that supports schema.</strong> The theme is the foundation of SEO on Blogger. Choose one that loads fast, renders well on mobile, and has schema built in.</li>
</ol>
<div class="box tip"><strong>Tip:</strong> a good theme clears step 5 automatically. Every BlogKub template ships with SEO structure, schema, and responsive design out of the box, so you never have to edit XML yourself. Read more in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/templates">guide to choosing a template</a>.</div>

<h2>Step 2: URL structure and naming your posts</h2>
<p>The URL is a small signal that Google and readers both use to understand what a page is about. On Blogger, a post's URL comes from its "permalink", which you should set yourself rather than letting the system generate it automatically.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Short and meaningful:</strong> a good URL conveys the topic. For example, <code>/blogger-seo</code> is better than <code>/2026/07/post-title-123</code>.</li>
  <li><strong>Include the main keyword:</strong> put the article's main search term in the URL, but do not make it too long.</li>
  <li><strong>Set it once, do not change it later:</strong> changing an already-indexed URL loses ranking. If you must change it, set up a redirect.</li>
</ul>
<p>The post title is one of the most important on-page factors. A good title puts the main search term near the front, states the benefit clearly, and invites the click. For example, "Blogger SEO 2026: the guide to ranking on Google's first page" conveys the topic (Blogger SEO), the year (freshness), and the benefit (ranking on the first page).</p>

<h2>Step 3: write content that both people and Google love (E-E-A-T)</h2>
<p>Content is the heart of SEO. No technique can make up for bad content. Google assesses content quality with the <strong>E-E-A-T</strong> framework, which stands for Experience, Expertise, Authoritativeness, and Trustworthiness. This is what Google looks for in quality content.</p>
<h3>Fully answer the search intent</h3>
<p>Before you write, ask yourself what the person searching this term really wants. Someone searching "Blogger SEO" does not just want a definition, they want methods that actually work. Fully answering the search intent is the number one factor that gets content to rank. Write so the reader gets every answer they need on one page, without having to look elsewhere.</p>
<h3>Show experience and expertise</h3>
<p>Content that comes from real experience carries more weight than a shallow roundup of information. Include real examples, deeper insight, and a point of view others do not have. Say who wrote it, too, through an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/about">author page (About)</a> that states their expertise, because Google values content it knows comes from someone who genuinely knows the subject.</p>
<h3>Write so it is easy to scan</h3>
<p>People read the web by "sweeping" their eyes, not reading every word. Organize your content with clear subheadings, short paragraphs, lists, and tables, so readers find what they want quickly. Having a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a> helps both the reader and Google understand the article's structure, and increases the chance of getting jump-to-section links in the results.</p>

<h2>Step 4: on-page SEO to do on every article</h2>
<p>On-page SEO is tuning the elements inside a page to be search-friendly. Here is the list to run through every time you publish an article.</p>
<table>
  <tr><th>Element</th><th>Good practice</th></tr>
  <tr><td>Title tag</td><td>Main keyword near the front, 50 to 60 characters, invites the click</td></tr>
  <tr><td>Meta description</td><td>Summarize the content in 120 to 155 characters, with the keyword and an invitation</td></tr>
  <tr><td>H1</td><td>One per page, matching the article topic</td></tr>
  <tr><td>H2/H3</td><td>Structure in layers, using questions and related terms</td></tr>
  <tr><td>Internal link</td><td>Link to other articles on the site naturally</td></tr>
  <tr><td>Image ALT</td><td>Describe the image honestly, important for Google Images</td></tr>
</table>
<p>Of all these elements, <strong>internal links are the most overlooked and the most powerful.</strong> Linking between articles helps Google understand how your content relates, spreads authority across the site, and keeps readers on the site longer. Picture your site as a network where every page connects to the others, so whichever way a reader or a bot arrives, there is always a next step. Features like <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related posts</a>, <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/breadcrumb">breadcrumbs</a>, and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/anchorlink">anchor links</a> build this network automatically.</p>

<h2>Step 5: images and speed (Core Web Vitals)</h2>
<p>Site speed is a direct ranking factor. Google measures it through <strong>Core Web Vitals</strong>, which has three main metrics.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>LCP (Largest Contentful Paint):</strong> the time for the largest element to finish loading, which should be under 2.5 seconds and is often affected by large images.</li>
  <li><strong>INP (Interaction to Next Paint):</strong> how fast the page responds when the user taps, which should be under 200 milliseconds.</li>
  <li><strong>CLS (Cumulative Layout Shift):</strong> how much content jumps around while loading, which should be low and often comes from images or ads with no set size.</li>
</ul>
<p>Images are the number one cause of a slow site. Before uploading, resize them appropriately and compress the file, and always add a meaningful ALT. Read how to handle images properly in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/image">image block guide</a>. As for overall speed, a lightweight theme with no heavy scripts helps a great deal, which is a strength of a client-side theme like BlogKub.</p>

<h2>Step 6: schema and structured data</h2>
<p>Schema (structured data) is special code that tells Google clearly what the content on a page is, such as this is an article, this is the author, this is a breadcrumb. Schema helps Google understand the content more accurately and may surface a standout rich result in the search page.</p>
<p>The schema useful for a blog includes Organization and WebSite (identifying the site), BlogPosting or Article (identifying the article), BreadcrumbList (the navigation path), and ImageObject (the image). Writing schema yourself in Blogger XML is complicated, but a good theme adds it automatically. Every BlogKub template lays down these basic schemas, and features like <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/breadcrumb">breadcrumbs</a> generate the BreadcrumbList schema for you.</p>
<div class="box warn"><strong>Worth knowing:</strong> Google has retired the rich results for FAQ and HowTo, meaning these schemas no longer produce a special appearance in the search page. They still have value for AI that pulls content into answers, so there is no rush to remove them, but do not rely on them for a rich result. Focus on Article and Breadcrumb schema, which still deliver real results.</div>

<h2>Step 7: AEO and GEO, getting AI to cite your content</h2>
<p>This is the part that separates a site doing old-style SEO from one that is ready for the future. In 2026, a lot of people find information through Google's AI Overviews, ChatGPT, Gemini, and Perplexity, which pull content from the web to summarize their answers. Getting your content chosen and cited in those answers is called <strong>AEO (Answer Engine Optimization)</strong> and <strong>GEO (Generative Engine Optimization)</strong>.</p>
<p>The good news is that AEO and GEO share the same foundation as good SEO, just with a few added emphases.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Answer directly and concisely:</strong> put a sentence that clearly answers the question at the start of each section, so AI can pull it in easily. For instance, open a section with a definition or a direct answer.</li>
  <li><strong>Use question-style headings:</strong> phrase your H2/H3 as questions people actually ask, because AI looks for question-and-answer pairs.</li>
  <li><strong>Include a summary box:</strong> a TL;DR box or an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo">AEO summary box</a> at the top of the article helps both readers and AI see the key point immediately.</li>
  <li><strong>Include factual, citable information:</strong> numbers, steps, and concrete data are easier to cite than vague opinions.</li>
  <li><strong>Build brand credibility:</strong> AI tends to cite sites with a clear identity, with about and author pages and mentions elsewhere.</li>
</ul>
<p>Notice that the article you are reading uses all of these techniques. It has a summary box at the top, headings that answer questions, direct summary sentences, and an FAQ at the bottom. This is the structure that people, Google, and AI all like. Learn more about making content AI can cite in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo">AEO Summary Box guide</a>.</p>

<h2>Step 8: measure and improve with Search Console</h2>
<p>SEO without measurement is like driving with your eyes closed. <strong>Google Search Console (GSC)</strong> is a free tool you must use. It tells you which queries your site appears for, how many people click, your average position, and which pages are indexed.</p>
<p>How to make GSC work for you:</p>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Look at the Performance report.</strong> Find queries where the site ranks 5 to 20 (page 2) and improve that article, because it is close to reaching the first page.</li>
  <li><strong>Check Coverage/Indexing.</strong> See which pages are not yet indexed and fix the problem.</li>
  <li><strong>Look at CTR.</strong> A page that ranks well but gets few clicks may need a more compelling title and description.</li>
  <li><strong>Improve existing content.</strong> Updating old articles to be current and more complete often works faster than writing new ones.</li>
</ol>
<p>Remember that SEO is a marathon. A new site usually takes 3 to 6 months before you see clear results. The key is consistency: keep publishing quality content, build a network of internal links, and improve based on real data.</p>

<div class="cta-band">
  <h3>Want a Blogger theme that supports SEO out of the box?</h3>
  <p>Build and customize your own theme for free with BlogKub. SEO structure, schema, and speed are all included, with no coding.</p>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/builder.html">Open the Builder free →</a>
</div>

<h2>Blogger SEO checklist (save it for every article)</h2>
<ul>
  <li>☐ HTTPS is on and the sitemap is submitted to Search Console</li>
  <li>☐ URL is short, has the keyword, and is set once</li>
  <li>☐ Title has the keyword near the front, plus a compelling meta description</li>
  <li>☐ Content fully answers the search intent and has E-E-A-T</li>
  <li>☐ Structured with H2/H3 and a table of contents, easy to scan</li>
  <li>☐ Internal links to related articles, placed naturally</li>
  <li>☐ Images compressed and every image has an ALT</li>
  <li>☐ Schema (Article + Breadcrumb) from the theme</li>
  <li>☐ Summary box, FAQ, and question-style headings (AEO/GEO)</li>
  <li>☐ Passes Core Web Vitals (fast, no jumping)</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>Blogger SEO genuinely works in 2026, once you understand that the deciding factors are content quality and user experience, not the platform. Start by laying a solid foundation (HTTPS, sitemap, a good theme), then focus on content that fully answers the search intent and has E-E-A-T. From there, do the on-page work on every article, pay attention to speed and schema, and go one step further with AEO and GEO so AI cites your content. Finally, measure with Search Console and keep improving. Do every step consistently and your Blogger blog really can reach Google's first page. And if you want a theme that lays the SEO foundation for you without touching code, <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/builder.html">start building your theme with BlogKub</a>.</p>

<hr>
<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Can Blogger do SEO as well as WordPress?</summary><p>Yes. Blogger can do SEO well enough to genuinely compete, because Google owns the platform, with fast, secure infrastructure and free HTTPS. The old limitations were theme customization and schema, which are solved by a theme that ships with a complete SEO structure. What really decides rankings is content quality and user experience, not the platform.</p></details>
<details><summary>How long until Blogger SEO shows results?</summary><p>Usually 3 to 6 months for a new site that publishes consistently. Google needs time to index, understand what the site is about, and build up trust signals. Some articles rank faster if the keyword is low competition. The key is publishing quality content consistently and improving based on Search Console data.</p></details>
<details><summary>What are AEO and GEO, and how are they different from SEO?</summary><p>SEO is about ranking in the normal search results. AEO (Answer Engine Optimization) is about getting your content pulled into featured snippets and answer boxes. GEO (Generative Engine Optimization) is about getting AI like ChatGPT, Gemini, and AI Overviews to cite your content. All three share the same foundation: clear content that answers directly, is well structured, and is trustworthy.</p></details>
<details><summary>How many times should I use my keyword in an article?</summary><p>There is no fixed number, and you should not count. Google today understands meaning and context, not word counts. Use your main keyword naturally in the title, the first paragraph, and subheadings, along with related terms that fit the context. Keyword stuffing hurts you and can be penalized. Always write for the reader first.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the Blogger theme affect SEO?</summary><p>It matters a lot. The theme determines your HTML structure, speed, schema, mobile rendering, and navigation elements like breadcrumbs and a table of contents. A theme that ships with a complete SEO structure lets you focus on content, while a poorly built theme can drag your rankings down even when the content is good. Choosing an SEO-friendly theme is a worthwhile investment.</p></details>

<hr>
<h2>Keep reading</h2>
<div class="related">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-adsense"><b>Earn from Blogger with AdSense</b><span>Turn SEO traffic into revenue</span></a>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/start-blogger-blog"><b>How to start a free Blogger blog</b><span>From zero to a beautiful theme</span></a>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo"><b>AEO Summary Box guide</b><span>Make content AI and Google pull into answers</span></a>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/"><b>BlogKub Learning Center</b><span>Over 40 feature guides</span></a>
</div><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-seo">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to start a free Blogger blog, from scratch to a beautiful theme (2026 beginner&apos;s guide)</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/start-blogger-blog</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/start-blogger-blog</guid>
      <pubDate>Sat, 18 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Blog</category>
      <description>A 2026 beginner&apos;s guide to starting a free Blogger blog step by step, from signing up and naming your blog, to writing your first post, to customizing a professional-looking theme with no coding.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/start-blogger-blog.png" type="image/png" length="784284"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/start-blogger-blog.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/start-blogger-blog.png" alt="How to start a free Blogger blog, from scratch to a beautiful theme (2026 beginner's guide)" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to start a free Blogger blog, from scratch to a beautiful theme (2026 beginner's guide)</h1>
<p class="lead">You want a blog of your own but do not know where to start. Blogger is a free, easy option that belongs to Google. This article walks you through building a blog from zero, step by step, from signing up and naming it, to writing your first post, to customizing a professional-looking theme without writing a single line of code.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 18 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 13 minute read &nbsp; Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</p>

<div class="tldr">
  <h4>Quick summary (30 second read)</h4>
  <ul>
    <li><strong>Blogger is 100% free.</strong> It includes a .blogspot.com domain and HTTPS, and you can set it up in under 10 minutes.</li>
    <li><strong>Start with a Google account.</strong> Set a blog name and address, then write your first post right away.</li>
    <li><strong>Get the basics complete:</strong> turn on HTTPS, add a site description, and create About, Policy, and Contact pages.</li>
    <li><strong>Customize a beautiful theme with no code</strong> using a drag-and-drop tool, then download and upload it.</li>
    <li><strong>Plan content and SEO from day one</strong> so the blog grows with direction.</li>
  </ul>
</div>

<figure>
  <img src="https://www.blogkub.com/blog/images/start-blogger-blog.png" alt="How to start a free Blogger blog from scratch to a beautiful theme, a beginner's guide" width="820" data-original-width="1600" data-original-height="900" loading="lazy" decoding="async">
  <figcaption>You can create a free Blogger blog in minutes, then customize a professional-looking theme with no coding.</figcaption>
</figure>

<h2>Why choose Blogger as a beginner</h2>
<p><strong>Blogger is Google's free blogging platform that lets you build a site, write posts, and publish at no cost.</strong> It suits beginners best, for several reasons. It is genuinely free for both the platform and hosting, it comes with a .blogspot.com domain and HTTPS built in, you never have to maintain a server or worry about security, and it connects easily to other Google services like AdSense and Search Console.</p>
<p>Compared with starting on WordPress, where you pay for hosting and a domain and handle the technical side yourself, Blogger cuts the barrier to starting down to almost zero. So you can focus from day one on what matters most, writing valuable content. The one thing Blogger used to fall short on was the beauty and flexibility of its themes, which is now solved by a drag-and-drop theme builder, making Blogger a well-rounded choice for beginners in 2026.</p>

<h2>Step 1: create your Blogger blog (under 10 minutes)</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Log in with a Google account.</strong> Go to blogger.com and sign in with an existing Google account (or create one for free).</li>
  <li><strong>Create a new blog.</strong> Click "Create blog" and set a blog name (the display name). Choose one that reflects your content and is easy to remember.</li>
  <li><strong>Set the blog address (URL).</strong> Pick the .blogspot.com name you want, such as yourname.blogspot.com. Keep it short and related to your topic.</li>
  <li><strong>Confirm and enter the dashboard.</strong> Once created, you land in the Blogger dashboard where you manage everything: writing posts, settings, and customizing the theme.</li>
</ol>
<p>With that, you have a blog that is genuinely online and reachable. But do not rush to write yet. Complete the basic settings first to lay a good foundation.</p>

<h2 id="hide-first">Step 1.5: keep the blog hidden until the content is genuinely ready</h2>
<p>Nobody forces this step and skipping it is not a mistake, but it is one of the better-spent ten minutes of starting a blog, because it changes what Google sees the very first time.</p>
<p>Think about what actually happens. The moment you create a blog it is live and reachable by anyone, Googlebot included. If at that point it still wears the default theme, has no articles and no About page, then an empty site is exactly what gets crawled and stored.</p>
<p><strong>This is not a permanent penalty.</strong> Google does not remember that your site was once empty and hold it against you forever, and an empty site gets recrawled anyway. The point is narrower: <strong>being crawled before you are ready has no upside at all</strong>, and it has a small downside, which is thin pages entering the index that you then have to clean up. Since hiding takes under two minutes, there is no reason not to.</p>

<h3>Turn off search engine visibility</h3>
<p>Go to <strong>Settings -> Privacy</strong> and turn off <strong>Let search engines find your blog</strong>.</p>
<p>Behind the scenes Blogger rewrites your <code>robots.txt</code> to <code>Disallow: /</code>, which tells every crawler to stay out for now. It does not remove the site from the internet: anyone with the URL can still open it. Only bots are held off.</p>

<h3>Limit readers to yourself</h3>
<p>Go to <strong>Settings -> Permissions -> Blog readers</strong> and choose <strong>Blog authors only</strong>.</p>
<p>This is stronger than the first switch, because it genuinely locks the door: anyone not signed in with your account cannot open the site at all. <strong>Note that this also stops you sending a preview link to a friend.</strong> If you want a second pair of eyes before launch, skip this one and rely on the search visibility switch alone.</p>

<h3>Make it look like a real site</h3>
<p>While it is hidden, get three things done.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Upload your theme</strong>, so the site looks finished rather than wearing the Blogger default.</li>
  <li><strong>Write two or three real articles</strong> with usable content, not test posts that say "testing testing".</li>
  <li><strong>Create the basic pages</strong>, About and Contact, which both readers and AdSense look for.</li>
</ul>
<p>Why two or three rather than one? A site with a single post still reads as something that might be abandoned next week. Three related posts start to say a person is genuinely working on this, and they give you internal links to follow.</p>

<h3>Then open it</h3>
<p>When you are ready, switch both settings back to public and findable, then submit your sitemap in Google Search Console to say there is something new.</p>
<p>What Googlebot meets on its first visit is a site with a finished theme, articles worth reading and the basic information pages in place. That is a visibly better starting point than an empty shell.</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Do not stay hidden too long.</strong> The idea is a few days or a few weeks while you prepare, not months spent waiting for perfect. A site that never opens never ranks, and good-enough content that is published beats perfect content still sitting in drafts.</p></div>

<h2>Step 2: basic settings beginners often forget</h2>
<p>These settings are done once but affect both SEO and your site's credibility over the long term.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Turn on HTTPS:</strong> under settings, turn on "HTTPS availability" and "HTTPS redirect" to keep the site secure.</li>
  <li><strong>Write a site description:</strong> enable the search description and add one that says what the site is about.</li>
  <li><strong>Create key pages:</strong> make About, Privacy, and Contact pages. They matter for both credibility and applying for AdSense later.</li>
  <li><strong>Connect Search Console:</strong> add the site to Google Search Console to track SEO from the start.</li>
</ul>
<div class="box tip"><strong>Tip:</strong> the About, Policy, and Contact pages are not just formalities. They are E-E-A-T signals that Google and AdSense value. Doing them from the start saves time later.</div>

<h2>Step 3: customize a professional-looking theme (with no coding)</h2>
<p>This is what sets your blog apart. Blogger's default theme looks plain and may not reflect who you are. Making a theme look good used to mean editing complicated XML, a wall for beginners. Today you can use a drag-and-drop theme builder instead.</p>
<p>With the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/builder.html">BlogKub theme builder</a>, you pick a template that fits your kind of site, adjust colors and fonts, arrange the menu, turn features on or off, and see a live preview. When you are happy, download the XML file and upload it into Blogger through Theme → Backup/Restore. All of it works with no knowledge of code.</p>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Pick a template.</strong> Choose 1 of 8 templates that matches your kind of site (personal blog, travel, tech, reviews, and so on). See how to choose in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/templates">templates guide</a>.</li>
  <li><strong>Customize.</strong> Change the text, colors, and fonts, and arrange your <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/header">menu</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/hero">main banner</a> by dragging.</li>
  <li><strong>Turn on the features you want,</strong> such as <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode</a>, a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a>, and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related posts</a>, to raise the reader experience.</li>
  <li><strong>Download and upload.</strong> Click Export XML and upload it into Blogger, and your site transforms into something professional.</li>
</ol>

<div class="cta-band">
  <h3>Ready to make your blog beautiful?</h3>
  <p>Pick a template, customize, and download your own Blogger theme for free, with no coding and a live preview.</p>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/builder.html">Open the Builder free →</a>
</div>

<h2>Step 4: write a quality first post</h2>
<p>Once the site looks good and is ready, it is time for content. Your first post matters because it sets the standard for both readers and Google.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Choose a specific topic:</strong> write about something you genuinely know and people search for. A specific topic answers questions better than a broad one.</li>
  <li><strong>Write completely and with value:</strong> answer everything the reader wants on one page, at a reasonable length and with substance.</li>
  <li><strong>Structure it to read easily:</strong> use subheadings, short paragraphs, and lists so it is easy to scan.</li>
  <li><strong>Add relevant images:</strong> with meaningful ALT text, which helps both reading and image SEO.</li>
  <li><strong>Internal links:</strong> as you get more articles, link between them to build a network that helps readers and Google.</li>
</ul>
<p>Do not worry if your first post is not perfect. Writing is a skill that develops. What matters is starting and writing consistently. To write for Google rankings, read the deeper techniques in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-seo">Blogger SEO guide</a>.</p>

<h2>Step 5: plan for the blog to grow</h2>
<p>A successful blog does not come from a single post, but from consistency and clear direction. After you have a blog and a first post, try planning these.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Define the site's main topic:</strong> a site focused on a clear topic builds credibility with Google better than one that writes about everything.</li>
  <li><strong>Set a publishing schedule:</strong> writing consistently, say one post a week, beats writing a burst then disappearing.</li>
  <li><strong>Build a network of internal links:</strong> connect every article so readers always have a next step, whichever way they arrive.</li>
  <li><strong>Track and improve:</strong> use Search Console to see what works, then do more of it.</li>
  <li><strong>Think about revenue when ready:</strong> once you have enough content and readers, start earning. See how in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-adsense">AdSense guide</a>.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Mistakes beginners often make (and how to avoid them)</h2>
<p>Knowing the common mistakes helps you skip the traps that make many people lose heart and quit halfway.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Topics that are too broad:</strong> beginners often write broad subjects that are hard to compete on against big sites. Focus on a specific niche you can answer well with less competition.</li>
  <li><strong>Impatience for fast results:</strong> SEO takes 3 to 6 months, and many quit before seeing results. Consistency is the key.</li>
  <li><strong>Neglecting the theme and reader experience:</strong> good content on a slow or untrustworthy-looking site still loses readers, so customizing a good theme from the start matters.</li>
  <li><strong>Skipping the policy and About pages:</strong> it makes the site look unserious and fails AdSense later.</li>
  <li><strong>Copying others' content:</strong> copied content does not rank and risks penalties. Always write your own with your own perspective.</li>
</ul>
<p>These mistakes are easy to prevent when you know them from the start. The heart of it is being serious and patient. Nearly every successful blog went through an early period with no readers. What made the difference was not giving up and improving continuously.</p>

<h2>.blogspot.com or your own domain?</h2>
<p>A common beginner question is whether to use the free .blogspot.com domain or invest in your own. The answer depends on your goals and budget. A .blogspot.com domain is free and usable right away, good for starting and testing whether you enjoy blogging before investing. Your own domain, such as yourname.com, costs a yearly fee but looks more professional, builds a brand better, and feels more credible.</p>
<p>The good news is you do not have to decide now. Start with the free .blogspot.com, write content, and see how the blog goes. When you are ready, buy your own domain and connect it to Blogger without moving the site or losing the content you have built up. This is an advantage of Blogger, which supports custom domains built in, letting you grow smoothly from free to professional when the time comes.</p>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>Creating a free Blogger blog is easy and takes under 10 minutes for the basics. Start by logging in with a Google account and setting a blog name and address, then complete the basic settings including HTTPS, a site description, and key pages like About, Policy, and Contact. The important step that makes a blog look professional is customizing the theme, which today needs no code thanks to drag-and-drop tools. From there, write a quality first post and plan for the blog to grow consistently. Everything starts with the first step. <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/builder.html">Open the BlogKub Builder</a> to build a beautiful theme for your new blog for free, and when you are ready, build on it with <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-seo">SEO</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-adsense">earning</a> so your blog grows with direction.</p>

<hr>
<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Is Blogger really free?</summary><p>Yes, genuinely. Blogger is a free Google service. You can create a blog, write posts, and publish at no cost. It comes with a free .blogspot.com subdomain and built-in HTTPS. If you want your own domain (such as a .com), there is only the cost of the domain, but the platform and hosting are entirely free.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does it take long to create a Blogger blog?</summary><p>Not long. Creating a basic blog takes under 10 minutes. Just log in with a Google account, set a blog name and address, and you can start writing right away. Making the theme look good and setting up SEO fully takes a little more time, but a tool like BlogKub lets you finish customizing a theme in minutes with no coding.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do I need to know how to code to run a Blogger blog?</summary><p>No. Basic Blogger use needs no code at all, for both writing posts and settings. Customizing the theme beyond the default used to mean editing complicated XML, but today you use a drag-and-drop tool like BlogKub to build a beautiful theme without touching code, then download it to upload into Blogger.</p></details>
<details><summary>What should my first post be about?</summary><p>Write about something you genuinely know and your audience searches for. Choosing a specific topic that answers a question or solves a problem is better than a broad one. Your first post should be quality and reasonably long, because it lays a foundation that shows both readers and Google that your site is valuable.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is a .blogspot.com different from having my own domain?</summary><p>A .blogspot.com domain is free and usable right away, good for starting out. Your own domain (such as yourname.com) costs a yearly fee but looks more professional and builds a brand better. You can start with .blogspot.com and connect your own domain later without moving the site.</p></details>

<hr>
<h2>Keep reading</h2>
<div class="related">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-seo"><b>Blogger SEO 2026</b><span>Rank your blog on Google's first page</span></a>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-adsense"><b>Earn with AdSense</b><span>Turn your blog into revenue</span></a>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/templates"><b>All 8 templates and how to choose</b><span>Match a template to your kind of site</span></a>
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/builder.html"><b>Open the Builder</b><span>Build and customize your theme for free</span></a>
</div><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/start-blogger-blog">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build an About/author block (E-E-A-T) in a Blogger theme</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/about</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/about</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to set up an About/author block in a Blogger theme with BlogKub: add a name, bio (E-E-A-T), profile image, eyebrow, and stats/verification badge (some templates), to build credibility, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/about.png" type="image/png" length="309366"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/about.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/about.png" alt="How to build an About/author block (E-E-A-T) in a Blogger theme" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build an About/author block (E-E-A-T) in a Blogger theme</h1>
<p class="lead">Readers and Google both want to know "who is behind this content?" An About/author block answers that, building a connection with readers and sending credibility signals (E-E-A-T). This article teaches you how to set it up in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, including the name, bio, profile image, and stats/verification badge in some templates.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> the <strong>About/author</strong> block in BlogKub lets you add an <strong>eyebrow, name/author, bio (E-E-A-T), profile image</strong>, and in some templates (review/company) <strong>stats</strong> and a <strong>verification badge</strong>. It tells readers who is behind the content, building credibility and reinforcing E-E-A-T, then you Export it to use.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/about.png" aria-label="View the About/author block (About + E-E-A-T) at full size">
    <img alt="An About/author block in a Blogger theme showing a profile image, name, E-E-A-T bio, and stats" title="The About/author block (About + E-E-A-T)" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/about.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1520" data-original-height="648" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">An author block with a profile image, name, bio (E-E-A-T), and stats, building the content's credibility.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What the About block is, and why it matters</h2>
<p><strong>The About/author block is a short introduction to the site or author, placed on the homepage or within an article.</strong> It includes a name, a short bio, and a profile image. Unlike a full "About us" page, the About block is a compact section inserted into other pages, introducing you without making readers click away.</p>
<p>The importance of the About block comes from the human nature of wanting to know who you are listening to. When readers see there is a real, experienced person behind the content, they feel more connected and trust it more. Content with no author information at all seems to have floated in from nowhere, while content with a clear author and a relevant bio looks much more credible.</p>

<h2>E-E-A-T: why author information matters for SEO</h2>
<p>Google uses a framework called <strong>E-E-A-T (Experience, Expertise, Authoritativeness, Trustworthiness)</strong> to assess content quality, especially topics that affect people's lives or finances. Clear author information stating relevant expertise is one of the signals that helps here.</p>
<p>The About block is therefore where you place information that reinforces the site's E-E-A-T. When you state that the author has experience or expertise relevant to the content, you signal that this content comes from someone who genuinely knows, not copied or shallow writing. That said, the information must be true and relevant. An exaggerated bio does not help and can cost credibility. A sincere, on-point bio is what both readers and Google value.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to set up the About block, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add or select the About block.</strong> Select the "About/author" block in the template, or add it into the spot you want, such as the homepage after the post grid.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Add the name and E-E-A-T bio.</strong> Add an eyebrow (such as "Author"), the name/author, and a bio stating experience and expertise relevant to the site's content.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Add a profile image (and stats/badge).</strong> Turn on the profile image and set its URL. In the review/company templates, you can add stats (format: number | description), and the review template supports a verification badge.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and check.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then check that the About block shows the name, bio, image, and any supporting elements correctly.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Template-specific extras: stats and verification badge</h2>
<p>The About block adapts its options by template to reinforce credibility to match the kind of site.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Stats (review/company templates):</strong> add numbers that build credibility, such as "500+ | reviews written" or "10 years | experience", shown as a prominent number with a description, letting readers see credibility concretely.</li>
  <li><strong>Verification badge (review template):</strong> add a badge that conveys credibility, such as "Reviews from real use" or "Expert in...", to emphasize the site's stance.</li>
</ul>
<p>These options let a review or company site's About block communicate credibility on point. Concrete stats and a verification badge reinforce that the content comes from a genuinely experienced source, which matters greatly for content readers use to decide, such as product reviews or company recommendations.</p>

<h2>Write a bio that builds credibility</h2>
<p>The heart of the About block is a good bio. The principle is to say three things: who you are, what experience or expertise you have relevant to the site's content, and why readers should trust you on this topic. Avoid a bio that is too broad or generic to say anything, such as "loves blogging and sharing knowledge", and focus on the specific and relevant, such as "have written camera reviews for over 5 years and tested more than 100 models".</p>
<p>Specificity and relevance are what genuinely build credibility. A reader deciding to buy a camera trusts a review from someone who tested a hundred models more than a general person, just as Google looks for signals of real experience. A good bio is therefore a worthwhile investment, because it works with both readers and search engines, and used with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/about">full About us page</a> and links in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/footer">footer</a>, it reinforces the whole site's credibility further.</p>

<h2>The About block vs a full About us page</h2>
<p>Many people wonder how the About block differs from an About us page. The answer is that the two complement each other. The About block is a short compact section inserted into the homepage or an article, to introduce yourself at once without making readers click away, while the full About us page is a dedicated page telling the story, origins, and details of the site thoroughly.</p>
<p>Having both is the good approach. The About block builds a quick connection at the point where readers are reading content, while the full About us page serves readers who want to know more and is a strong E-E-A-T signal for Google. When the About block links to the full page, interested readers can click to read on. The two therefore work as a system to build the site's credibility.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The profile image does not show</h3>
<p>Check that you turned on the profile image option and set a correct image URL. If you do not want an image, turn off the option for a text-only block.</p>
<h3>Stats or the badge do not appear</h3>
<p>The stats and verification badge options are only in some templates (review/company). If you use another template, these options are absent. Also check the stat format is correct (number | description, one per line).</p>
<h3>The bio looks too generic</h3>
<p>Make it specific and relevant to the site's content, emphasizing concrete experience or expertise, to build genuine credibility.</p>
<h3>How much real information to include</h3>
<p>Include real information that builds credibility, but you do not need to reveal unrelated personal details. Focus on what relates to your expertise in the topics you write about.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Write a specific, relevant bio, emphasizing experience/expertise in the topics the site covers.</li>
  <li>Add a real profile image to build a connection with readers.</li>
  <li>Use stats and a verification badge (in templates that support them) to reinforce credibility concretely.</li>
  <li>Always give real information. Avoid exaggeration that can cost credibility.</li>
  <li>Use it with a full About us page and links in the footer, for strong E-E-A-T.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The About/author block is a key element for building the site's credibility, because it answers the question both readers and Google want to know: who is behind the content. With BlogKub, you set up the About block fully with no coding, including the eyebrow, name, E-E-A-T bio, profile image, and in some templates stats and a verification badge. When you write a specific, sincere bio relevant to the content, the About block builds a connection with readers and sends credibility signals good for SEO. Used with a full About us page, your site has a strong E-E-A-T foundation, which matters more and more for making a site successful.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>What is the About block?</summary><p>It is a short introduction to the site or author, with an eyebrow, name, bio, and profile image, telling readers who is behind the content, building connection and credibility. Unlike a full About page, it is a short block placed on the homepage or within an article.</p></details>
<details><summary>How does E-E-A-T relate?</summary><p>E-E-A-T (Experience, Expertise, Authoritativeness, Trust) is a framework Google uses to assess content quality. Having author information that states experience and expertise sends these signals, so the About block is where you place a bio that reinforces the site's E-E-A-T.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I add stats or a verification badge?</summary><p>Yes, in some templates. The review and company templates support stats (such as number of articles or followers), and the review template supports a verification badge, to reinforce credibility to match the kind of site.</p></details>
<details><summary>How should I write the bio?</summary><p>Write it to say who you are, what experience or expertise you have relevant to the site's content, and why readers should trust you. Be concise but substantial. Avoid overly broad information, focusing on what builds credibility in the topics you write about.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where should the About block go?</summary><p>Commonly on the homepage (such as after the post grid) to introduce yourself to new readers, or within an article to say who wrote it. Both build connection and reinforce the content's credibility.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/about">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build an AdSense ad slot in a Blogger theme</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/ad</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/ad</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to place an ad slot in a Blogger theme with BlogKub: choose below-header, in-article, or sidebar, show an &apos;Ad&apos; label per AdSense policy, and place ad code tidily, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/ad.png" type="image/png" length="309122"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/ad.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/ad.png" alt="How to build an AdSense ad slot in a Blogger theme" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build an AdSense ad slot in a Blogger theme</h1>
<p class="lead">Many people blog to earn from ads, but placing ads carelessly hurts both the reader experience and can breach policy. An ad slot helps you place ads in the right, tidy spots. This article teaches you how to do it in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, with placement choices and an "Ad" label per AdSense guidance.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Intermediate</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> the <strong>Ad</strong> block in BlogKub lets you choose <strong>3 placements</strong> (below header / in article / sidebar) and show an <strong>"Ad" label</strong> per AdSense guidance, preparing suitable placements and structure. Then you <strong>paste your Google AdSense ad unit code</strong> (after approval) into the slot and Export it to use.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/ad.png" aria-label="View the AdSense ad slot with an 'Ad' label at full size">
    <img alt="An ad slot in a Blogger article, inserted mid-content, with an 'Ad' label per AdSense policy" title="The AdSense ad slot with an 'Ad' label" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/ad.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1520" data-original-height="630" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">An ad slot inserted mid-content with an "Ad" label per AdSense guidance, placed where it is visible without disrupting reading.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What an ad slot is, and why placement matters</h2>
<p><strong>An ad slot is space prepared for placing an ad in the theme, with a suitable placement and label.</strong> For bloggers who want to earn from Google AdSense, having well-placed ad slots is important, because ad placement affects both revenue and the reader experience.</p>
<p>The challenge is balancing making ads visible (for revenue) with not disrupting reading (for experience). A well-placed ad gets seen and clicked without frustrating readers, while carelessly or excessively placed ads drive readers away and can breach policy. BlogKub's ad slot helps you place ads in standard positions already considered appropriate.</p>

<h2>The 3 ad placements</h2>
<p>The ad slot offers 3 placements, each suiting different ad formats and purposes.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Below the header (top):</strong> a horizontal ad below the menu, a spot seen immediately on arrival, good for banner ads, but be careful not to push the main content too far down.</li>
  <li><strong>In the article (middle):</strong> an ad inserted into the article content, a spot where the reader is engaged and often responds well, but place it so it does not interrupt reading too much.</li>
  <li><strong>Sidebar (side):</strong> an ad in the side column, good for sites that already have a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sidebar">sidebar</a>, a spot visible without disrupting the main content, though visibility may be lower than in-content.</li>
</ul>
<p>Choosing a placement depends on your layout and the balance you want. Many sites use several placements together, but be careful not to overdo it. Having ads in well-considered positions works better than stuffing ads everywhere.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to place an ad slot, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the ad slot block.</strong> Drag the "Ad" block from the library into the spot you want in the theme structure.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Choose the placement and ad label.</strong> Choose a placement (below header / in article / sidebar) and turn on the "Ad" label per AdSense guidance for transparency.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Paste your AdSense ad code.</strong> After your AdSense account is approved, paste the ad unit code created in the AdSense dashboard into the prepared slot.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and check.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then check that the ad slot is in a suitable spot, does not disrupt content, and has an "Ad" label.</li>
</ol>
<div class="note">You need an approved Google AdSense account before real ads show. The ad slot block prepares suitable placements and structure, waiting only for you to paste in the ad unit code.</div>

<h2>Why show an "Ad" label</h2>
<p>Showing an "Ad" label on the ad area is <strong>good practice per Google AdSense policy</strong>. The reason is transparency. Readers should be able to tell what is the site's content and what is an ad. Not distinguishing clearly can confuse readers or lead to accidental clicks, which breaches policy and creates a bad experience.</p>
<p>A clear label is therefore a practice that is both within policy and respectful of readers. It honestly says this part is an ad, letting readers decide for themselves whether they are interested. This transparency builds long-term trust, which matters for retaining readers and staying in the AdSense system sustainably. BlogKub provides this label option per good practice.</p>

<h2>Balancing revenue with the reader experience</h2>
<p>A common trap for new bloggers is placing too many ads to earn quickly, but the result is usually the opposite. Numerous, disruptive ads drive readers away, and with fewer readers, revenue drops too. Moreover, AdSense has a clear policy that ads should not be more numerous or prominent than content, and violations can suspend an account.</p>
<p>The sustainable principle is "content must always be the star". Ads are an addition placed in moderation in suitable spots, not something that buries the content. A site with quality content and balanced ad placement retains its readers and earns over the long term, more than a site that stuffs ads until readers do not want to return. Using ad slots in standard positions and reasonable numbers is therefore an investment in sustainability.</p>

<h2>Impact on speed and Core Web Vitals</h2>
<p>Something to understand is that ads affect site speed, because they load from an external server, adding network calls and scripts. Importantly, ads can affect <strong>CLS (Cumulative Layout Shift)</strong>, one of the Core Web Vitals, if the ad area loads and pushes the content, causing a reader who is reading or tapping to miss because the page shifts.</p>
<p>To reduce the impact, place ads in reasonable numbers and in positions with clearly reserved space. Having a well-structured ad slot lets the browser know the space in advance, reducing content shift. Not placing too many ads also reduces the number of scripts to load, preserving overall speed. When you consider revenue, experience, and speed together, you get a site that earns without losing quality, which is the goal of sustainable blogging.</p>

<h2>Revenue options beyond AdSense</h2>
<p>Although AdSense is a popular way to earn, it is not the only one. Many bloggers find that relying on AdSense alone earns little, especially early on. Other options that often work better for some sites include affiliate marketing (recommending products for a commission), selling your own products or services, or sponsorships, some of which disrupt readers less than banner ads and return more per reader.</p>
<p>The upside of considering several options is that you do not have to stuff the site with ads. A review site doing affiliate can use a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/proscons">Pros/Cons box</a> and a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cta">CTA button</a> to lead readers toward a purchase more smoothly than ads, while a site with expertise might sell a course or service. Mixing several revenue channels in balance is usually more sustainable than relying on ads alone, and preserves the reader experience better. That said, AdSense is still a good, easy starting point, so BlogKub's ad slot is ready for you to start with when you are ready.</p>

<h2>Prepare your site for AdSense approval</h2>
<p>Before ads can show, your site must be approved by Google AdSense, which considers several factors. Things that improve your odds include having a reasonable amount of quality original content, having key pages like an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/about">About page</a>, Privacy Policy, and contact channel, plus clear navigation and a genuinely usable site.</p>
<p>The good news is that BlogKub templates help a lot here, because they come with an organized structure, clear navigation, and support for placing policy and contact pages. When you have quality content and a complete site structure, your odds of approval go up. Preparing the site before applying is more worthwhile than rushing to apply and being rejected. Once approved, the ad slots you prepared are ready to show ads right away.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The ad slot is empty</h3>
<p>The slot stays empty until you paste in an approved AdSense ad unit code. Check that your AdSense application passed and that you pasted the code correctly.</p>
<h3>Ads push the content around (CLS)</h3>
<p>Choose a placement with clearly reserved space and do not place too many ads, to reduce content shift when the ad loads.</p>
<h3>Worried about breaching AdSense policy</h3>
<p>Turn on the "Ad" label, place a reasonable number, and keep content more prominent than ads always. Study the AdSense policy for confidence.</p>
<h3>Ads slow the site down</h3>
<p>Reduce the number of ads and place them well, because each ad unit adds external script loading.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Always turn on the "Ad" label for transparency and per AdSense guidance.</li>
  <li>Place a reasonable number of ads, keeping content the star always.</li>
  <li>Choose placements that balance visibility with not disrupting reading.</li>
  <li>Reserve clear ad space to reduce CLS and preserve speed.</li>
  <li>Study the AdSense policy and follow it for the sustainability of your account and site.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The ad slot is a tool for bloggers who want to earn from AdSense tidily and within policy. With BlogKub, you can choose 3 placements (below header / in article / sidebar) with an "Ad" label per AdSense guidance, and the system prepares suitable placements and structure, waiting only for you to paste in an approved ad unit code. The key to sustainable ads is balance: keep content the star, place ads in moderation in the right spots, show a transparent label, and consider speed and Core Web Vitals. Done right, you earn from your site without losing the reader experience, the foundation of a sustainably earning blog. To learn the steps from applying, to approval, to placing ads within the rules in detail, read the guide to <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-adsense">earning from Blogger with Google AdSense</a>.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Where can I place the ad slot?</summary><p>You can choose 3 main placements: below the header (top), in the article (middle), and the sidebar (side). Each suits different ad formats, so you place ads where they are visible without disrupting reading too much.</p></details>
<details><summary>Why show an 'Ad' label?</summary><p>Showing an 'Ad' label is good practice per Google AdSense policy, so readers can clearly tell content from ads. It builds transparency and reduces confusion, which is good for both the reader experience and policy compliance.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do I need an AdSense account first?</summary><p>Yes. Real ads come from Google AdSense, which you must apply for and get approved first. BlogKub's ad slot block prepares suitable placements and structure, and once approved you paste your ad unit code into the slot.</p></details>
<details><summary>Is placing lots of ads good?</summary><p>No. Too many ads disrupt reading, worsen the experience, and can breach AdSense policy, which forbids ads being more numerous or prominent than content. Place a reasonable number and always keep content the star.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do ads affect site speed?</summary><p>Yes. Ads load from an external source, adding network calls and possibly affecting speed and Core Web Vitals, especially CLS if the ad area shifts the content. Placing them in the right spots and not overdoing it reduces this.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/ad">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a dismissible announcement bar in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/announce</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/announce</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a top announcement bar to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: add text, a CTA link, choose a background color, and readers can dismiss it and it remembers being dismissed, ideal for promos or news, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/announce.png" type="image/png" length="344789"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/announce.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/announce.png" alt="How to build a dismissible announcement bar in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a dismissible announcement bar in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">Sometimes you have something important you want every reader to see first, a promo, a new article, or a notice. A top announcement bar is the best place, because it is the first thing the eye reaches. This article teaches you how to add one to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, with a CTA link, color choices, and a reader-dismissible bar that remembers.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>announcement bar</strong> block in BlogKub, add text, a CTA link, and choose a background color, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. You get a <strong>full-width bar at the very top</strong> above the header. Readers can <strong>dismiss it and the system remembers</strong> (based on the text). When you change to a new announcement, the bar shows to everyone again.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/announce.png" aria-label="View the announcement bar at full size">
    <img alt="An announcement bar at the very top of a Blogger site showing promo text with a CTA link and a close button" title="The announcement bar" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/announce.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1600" data-original-height="358" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A full-width announcement bar at the very top, above the header, with a CTA link and a close button the system remembers.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What an announcement bar is, and why it works</h2>
<p><strong>An announcement bar is a full-width horizontal bar at the very top of the site, above the header and menu.</strong> It shows a short message you want every reader to see before anything else. With its prominent position and a background color that contrasts with the content, this bar catches the eye the moment the page finishes loading.</p>
<p>The reason it works is that it relies on "visual order". Readers usually sweep from top to bottom, so what is at the top is always seen first. When you have time-limited or especially important information, such as a promo about to end, placing it in the announcement bar guarantees it will not be missed, unlike burying it mid-page where readers may scroll past.</p>

<h2>The highlight: dismissible and smart remembering</h2>
<p>What separates a good announcement bar from an annoying popup is respecting the reader. BlogKub's announcement bar has a <strong>close button on the right</strong>. When a reader dismisses it, the system remembers in the browser that they closed this announcement, so the bar does not return to bother them on later visits. This is a key difference: an announcement that cannot be closed or keeps popping back is annoying and drives readers away.</p>
<p>Smarter still, the system remembers the dismissal <strong>based on the announcement text</strong>. That means when you change the text to a new announcement, the system treats it as a different one and shows it to everyone again, even those who dismissed the old one. This mechanism lets you use one bar to announce various things over time, with readers seeing only announcements they have not dismissed, with no worry that people who dismissed one will miss the new news.</p>
<div class="note">Tip: because the remembering is based on the text, if you want an existing announcement to "show again" to people who dismissed it, just tweak the text slightly and it counts as a new announcement.</div>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the announcement bar in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the announcement bar block.</strong> Open the left block library and drag the "announcement bar" block in, usually placed at the very top of the structure so it shows above the header.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Add text, a link, and a background color.</strong> Type the announcement text. For a CTA, add link text and a URL, and choose a background color to match your brand or stand out as you wish.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test dismissing and remembering.</strong> Open the live site, check the bar shows at the top, click the close button, then refresh to confirm the bar does not return. Then try changing the text and re-exporting, to see the new announcement show again.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Add a CTA link: turn the announcement into a next step</h2>
<p>The announcement bar is even more powerful with a link to click. Instead of just telling news, you can add link text like "See the promo", "Read the article", or "Sign up now" with a destination URL, turning the bar into a channel to take readers to the page you want, whether a promo page, an important article, or a follow channel.</p>
<p>A clear CTA in the announcement bar raises the chance of the action you want. Think of the announcement bar as the most valuable ad space on the site, because everyone sees it first. Using it to guide readers toward a clear goal is more worthwhile than leaving it a floating message. That said, keep the text concise and the CTA on-point, because the bar space is limited.</p>

<h2>Choose a color and write effective text</h2>
<p>The bar's background color affects both its prominence and the mood of the announcement. A bright color like a brand or accent color makes the bar catch the eye, good for a promo or exciting news, while a calm dark color suits a formal notice. Choose a color where white text reads clearly and does not blend with the header until they are indistinguishable.</p>
<p>For the text, the principle is "short, clear, and giving a reason to care", because the bar has limited space and readers spend only a fraction of a second on it. Write the point in one sentence, emphasizing a benefit or urgency, such as "30% off until the end of the month only", which is better than "We have a special promotion for customers", which is longer and less motivating. A small emoji can add eye-catch, but use it in moderation.</p>

<h2>Examples of using the announcement bar</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Promo announcement:</strong> "40% off the online course until the end of the month, click to see", with a link to the course page.</li>
  <li><strong>Highlight a new article:</strong> "New article: 10 tips to rank your blog on Google's first page", linking to the article.</li>
  <li><strong>Follow invite:</strong> "Follow our new channel so you do not miss updates", linking to a page or channel.</li>
  <li><strong>Important notice:</strong> announce a change, event, or news readers should know first.</li>
</ul>
<p>Notice every case is "temporary and important", which suits the most prominent top space. When an announcement expires, you just change the text or turn off the block, and the site returns to normal.</p>

<h2>A caution: use it only when needed</h2>
<p>The power of the announcement bar comes from its prominence, but if there is always a bar with nothing genuinely important, readers begin to ignore it, like we scroll past ads automatically. This is called "banner blindness". To preserve the bar's power, use it only when there is something worth announcing.</p>
<p>Also be careful not to let the bar crowd out the main content too much, especially on mobile with a small screen. Concise text and an easy-to-use close button let the bar do its job without disrupting the reading experience. Used in moderation with a clear goal, the announcement bar is an effective communication tool, not a nuisance.</p>

<h2>The announcement bar vs a popup: why the bar is friendlier</h2>
<p>Many sites use a mid-screen popup to announce something important, which works for grabbing attention but creates high annoyance because it covers the content and forces readers to close it before reading on. Google itself has guidance discouraging popups that cover content on mobile, which can affect the experience and rankings. A top announcement bar is a much gentler alternative, because it sits above the content without covering it. Readers see it but can keep reading immediately without clicking anything.</p>
<p>This is a reader-first design philosophy. Communicating something important does not have to be aggressive or interrupting. The announcement bar proves you can present prominent information while still respecting the reading experience. When readers feel your site does not bother them too much, that good feeling carries over to the overall image and willingness to return.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The announcement bar does not show</h3>
<p>Check that you added the announcement bar block and Exported again. If you previously dismissed an announcement with the same text on this browser, the system remembers the dismissal. Try in incognito mode or change the text to test.</p>
<h3>You dismissed it but it returns every time</h3>
<p>Normally the system remembers the dismissal in the browser. If the browser blocks storage (such as some private modes), the remembering may not work. Test in normal mode to confirm.</p>
<h3>You changed the text but people who dismissed do not see the new one</h3>
<p>In principle, when the text changes, the system treats it as a new announcement and shows it again. If it does not, check that you Exported and uploaded the theme with the new text.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Use the announcement bar only for important, time-limited matters, to preserve its power to draw the eye.</li>
  <li>Write short, concise text emphasizing a benefit or urgency.</li>
  <li>Add a clear CTA link to take readers to the goal.</li>
  <li>Choose a prominent color where the text reads easily and is clearly separate from the header.</li>
  <li>Change or remove the announcement when it is no longer important, so readers do not tune out the bar.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The top announcement bar is the most prominent communication space on the site, ideal for important, temporary matters you want every reader to see first. With BlogKub, you just add the announcement bar block, add text, a CTA link, and a background color, and Export it. Readers see the bar at the top and can dismiss it, with the system remembering based on the text. When you change to a new announcement, the bar shows to everyone again. This reader-respecting mechanism makes the announcement bar an effective communication tool. Used in moderation with a clear goal, it helps your important news reach readers without becoming a nuisance.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Where does the announcement bar show?</summary><p>As a full-width bar at the very top of the site, above the header, so it is the first thing readers see, ideal for announcing something important like a promotion, news, or a follow invite.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can readers dismiss the announcement bar?</summary><p>Yes. The bar has a close button on the right. When a reader dismisses it, the system remembers in the browser, so the bar does not return to bother them on the next visit, until you change the announcement text.</p></details>
<details><summary>If I change the text, does the bar reappear for people who dismissed it?</summary><p>It reappears, because the system remembers the dismissal based on the announcement text. When you change the text to a new announcement, the system treats it as a different announcement and shows it to everyone again, even those who dismissed the old one.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I put a button or link in the announcement bar?</summary><p>Yes. You can add link text and a URL to make a CTA in the bar, such as 'See the promo' or 'Read more', so the bar not only tells news but takes readers to the page you want.</p></details>
<details><summary>What is the announcement bar good for?</summary><p>Temporary announcements you want seen first, such as a promo, an event, an important new article, a change notice, or a follow invite, because it is at the very top and prominent. But use it only when needed, so readers do not feel bothered.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/announce">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build Callout boxes (Note / Tip / Warning) in Blogger articles</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/callout</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/callout</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add Callout boxes (note, tip, success, warning, danger, download) to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, 6 types with icons and colors, placed in the post with the .bk-note etc. classes, plus how to use them and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/callout.png" type="image/png" length="335413"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/callout.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/callout.png" alt="How to build Callout boxes (Note / Tip / Warning) in Blogger articles" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build Callout boxes (Note / Tip / Warning) in Blogger articles</h1>
<p class="lead">Easy-to-read articles usually have eye-rest spots that make important information stand out. A Callout box is that tool: a colored box with an icon that tells readers at once "this is a tip" or "this is a warning". This article teaches you how to add all 6 Callout boxes to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, including how to place them in the post and fixes.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Callout box</strong> block in BlogKub, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. In the post (HTML view) wrap text in a <code>&lt;div class="bk-tip"&gt;…&lt;/div&gt;</code>, choosing from 6 classes (<strong>note, tip, success, warning, danger, download</strong>). The system handles the color, SVG icon, and left border automatically, with no image loading and dark mode support.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/callout.png" aria-label="View all 6 Callout boxes at full size">
    <img alt="All 6 Callout boxes in a Blogger article: note, tip, success, warning, danger, download, with colors and icons" title="All 6 Callout boxes" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/callout.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1440" data-original-height="846" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">All 6 Callout boxes, each with its own color and icon, placed in the post with the .bk-note, .bk-tip, etc. classes.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a Callout box is, and why it helps reading</h2>
<p><strong>A Callout box is a highlight box separated from the normal content by a background color, a left border, and an icon, to draw attention to important information</strong> such as a tip, warning, or note. A reader sweeping through an article hits these boxes at once, so they do not miss the point you want to emphasize.</p>
<p>In good writing, not every sentence carries the same weight. Some information is just general explanation, while some is a key point that, if missed, could lead to a mistake. Callout boxes create a "visual hierarchy" that tells readers what deserves special attention, making long content much easier to digest.</p>

<h2>All 6 Callout box types and when to use them</h2>
<p>BlogKub offers 6 Callout boxes, each with a color and icon that convey meaning by universal convention.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Note (blue):</strong> for supporting information worth knowing but not urgent, such as extra context or an aside.</li>
  <li><strong>Tip (teal):</strong> for a technique that makes something faster and easier, a box readers usually love because it adds value.</li>
  <li><strong>Success (green):</strong> for confirming something is done right or a step is complete, giving readers confidence.</li>
  <li><strong>Warning (orange):</strong> for something to be careful of or check before continuing, preventing mistakes.</li>
  <li><strong>Danger (red):</strong> for important matters that are hard to reverse if missed, such as an action that permanently deletes data.</li>
  <li><strong>Download (purple):</strong> for pointing to a file or resource to download, making the download link stand out.</li>
</ul>
<p>Using color to match meaning matters. Readers learn from experience that red is danger and green is success. When you use the boxes consistently with these meanings, readers understand at once without even reading the label.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add and use Callout boxes, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the Callout block.</strong> Open the left block library, category "Article &amp; UX", and drag the "Callout box" block in to embed the styles of all 6 boxes in the theme.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Place a box in the post.</strong> When writing the post, switch to HTML view and wrap your text in a <code>&lt;div class="bk-tip"&gt;tip text&lt;/div&gt;</code>, changing the class to bk-note, bk-warning, bk-danger, etc. as needed.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Check the display.</strong> Open the live article to confirm the box shows the background color, icon, and left border correctly by type, and reads well on both desktop and mobile.</li>
</ol>
<div class="note">Tip: you can put multiple lines, links, or lists inside a box, because it supports normal HTML content. The system already tidies the margins of the first and last child element.</div>

<h2>Why the icons are SVG embedded in the theme, not loaded images</h2>
<p>The technical detail that makes BlogKub's Callout boxes fast and stable is that <strong>the icons are embedded as SVG directly in the theme's style</strong>, not images loaded externally. The upside is that icons display at once with the content, with no flicker or wait, no extra network request, and no risk of the icon disappearing if an image link breaks.</p>
<p>This is in line with the Blogger principle that <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/faq">everything should live in the theme itself</a> as much as possible. Using SVG embedded in the style also keeps icons sharp at every screen resolution and lets them change color by box type without needing several image versions, an approach both light and flexible.</p>

<h2>Callout boxes with dark mode and design consistency</h2>
<p>Because the text in the box uses the theme's color variables, Callout boxes adapt to <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode</a> naturally. The text changes to a light color in dark mode and a dark color in light mode, while each type's background and border use a transparent color, blending with the background in both modes while keeping the color identity.</p>
<p>This consistency matters for the site's image. When every box type has the same style across the site (margins, rounded corners, icon position), readers perceive that your site is designed systematically, unlike each article having differently shaped boxes made by hand one at a time. Having a central style embedded in the theme guarantees this consistency automatically.</p>

<h2>Examples of using Callout boxes in different kinds of blog</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Tutorial/how-to blogs:</strong> use a tip box for shortcuts, a warning box for where people often slip, and a danger box for hard-to-reverse steps.</li>
  <li><strong>Tech blogs:</strong> a note box for extra context, a download box pointing to a code file or resource, pairing well with the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/copycode">copy code button</a>.</li>
  <li><strong>Recipe blogs:</strong> a tip box for tricks to make it tastier, a warning box for timing or temperature to watch.</li>
  <li><strong>Review and buying guide blogs:</strong> a note box summarizing key points, a success box confirming which option is worth it.</li>
</ul>
<p>The common thread is that Callout boxes help separate "information to emphasize" from general content, making your article look organized and friendly to readers who like to scan for the key points.</p>

<h2>A caution: do not overuse the boxes</h2>
<p>Callout boxes are powerful because they stand out, but if you use too many in one article, everything stands out until nothing does, turning the article into a dazzle of colored boxes harder to read than before. The principle is to use boxes only for genuinely important information, a few points per article, to preserve their power to draw the eye.</p>
<p>Think of a Callout box like a highlighter in a book. If you highlight every line, highlighting is meaningless, but if you highlight only the key sentences, they stand out and are useful. Callout boxes are the same. Use them in moderation so they can do their job fully.</p>

<h2>Callout boxes and accessibility</h2>
<p>One benefit of using Callout boxes based on real text is that they are accessibility-friendly. The content in the box remains normal HTML text that a screen reader reads in full, unlike making a highlight box by embedding text in an image, which a reader who cannot see cannot access at all. Because the color and icon are only a CSS enhancement, not carrying all the meaning, the content stays accessible even when the style does not load.</p>
<p>That said, be careful not to rely on "color" alone to convey meaning, because some readers are color-blind. The good way is to have the box text convey the context itself, such as starting with "Caution:" or "Tip:", so the meaning is clear even to readers who cannot tell the colors apart. This is an inclusive design principle that covers all readers and aligns with good web accessibility standards.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The box has no color or icon, showing as plain text</h3>
<p>This usually happens because the Callout block was not added in the theme or was not re-exported. Check that you added the block and uploaded the latest theme, then confirm you used the correct class name, such as <code>bk-tip</code> not just <code>tip</code>.</p>
<h3>You added the class but the box is off</h3>
<p>Check that you wrote it in the post's "HTML view", not the compose view, because the compose view may convert tags or insert extra tags, breaking the box structure.</p>
<h3>You want a color other than the 6 types</h3>
<p>The set of 6 covers the main frequently-used meanings and is designed to be consistent. We recommend choosing from this set for consistency, rather than creating a new color that could make the design unsystematic.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Use color to match meaning, such as red for danger and green for success, so readers understand at once.</li>
  <li>Use boxes only for a few important points per article, to preserve their power to draw the eye.</li>
  <li>Always write the class in HTML view, and check the class name is correct (bk-note, bk-tip, ...).</li>
  <li>Test the display in both light and dark mode, and on mobile.</li>
  <li>Pair with other content features, such as the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/faq">FAQ box</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a>, to make long articles easy to read in every dimension.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>Callout boxes are a small tool that clearly raises an article's readability. With BlogKub, you just add the Callout box block and Export it, then wrap text in a div with the matching class (note, tip, success, warning, danger, download). The system handles the color, SVG icon, and border automatically, with no image loading, dark mode support, and consistent design across the site. Used in moderation to highlight important information, Callout boxes help readers scan for the key points quickly, understand easily, and have a better reading experience.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>How many types of Callout box are there?</summary><p>There are 6 types: note, tip, success, warning, danger, and download. Each has its own color and icon to convey meaning at once.</p></details>
<details><summary>Is it hard to add the code?</summary><p>Not hard. Just wrap the text in a div with the matching class, such as &lt;div class='bk-tip'&gt;text&lt;/div&gt;, in the post's HTML view. The system handles the color, icon, and border automatically, because the style is embedded in the theme.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where do the box icons come from, do I need to load images?</summary><p>No image loading. The icons are SVG embedded directly in the theme's style, so they display at once with no external file and no impact on page speed.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do Callout boxes support dark mode?</summary><p>Yes. The text in the box uses the theme's color variables, so it adapts to light/dark mode, while each type's background and border use a transparent color, staying readable in both modes.</p></details>
<details><summary>How do Callout boxes help reading and SEO?</summary><p>They help readers scan for the key points quickly, highlighting a tip or warning clearly, making content easier to read, which raises time on page and satisfaction, an indirect quality signal good for SEO.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/callout">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a feature Columns section in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/columns</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/columns</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to build a feature Columns section in a Blogger theme with BlogKub: show highlights in 2 or 3 columns, each with an icon, a heading, and a description, add or remove columns, ideal for selling points or services, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/columns.png" type="image/png" length="349498"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/columns.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/columns.png" alt="How to build a feature Columns section in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a feature Columns section (2 to 3 columns, icon plus text) in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">When you want to tell readers "why choose us" or "what makes this site special", writing a long paragraph does not work as well as summarizing it into clear points. A feature Columns section shows highlights as 2 or 3 columns with icons. This article teaches you how to build one in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, adding and removing columns and filling in the icon, heading, and description yourself.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> the <strong>Columns (Features)</strong> block in BlogKub shows highlights as <strong>2 or 3 columns</strong>, each with an <strong>icon (emoji), heading, and description</strong>. You can add or remove columns and edit by typing with no coding. It is ideal for showing selling points or services readers can scan quickly, it is responsive, and then you Export it to use.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/columns.png" aria-label="View the 3-column feature Columns section at full size">
    <img alt="A 3-column feature section in a Blogger theme, each column with an icon, a heading, and a description" title="A 3-column feature Columns section" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/columns.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1640" data-original-height="578" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A feature Columns section showing highlights in 3 columns, each with an icon, a heading, and a description, quick to scan.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a feature Columns section is, and why it works</h2>
<p><strong>A feature Columns section is a part that shows highlights or services as 2 or 3 columns side by side, each with an icon, a heading, and a short description.</strong> It is a presentation format common on company and service sites, because it summarizes key information so readers see and understand it in an instant.</p>
<p>The reason it works is that it matches how people read the web. Most readers do not read every word, they "scan" for the key information. Laying out highlights as columns with clear icons and headings makes scanning easy: the icon draws the eye, the heading states the point, and the description gives the detail. Readers grasp your selling points quickly without reading a long paragraph, which suits any space where you need to convey value concisely.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to build the feature Columns section step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the Columns block.</strong> Drag the "Columns (Features)" block from the library into the position you want, such as on the homepage below the Hero or on a services page.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Set the heading and column count.</strong> Enter a section heading (for example "Why choose us") and choose 2 or 3 columns based on how many highlights you have.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Fill in the icon, heading, and description for each column.</strong> Add or remove columns as needed, and fill in the icon (emoji), heading, and a short description for each column.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and check the result.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then check that the columns display correctly, side by side on desktop and stacked on mobile.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Use emoji icons: lightweight and meaningful</h2>
<p>The feature Columns section lets you set an emoji or symbol as the icon in each column, such as ⚡ for speed, 🎯 for precision, or ✨ for quality. The benefit of using emoji is that they are <strong>lightweight and need no icon image to load</strong>, they display instantly on every device, and they carry meaning on their own without reading the text.</p>
<p>The icon acts as an "anchor for the eye" that helps each column stand apart clearly and be easy to remember. When you pick an icon whose meaning matches the heading, readers grasp each highlight faster. The tip is to choose emoji that are relevant and consistent in style, not random ones that look unsystematic. Consistent icons make the columns section look designed and professional.</p>

<h2>Write concise headings and descriptions</h2>
<p>The power of a feature Columns section lies in being concise. Each column's heading should be short and clearly state the highlight, such as "Easy to use", "Secure", or "Fast". The description should expand it in one or two sentences that say what the highlight means and how it benefits the reader.</p>
<p>Avoid writing overly long descriptions in a column, because that defeats the purpose of quick scanning. If a highlight needs a long explanation, consider splitting it into a separate article or section. The feature Columns section is designed to "summarize the big picture", not to explain in detail. Keeping it concise is the key to letting this section do its job well. When readers want to know more, you can lead them to the full content through a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cta">CTA button</a> placed after the columns.</p>

<h2>Choose 2 or 3 columns</h2>
<p>Choosing the number of columns depends on how many highlights you have and the balance of the page. <strong>2 columns</strong> make each column wide with plenty of space, ideal when you have a few main highlights to emphasize or descriptions that run a bit long. <strong>3 columns</strong> is the classic, balanced, and most common layout, ideal when you have three highlights of equal weight.</p>
<p>The number three has a psychological charm called the "rule of three", where people tend to remember and take in information best in sets of three. Grouping highlights into three often looks tidy and memorable. That said, do not force a third highlight just to reach three if only two truly matter. Truth and clarity matter more than hitting a number, so pick the count that best reflects your real highlights.</p>

<h2>The feature Columns section on different kinds of sites</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Company/service sites:</strong> show the strengths of a service, such as "10 years of experience", "After-sales support", "Great value".</li>
  <li><strong>Online course sites:</strong> summarize what learners get, such as "Learn anywhere", "A certificate", "A personal mentor".</li>
  <li><strong>Blogs with a selling point:</strong> say why to follow, such as "Updated weekly", "From real experience", "All free".</li>
  <li><strong>Product sites:</strong> summarize a product's standout features to give an overview before the details.</li>
</ul>
<p>The common thread is that a feature Columns section helps "answer the why" in a concise space. When a reader lands on the site and wants to know why they should care, the columns section gives the answer immediately in an easy-to-scan form.</p>

<h2>The feature Columns section and how the eye scans</h2>
<p>Good design understands that people do not read the web line by line like a book, they sweep their eyes to find points of interest (known as the F-pattern or Z-pattern). The feature Columns section is designed to fit this behavior exactly. When highlights are arranged as columns with prominent icons and short headings, the eye jumps easily from one column to the next, taking in the key information without reading every word.</p>
<p>This is why a feature Columns section is more powerful than writing highlights as a long paragraph. A long paragraph forces the eye to read line by line, which goes against scanning behavior, whereas columns split the information into chunks the eye can reach at once. Arranging information to match how people actually read helps your message reach readers effectively, which is the heart of user-centered design.</p>

<h2>An example of writing a good feature Columns section</h2>
<p>To picture it, look at an example for a web design service site. Three columns might be: (1) icon ⚡, heading "Fast delivery", description "Get a ready-to-use site within 7 days, no long wait". (2) icon 🎨, heading "Design that fits", description "Customized to your brand, no off-the-shelf template". (3) icon 🛟, heading "Post-delivery care", description "Free fixes and support for 30 days after handover".</p>
<p>Notice each column has a meaningful icon, a short heading that states the highlight, and a one-sentence description that names a concrete benefit. All three are close in length for balance, and use language that emphasizes what the customer gets, not just a list of features. Writing this way lets readers grasp the value in a few seconds, which is the goal of a feature Columns section.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The columns do not sit side by side</h3>
<p>On mobile the columns stack vertically by design for easy reading, which is normal behavior. On desktop the columns sit side by side according to the number you chose.</p>
<h3>The icon does not show</h3>
<p>Check that you entered an emoji in the column's icon field. If you leave it blank, no icon shows, which is expected.</p>
<h3>The columns look unbalanced</h3>
<p>This may be because the descriptions differ a lot in length. Try adjusting them to be close in length for visual balance.</p>
<h3>You want more than 3 columns</h3>
<p>This section is designed to show 2 or 3 columns for readability and balance. If you have more highlights than that, consider splitting them into several sections or picking only the most important ones.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Write short headings and concise descriptions, preserving the purpose of quick scanning.</li>
  <li>Choose emoji icons whose meaning fits and are consistent in style.</li>
  <li>Choose a column count that reflects your real highlights, do not force it to a number.</li>
  <li>Keep each column's description close in length for balance.</li>
  <li>Place a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cta">CTA</a> after the columns to lead readers to action once they have seen the highlights.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>A feature Columns section is a tool that helps summarize highlights or services so readers see and understand them quickly, ideal for answering "why choose us" in a concise space. With BlogKub you can build the columns section easily with no coding, showing highlights as 2 or 3 columns, each with a lightweight, meaningful emoji icon, a heading, and a description. You can add or remove columns, and it is responsive automatically. The keys to a columns section that works are being concise, keeping the icons consistent, and choosing a count that reflects your real highlights. Done right and paired with a CTA at the end, the columns section conveys your site's value clearly and leads readers to the next step.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>What is a feature Columns section?</summary><p>It is a section that shows highlights or services as 2 or 3 columns side by side, each with an icon, a heading, and a short description, used to summarize selling points or features so readers can scan and understand quickly.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I add or remove columns?</summary><p>Yes. You can add or remove columns and choose to show 2 or 3. In each column you fill in the icon, heading, and description yourself, all by typing with no coding needed.</p></details>
<details><summary>How do I add an icon?</summary><p>Enter an emoji or symbol in the icon field of each column, such as ⚡ 🎯 ✨, so each highlight gets a memorable symbol without loading an icon image.</p></details>
<details><summary>What kind of site is a feature Columns section good for?</summary><p>It suits any site that wants to summarize highlights or services fast, such as a company site, a course site, a service site, or a homepage that wants to say 'why choose us' with a few clear selling points.</p></details>
<details><summary>Is the feature Columns section responsive?</summary><p>Yes, it is responsive. On mobile the columns automatically stack vertically for easy reading rather than being squeezed narrow, so it displays well on both desktop and mobile.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/columns">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a Call To Action (CTA) box in a Blogger theme</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cta</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cta</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to set up a Call To Action (CTA) box in a Blogger theme with BlogKub: add a heading, subtext, a button with a link, choose a gradient/soft background, and stats in some templates, to lead readers to the action you want, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/cta.png" type="image/png" length="336150"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/cta.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/cta.png" alt="How to build a Call To Action (CTA) box in a Blogger theme" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a Call To Action (CTA) box in a Blogger theme</h1>
<p class="lead">A reader impressed by your content is ready to do something next, sign up, contact you, or view products, but if you do not tell them what to do, they usually will not. A Call To Action (CTA) box does that job. This article teaches you how to set one up in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, including the heading, button, link, background, and stats in some templates.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> the <strong>Call To Action (CTA)</strong> block in BlogKub lets you add a <strong>heading, a button with a link</strong> (internal/external), choose a <strong>gradient/soft background</strong>, and in some templates (course/company) add <strong>subtext and stats</strong>. It leads the reader from reading to the action you want, then you Export it to use.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/cta.png" aria-label="View the Call To Action (CTA) box at full size">
    <img alt="A Call To Action (CTA) box in a Blogger theme with a gradient background, a heading, subtext, stats, and a button" title="A Call To Action (CTA) box" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/cta.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1640" data-original-height="794" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A gradient CTA box with a heading, subtext, stats, and a button, leading readers to the action you want.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a CTA is, and why every site should have one</h2>
<p><strong>A Call To Action (CTA) is a box that invites the reader to do something, made of a motivating heading, subtext, and a button linking to a target page.</strong> For example, "Sign up for the free course", "Contact us today", or "View all products". A CTA is the bridge that turns a "reader" into a "doer" toward the site's goal.</p>
<p>The reason every site should have a CTA is the simple principle that "people tend to do what they are told to do". A reader who finishes the content feeling good but sees nothing to do next usually just closes the page. But with a clear CTA waiting, they have a direction to go. A CTA is therefore a key tool for turning interest into a result, whether your goal is a sale, collecting emails, or getting in touch.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to set up a CTA box, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the CTA block.</strong> Drag the "Call To Action" block from the library into the spot you want, such as after the main content on the homepage, or at the end of an article.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Add the heading, button, and link.</strong> Type a motivating heading, the button text, and the destination link, such as <code>/p/contact.html</code> for a contact page, or an external URL.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Choose the background (and stats).</strong> Choose a gradient (standout) or soft (subtle) background. In the course/company templates you can add supporting subtext and stats.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and test.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then click the CTA button to confirm the link goes to the correct target page.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Write an effective CTA heading and button</h2>
<p>A CTA's effectiveness depends mainly on the writing. The heading should motivate and state the value, not just say what to do. For example, "Start building a website for free today" is better than "Sign up", because it states both the action and the benefit. The subtext (if any) reduces hesitation by giving details or removing worries, such as "No cost, cancel anytime".</p>
<p>The button is the final decision point. Use words that state the action clearly and specifically, such as "Download free", "Reserve a seat", "Get a quote", which is better than a neutral "Click here" or "Submit", because a button that tells the reader what they get makes them click with confidence. The same principle applies to buttons in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/hero">Hero</a>. Writing good CTAs is therefore a skill that affects the results of the whole site.</p>

<h2>Choose a suitable background and position</h2>
<p>The CTA background affects its prominence. A <strong>gradient</strong> background makes the box stand out and separate from the surrounding content, good when the CTA is an important goal you definitely want readers to notice. A <strong>soft</strong> background is subtle and blended, good when you do not want the CTA to be too aggressive or when there are several CTAs on one page.</p>
<p>Position matters just as much. A CTA usually works best at a moment of high motivation, such as at the end of an article when the reader finishes impressed, or after a section explaining the value of what you offer. Placing a CTA when the reader is "ready" makes it more effective than placing it at random. That said, do not have too many CTAs so the reader is confused about what to do. Having one clear main CTA with a single goal usually works better than stuffing several buttons to choose from.</p>

<h2>Stats in some templates: adding credibility</h2>
<p>In the course and company templates, a CTA can include subtext and stats, a powerful technique for prompting action. Stats like "Over 5,000 students" or "Trusted by over 200 companies" act as "social proof", telling the reader many people have decided already, which reduces hesitation and adds confidence.</p>
<p>Social proof works because people tend to see what others chose as likely good. Adding real, impressive stats to a CTA therefore raises the action rate. That said, the numbers must be true. Exaggerated stats can create distrust if the reader sees through them, so honesty matters above all. Used correctly, stats in a CTA are an effective decision accelerator.</p>

<h2>The CTA and each kind of site's goal</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Email-collecting blog:</strong> a CTA to a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/newsletter">Newsletter signup box</a> or a signup page, to build a follower base.</li>
  <li><strong>Company/service site:</strong> a CTA to a contact page or quote request, to generate leads.</li>
  <li><strong>Online course site:</strong> a CTA to enroll or view course details, with student stats.</li>
  <li><strong>Review/affiliate site:</strong> a CTA to view a product or a buy page, to turn readers into buyers.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can see the CTA adapts to any site's goal. The key is knowing what you want the reader to do next, then designing the CTA to lead to that action clearly.</p>

<h2>The psychology behind an effective CTA</h2>
<p>An effective CTA is not accidental, it relies on understanding human behavior. The key principles are "reduce friction" and "increase motivation". Friction is what makes people hesitate, such as uncertainty about what happens when they click, or fear of wasting time or money. Writing a clear button and subtext that removes worries (such as "free", "no commitment") reduces this friction.</p>
<p>Motivation comes from stating a clear benefit and an appropriate sense of urgency. A CTA that says what the reader gets and why they should act now usually works better than a flat one. That said, urgency must be genuine and proportionate. Creating fake, exaggerated urgency can destroy trust. When you understand the balance between reducing friction and increasing motivation, you design a CTA that is both compelling and honest, which is the key to a CTA that works over the long term.</p>

<h2>Test and improve your CTA</h2>
<p>The best CTA usually does not come from guessing, but from observing and improving. Even though Blogger has no advanced testing tool built in, you can observe which kind of CTA seems to work with your readers. Try adjusting the text, position, or background color and see whether readers respond differently. Learning from real readers helps your CTA get better over time.</p>
<p>Remember there is no CTA formula that works for every site, because each audience is different. A CTA that works for a travel blog may not suit a business site. Experimenting and adapting to your own readers is therefore important. Start from good principles, then adjust based on what you observe. Do it consistently and your CTA will fit your readers and work better over time.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The CTA button goes nowhere when clicked</h3>
<p>Check that you entered the destination link in the button correctly, whether internal (such as /p/contact.html) or external (https://...), and Export again.</p>
<h3>The CTA does not stand out enough</h3>
<p>Try changing the background to a gradient to catch the eye, and check that the heading and button are motivating enough.</p>
<h3>Stats do not show</h3>
<p>The stats option is only in the course/company templates. If you use another template, this option is absent. Also check the stat format is correct (number | description, one per line).</p>
<h3>Several CTAs confuse the reader</h3>
<p>Reduce to one clear main CTA with a single goal per spot. A single clear goal usually works better than several competing buttons.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Write a heading that states the value and a button that states the action clearly. Avoid "Click here".</li>
  <li>Place the CTA at a moment of high motivation, such as the end of an article or after a value-explaining section.</li>
  <li>Choose a gradient background when you want it to stand out, soft when you want it subtle.</li>
  <li>Use real stats (in templates that support them) as social proof to prompt action.</li>
  <li>Have one clear main CTA per spot. Do not stuff several buttons and confuse people.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The Call To Action box is a key tool for turning readers into doers toward the site's goal. With BlogKub, you set up a CTA easily with no coding, adding a heading, a button with a link (internal or external), choosing a gradient or soft background, and in some templates adding subtext and stats as social proof. The key to an effective CTA is writing a heading and button that state the value and action clearly, placing it when the reader is ready, and having one clear goal per spot. Done right, a CTA turns reader interest into the result you want, whether that is a signup, contact, or a purchase.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>What is a CTA?</summary><p>A CTA (Call To Action) is a box that invites the reader to do something, with a heading, subtext, and a button linking to a target page, such as sign up, contact, or view products. It leads the reader from reading to the action you want.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where can the CTA button link to?</summary><p>It can link to both internal pages (such as /p/contact.html) and external links (such as https://...), so you can take readers to a contact page, product page, form, or other channel to match your goal.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I choose the CTA background?</summary><p>Yes. Choose between a gradient (bright and eye-catching) and a soft background (subtle and blended), to make the CTA stand out or fit in with the content as you prefer.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can the CTA include stats?</summary><p>In some templates. The course and company templates support subtext and stats (such as number of students or customers), to add credibility and prompt action.</p></details>
<details><summary>How should I write the CTA button?</summary><p>Use words that state the action clearly and emphasize the benefit, such as 'Start learning free' or 'Contact us for a quote', which is better than a neutral 'Click here'. A good button tells the reader what they get by clicking, so they click with confidence.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cta">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a Featured posts section in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/featured</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/featured</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to set up a Featured posts section in a Blogger theme with BlogKub: pin a recommended post with a label, show it as a large highlight on the homepage, fall back to the latest post automatically, pulled from the feed, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/featured.png" type="image/png" length="312891"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/featured.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/featured.png" alt="How to build a Featured posts section in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a Featured posts section in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">Some posts are more important than others, and you do not want them to disappear when a new post replaces them. A Featured posts section lets you pin an important post to show as a highlight on the homepage. This article teaches you how to set it up in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, pinning with a label, and using the latest post automatically if you have not pinned anything yet.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Intermediate</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> the <strong>Featured posts</strong> block in BlogKub lets you <strong>pin a recommended post with a label</strong> (such as 'Recommended') to show as a highlight on the homepage. You can pin several posts (the first is the large highlight). To pin: in blogger.com, add the label to the post. If you pin nothing, the system <strong>uses the latest post automatically</strong>, pulled from the feed, then you Export it to use.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/featured.png" aria-label="View the Featured posts pinned highlight section at full size">
    <img alt="A Featured posts section in a Blogger theme showing a large highlight with a recommended badge and two secondary posts" title="A Featured posts pinned highlight section" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/featured.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1800" data-original-height="1070" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A featured section: a large highlight with a 'Recommended' badge and secondary posts, pinned by label, pulled from the feed.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a featured section is, and why it helps</h2>
<p><strong>A Featured posts section is a part that shows an important post more prominently than ordinary posts on the homepage.</strong> It usually appears as a large card or a highlight that draws the eye, unlike a normal post grid that shows the latest posts in time order. The featured section lets you "choose" which post should sit at the top and stand out most.</p>
<p>The main benefit is controlling what readers see first. A typical blog always shows the newest post first, but sometimes your most important post is not the newest one, such as an introduction post, a main money-making post, or content you want to promote. The featured section solves this by letting you pin an important post so newer posts do not push it out of view over time.</p>

<h2>Pinning with a label: a flexible approach</h2>
<p>The clever part of the featured section in BlogKub (the magazine template) is <strong>pinning with a label</strong>. You set a label name for recommended posts (such as "Recommended"), then whenever you want to pin a post, you just go to blogger.com, edit that post, and add the label. The post appears as a featured post immediately.</p>
<p>This approach is very flexible because you manage pinning directly from the Blogger side, without going back to edit the theme. When you want to change the featured post, you just remove the label from the old post and add it to the new one. You can also <strong>pin several posts</strong> by applying the same label to multiple posts. The first post becomes the large highlight and the rest show below, letting you emphasize several important pieces at once.</p>
<div class="note">How to pin: go to blogger.com → edit the post you want → in the "Labels" field enter the word you set (such as Recommended) → publish. That post appears as a featured post immediately.</div>

<h2 id="step1">How to set up the featured section step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add or select the Featured block.</strong> Select the "Featured posts" block that comes with the template (such as the magazine one), or add it to the homepage.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Set the heading and pin label.</strong> Enter a section heading, and in the magazine template, set a label name for pinning (such as "Recommended"). Leave it blank to always use the latest post.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Add the label to the post.</strong> Go to blogger.com, edit the post you want to pin, and add the label you set. Publish it properly.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and check the result.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then check that the featured section shows the post you pinned correctly on the homepage.</li>
</ol>

<h2>A smart fallback: never empty</h2>
<p>A well-considered detail of the featured section is that <strong>if no post carries the label you set, the system shows the latest post as the featured one automatically</strong>. This matters a lot, because it means the featured section always has content to show and is never empty or broken even before you pin anything.</p>
<p>Having a fallback like this makes the feature usable from day one. You install the theme and the featured section immediately shows the latest post, then when you are ready, you pin the post you want. It is a design that accounts for the real situation, where users may not have configured everything yet. Instead of leaving the section empty and looking broken, the system fills it with reasonable content.</p>

<h2>The featured section and content strategy</h2>
<p>The featured section is a strategic tool, not just layout. It lets you control what content you emphasize to new readers. Examples of strategic use: pin an introduction post for new readers, pin a post that converts well, pin seasonal or campaign content, or pin a high-quality post you want to be the face of the site.</p>
<p>Used together with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/hero">Hero</a> that welcomes at the top and a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/postgrid">post grid</a> that shows general content, the featured section adds another layer of control over what the homepage communicates. You can design the homepage experience to lead readers to the most important content first, which is a purposeful use of homepage space, not just showing posts in chronological order.</p>

<h2>The featured section and magazine-style sites</h2>
<p>The featured format is at the heart of news and magazine site design, where the homepage is not just posts in time order but has an "editor" choosing which story should be at the top and stand out most. The featured section brings this idea to Blogger, letting you be the editor of your own site, choosing what readers see first, which is control over the homepage's storytelling.</p>
<p>For a site with varied content that wants to look like professional media, arranging one large highlight with secondary posts around it creates a clear visual hierarchy. Readers instantly know which story is most important. This format makes the homepage look managed and more interesting than a grid where every post has equal weight. The featured section is therefore not just a feature but a tool to give your site a print-media identity.</p>

<h2>Cautions when pinning</h2>
<p>Although the featured section is powerful, there are cautions. First, do not pin the same post for too long so regular readers see it repeatedly on every visit, which makes the homepage feel static and stale. You should review and rotate pinned posts periodically to keep the homepage fresh and moving.</p>
<p>Second, do not pin too many posts so the featured section becomes like a normal post grid. The power of the featured section comes from "choosing" a few pieces that truly matter. If you pin everything, nothing stands out. Limiting the number appropriately and choosing only content with real strategic value lets the featured section do its job fully. Restraint in what you choose is the key to using this feature effectively.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>You pinned a post but it does not show as featured</h3>
<p>Check that the label you entered on the post exactly matches the label name set in the Featured block. They must be spelled the same to pin, and check that the post is published.</p>
<h3>The featured section shows the latest post instead of the pinned one</h3>
<p>This is fallback behavior. If no post carries the label, the system uses the latest post. Check that you applied the label correctly.</p>
<h3>You want to change the featured post</h3>
<p>Go to blogger.com, remove the label from the old post and add it to the new one. The change is reflected without editing the theme.</p>
<h3>You do not see the pin label option</h3>
<p>The pin-by-label option is in the magazine template. If you use another template, the featured section may show the latest post according to that template's design.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Set an easy-to-remember pin label, and spell it the same in the block and the post.</li>
  <li>Pin strategically important posts, such as an introduction post or content you want to promote.</li>
  <li>Use pinning of several posts to emphasize several important pieces, with the first as the large highlight.</li>
  <li>Review pinned posts periodically, updating them to match campaigns or seasons.</li>
  <li>Use it together with a Hero and a post grid to design the homepage purposefully.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The featured section is a strategic tool that lets you control which content should stand out on the homepage, instead of always letting the newest post go first. With BlogKub you can pin a recommended post with a label, managing it directly from the Blogger side, pin several posts with the first as the large highlight, and if you have not pinned anything, the system uses the latest post automatically so the section is never empty. Used strategically with a Hero and a post grid, the featured section lets you design the homepage to lead readers to the most important content, a purposeful use of homepage space that boosts the results you want.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>How do you pin a featured post?</summary><p>In the magazine template, you set a label name for recommended posts (such as 'Recommended'), then go to blogger.com, edit the post you want, and add that label. That post appears as a featured post immediately. You can pin several posts, with the first shown as the large highlight.</p></details>
<details><summary>What happens if I do not pin any post?</summary><p>If no post carries the label you set, the system shows the latest post as the featured one automatically. So the featured section always has content to show and is never empty.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where does the featured section pull its data from?</summary><p>It pulls from Blogger's post feed, filtering by the label you set (if any), then displays the cover image, title, and post details as a highlight. It updates automatically when you pin or publish a post.</p></details>
<details><summary>How many posts can I pin?</summary><p>You can pin several posts by applying the same label to multiple posts. The first post shows as the large highlight and the rest show below, helping you emphasize several important pieces.</p></details>
<details><summary>What kind of blog is the featured section good for?</summary><p>It suits blogs with important posts you want to stand out above ordinary ones, such as news blogs, magazines, or any site with a main post you want pinned at the top so newer posts do not push it out of view.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/featured">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a footer (links + copyright) in a Blogger theme</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/footer</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/footer</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to set up the footer in a Blogger theme with BlogKub: add a site description, link columns, copyright text, and choose a background color (text adjusts readability automatically), to aid navigation and credibility, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/footer.png" type="image/png" length="308586"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/footer.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/footer.png" alt="How to build a footer (links + copyright) in a Blogger theme" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a footer (links + copyright) in a Blogger theme</h1>
<p class="lead">The footer is where readers look when they scroll to the bottom: policy links, contact channels, categories, and site info. A well-organized footer aids both navigation and credibility. This article teaches you how to set up the footer in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, including the site description, link columns, copyright, and a background color where the text adjusts readability automatically.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> the <strong>Footer</strong> block in BlogKub lets you set the <strong>site description, link columns, copyright text</strong>, and <strong>background color</strong>, with the text adjusting to white/black for readability automatically based on how dark the background is. It uses the same logo/name as the header (syncs SEO/schema), aids secondary navigation, and adds credibility, then you Export it to use.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/footer.png" aria-label="View the footer (links + copyright) at full size">
    <img alt="A footer in a Blogger theme with a dark background showing the site name, description, and copyright, with readable white text" title="A footer (links + copyright)" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/footer.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="2400" data-original-height="550" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A dark-background footer where the text adjusts to readable white automatically, with a site description and copyright.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a footer is, and why it is worth more than you think</h2>
<p><strong>A footer is the bottom bar of the site that appears on every page, usually with a site description, link columns, and copyright text.</strong> Many people overlook the footer, thinking it is just a closing bit, but it actually plays an important role, because it is where readers instinctively look for certain things, such as a contact channel, the privacy policy, or a link not in the main menu.</p>
<p>The footer acts as a "safety net" for navigation. When a reader scrolls to the bottom and has not found what they want, the footer is the last chance to give them an option to continue, instead of leaving a dead end. Moreover, a footer with complete, organized information signals that the site is serious and credible, which affects the reader's overall feeling.</p>

<h2>The editable parts of the footer</h2>
<p>BlogKub's footer lets you edit all the main parts.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Site description:</strong> a short text saying what the site is about, usually placed with the logo, reinforcing the brand identity.</li>
  <li><strong>Link columns:</strong> organize links into groups, such as content categories, resources, and policy, with the footer manager, so readers find the link they want easily.</li>
  <li><strong>Copyright text:</strong> the bottom line stating ownership, such as © 2026 site name.</li>
  <li><strong>Background color:</strong> choose the footer's background color, with the text adjusting readability automatically.</li>
</ul>
<p>The footer also uses the <strong>same logo and blog name as the header</strong>, which sync with SEO/schema, so it is consistent site-wide with a single setup. This consistency makes the site feel systematic and professional.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to set up the footer, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Select the footer block.</strong> Most templates ship with a footer. Select the "Footer" block to edit, or add it yourself.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Add the description and link columns.</strong> Type a short site description and use the footer manager to build link columns, grouping links by category.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Choose a background color and add copyright.</strong> Choose the footer background color (the text adjusts to white/black for readability itself) and type the copyright text.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and check.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then view the footer on both desktop and mobile, confirming the links work and the text is readable.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Background color with automatic text adjustment: a detail that helps you</h2>
<p>The classic problem with choosing a footer background is that a dark background with dark text is unreadable, or a light background with light text disappears. BlogKub solves this by <strong>adjusting the text color to white or black automatically based on how dark the background you chose is</strong>. If you choose a dark background, the text is white, and if you choose a light background, the text is dark.</p>
<p>This detail lets you choose a background freely without worrying about readability. The system keeps the contrast at a comfortable level always. This is an example of "error-preventing" design for the user. Instead of letting you choose a color that could make the footer unreadable, the system handles readability, so you can fully focus on choosing a color that fits your brand.</p>

<h2>The footer, credibility, and E-E-A-T</h2>
<p>The footer is where you place key links that signal the site's credibility, especially links to <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/breadcrumb">pages</a> like About, Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and a contact channel. Google values these signals in the E-E-A-T framework (Expertise, Experience, Authoritativeness, Trust). A site with these pages, easily reachable from the footer, looks more serious and trustworthy.</p>
<p>In practice, having policy and contact links in the footer is not just about SEO but a standard of a good site. Readers expect to find this information, and if your site runs ads or collects any data, having clear policy pages is necessary. The footer is therefore a strategic place to put these links so readers and search engines can reach them from every page.</p>

<h2>The footer and secondary navigation</h2>
<p>Beyond credibility, the footer serves as valuable secondary navigation. Footer column links let readers reach categories or key pages even at the bottom of the page, giving an option instead of a dead end. You can place links to popular articles, main categories, or resources you want to promote, to prompt readers to explore further.</p>
<p>Used with the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/header">header</a> for main navigation and other read-on elements like <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related posts</a>, the footer is another layer of the navigation system that keeps readers from easily hitting a dead end. Designing every point of the site to have a way forward is a key principle for keeping readers on the site longer.</p>

<h2>A good footer is a detail people notice</h2>
<p>Even though readers spend less time on the footer than other parts, a well-organized footer makes a difference in the overall feeling. A site with an empty or cluttered footer often looks unfinished, while a footer with complete, organized information and useful links makes the site look serious and cared for. This feeling accumulates with other good elements into an impression that the site has standards.</p>
<p>In practice, the footer is also where genuinely intent readers look for information, such as someone who wants to contact you, someone who wants to read the policy, or someone considering how credible the site is. Investing a little time to organize the footer well is therefore worthwhile, because it serves these high-intent readers and closes the visit experience neatly.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The footer text is hard to read</h3>
<p>Normally the system adjusts the text color for readability based on the background. If it still feels hard to read, it may be because you chose a color midway between light and dark. Try a clearly dark or clearly light color for better contrast.</p>
<h3>Column links do not show</h3>
<p>Check that you added the links in the footer manager and Exported again. Blank links do not show. Check that you filled in both the text and the URL.</p>
<h3>The footer looks cramped on mobile</h3>
<p>On small screens, columns stack instead of sitting side by side, which is normal. If you have very many links, consider reducing the columns or links to keep the footer from getting too long.</p>
<h3>The footer logo does not match the header</h3>
<p>The footer uses the same logo/name as the header. If it does not match, check the logo setting in the header/SEO, because both pull from the same source.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Always include policy links (Privacy, Terms) and a contact channel in the footer, for credibility.</li>
  <li>Organize links into columns by group so readers find them easily, not everything in one pile.</li>
  <li>Write a short site description reinforcing what the site is about.</li>
  <li>Choose a background color that fits the brand. The system adjusts the text readability itself.</li>
  <li>Place links to popular categories or articles to prompt further exploration.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The footer is an often-overlooked element with an important role in both navigation and credibility. With BlogKub, you set up the footer fully with no coding, including the site description, link columns, copyright text, and a background color where the text adjusts readability automatically, plus the same logo and name as the header for consistency. When you place policy and contact links to reinforce E-E-A-T, organize links into easy-to-find groups, and give readers an option instead of a dead end, your footer makes the site look systematic, credible, and helps keep readers on the site better.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>What should a footer have?</summary><p>Usually a short site description, link columns (such as categories, policy, contact), and copyright text. The footer aids secondary navigation, adds credibility, and is where you place key links like policy and contact pages.</p></details>
<details><summary>If I choose a footer background color, is the text readable?</summary><p>Yes. The system adjusts the text color to white or black for readability automatically based on how dark the background you chose is, so you never have to worry about text disappearing into the background.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the footer help SEO?</summary><p>Indirectly. Footer links aid internal navigation and spread linking to key pages, and it is where you place policy and contact links, which are credibility signals (E-E-A-T) good for the site overall.</p></details>
<details><summary>What links should I put in the footer?</summary><p>Commonly main content categories, resource links (such as About, Blog), and policy links (Privacy, Terms, Contact), organized into columns by group so readers find them easily.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where does the footer logo come from?</summary><p>The footer uses the same logo and blog name as the header, which sync with SEO/schema, so it is consistent site-wide with a single setup, no repeated entry.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/footer">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a header (logo + menu) in a Blogger theme</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/header</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/header</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to set up the header in a Blogger theme with BlogKub: add a logo, blog name, multi-level menus, choose the mobile menu side (left/right), a search button, sticky top, and an automatic mobile bottom bar, with no coding, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/header.png" type="image/png" length="312331"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/header.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/header.png" alt="How to build a header (logo + menu) in a Blogger theme" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a header (logo + menu) in a Blogger theme</h1>
<p class="lead">The header is the first thing readers see and the navigation hub of the whole site. A good header makes the site look professional and easy to use on every device. This article teaches you how to set up the header in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, including the logo, multi-level menus, mobile menu, search button, sticky, and an automatic mobile bottom bar, with no coding.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 10 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> the <strong>Header</strong> block in BlogKub lets you set the <strong>logo + blog name</strong> (syncs SEO/schema), <strong>multi-level menus with submenu support</strong>, the <strong>mobile menu side (left/right)</strong>, a search button, <strong>sticky top</strong>, and an <strong>automatic mobile bottom bar</strong>. It is all adjusted by typing and dragging, with no coding, then you Export it to use.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/header.png" aria-label="View the header (logo + menu) at full size">
    <img alt="A header in a Blogger theme showing a logo, blog name, and a horizontal navigation menu" title="A header (logo + menu)" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/header.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="2400" data-original-height="142" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A header with a logo, blog name, and navigation menu, with adjustable menus, mobile menu, search button, sticky, and bottom bar.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a header is, and why it matters</h2>
<p><strong>A header is the top bar of the site with the logo, blog name, and navigation menu.</strong> It appears on every page, so it is both the brand's face and the navigation hub. Readers use the header to know what site they are on and to reach the site's sections. A well-designed header therefore affects both the first impression and ease of use.</p>
<p>The header's challenge is working well on both large and small screens. On desktop there is room for a full horizontal menu, but on mobile it has to collapse compactly while staying easy to use. BlogKub handles this complexity automatically. You set up the menu once and the system adapts the display to each device itself.</p>

<h2>Logo and blog name: syncing with SEO and schema</h2>
<p>The header lets you add both a <strong>logo image (via URL)</strong> and <strong>blog name text</strong>. The refined part is that both values <strong>sync to the SEO settings and schema automatically</strong>. The blog name becomes the site name in the SEO data, and the logo URL becomes the Logo in the Organization schema, which Google uses to build the brand's Knowledge Graph.</p>
<p>This consistency matters, because it keeps your brand info the same across the site, with no repeated entry and no risk of mismatched typing. For the logo, a transparent PNG around 512×512px and under 200KB is recommended, to be crisp and load fast. Set it once and the header, footer, and schema all use one consistent set of data.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to set up the header, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add or select the header block.</strong> If you already picked a template, it usually ships with a header block, or add the "Header" block yourself.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Add the logo and blog name.</strong> Paste the logo image URL and type the blog name, which syncs to SEO and schema automatically.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Arrange the menu and mobile options.</strong> Use the menu manager to add, remove, rename, reorder, and create submenus, choose the mobile menu side (left/right), turn on the search button, set sticky, and enable the mobile bottom bar as you like.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and check on every screen.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then view the header on both desktop and mobile, confirming the menu, search button, and bottom bar work correctly.</li>
</ol>
<div class="note">It is all adjusted by typing and dragging, with no knowledge of code at all. The system turns it into a ready-to-use Blogger XML theme for you.</div>

<h2>Multi-level menus: organize your content tidily</h2>
<p>BlogKub's menu manager lets you build menus freely, adding, removing, renaming, and reordering by dragging. A key highlight is <strong>submenu (dropdown) support</strong>, letting you organize content into layers, such as a main "Articles" menu with submenus for "Travel", "Food", and "Reviews" inside.</p>
<p>Submenus are very valuable for sites with many categories, because they keep the main menu bar from getting too long and cluttered, and help readers see the site's content structure clearly. Instead of a dozen menu items in a row, you group them under a few main menus, keeping it both clean and easy to find. You can also toggle icons in front of menu items, to add interest and help readers remember menus by their symbol.</p>

<h2>The mobile menu: hamburger + automatic bottom bar</h2>
<p>On mobile, limited space makes a full horizontal menu unusable, so BlogKub handles it automatically with two elements working together.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Hamburger button + slide panel:</strong> the menu collapses to a three-line button, and tapping it slides a menu panel out from the side. You choose whether it slides from the <strong>left or right</strong> as you prefer. This panel shows all menus, including submenus.</li>
  <li><strong>Bottom navigation bar:</strong> a bar pinned to the bottom of the screen on mobile, showing key items like home, search, menu, mode, and share, so readers tap with a thumb conveniently without reaching to the top. It appears automatically when enabled.</li>
</ul>
<p>Having both makes mobile readers navigate very conveniently. The bottom bar puts frequent actions within thumb reach, while the hamburger panel holds all menus for when they want the full list. This is the standard of modern apps and sites that BlogKub brings to your Blogger blog without you designing it yourself. To understand the whole menu customization picture, read more on the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/about">About BlogKub page</a>, which describes the menu system.</p>

<h2>Search button and sticky: navigate anytime</h2>
<p>The header also has extra options that raise navigation. The first is a <strong>search button</strong> that lets readers call up a search box straight from the header, good for content-heavy sites where search matters, and pairs well with the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/search">search box</a>. The second is <strong>sticky</strong>, which keeps the header pinned to the top edge as you scroll down.</p>
<p>The benefit of sticky is that the menu and search button are within reach at all times. A reader who scrolled far down and wants another page can go there immediately without scrolling back to the top, greatly reducing navigation friction, especially on long pages. That said, on mobile where the bottom bar already exists, consider whether you need the header sticky too, so it does not take up too much screen space.</p>

<h2>The header, first impressions, and branding</h2>
<p>The header is where the first impression forms. A clear logo and name tell readers immediately who the site is and what it is about. An orderly, easy-to-use header signals the site has standards and is credible. Conversely, a cluttered header or confusing menu makes readers feel bad from the first second.</p>
<p>Because the header appears on every page, it is what builds the brand identity readers see repeatedly until they remember it. A consistent logo, colors that match the theme, and a stable menu give your site a clear identity. Used with a consistent <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/footer">footer</a>, your site feels like a deliberately designed product, not a blog thrown together casually.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The logo does not show or is blurry</h3>
<p>Check that the logo image URL is correct and reachable. Use a transparent PNG of a suitable size (around 512×512px). Too small an image gets blurry when scaled.</p>
<h3>The submenu does not open</h3>
<p>Check that you structured the submenu correctly under the main menu in the menu manager, and Export again. On mobile the submenu shows in the hamburger panel.</p>
<h3>The bottom bar does not appear on mobile</h3>
<p>Check that you enabled the bottom bar option, and view it on a real mobile screen, because this bar is designed for mobile and does not show on desktop.</p>
<h3>The header covers content when sticky</h3>
<p>This is normal sticky behavior, with the header floating over. The system already reserves spacing for content. If it feels like it takes too much space on mobile, consider turning off sticky on small screens or using the bottom bar instead.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Use a good-quality transparent PNG logo and set a clear blog name, because they sync with SEO/schema.</li>
  <li>Keep the menu concise, using submenus to group categories instead of an overly long main menu.</li>
  <li>Choose the mobile menu side to suit the hand most readers hold with (right is often convenient).</li>
  <li>Enable the mobile bottom bar for convenient thumb navigation.</li>
  <li>Test the header on both desktop and mobile before publishing every time.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The header is both the brand's face and the navigation hub that appears on every page. With BlogKub, you set up the header fully with no coding, including a logo and blog name that sync with SEO/schema, multi-level menus with submenu support, a hamburger mobile menu with a choice of side, an automatic mobile bottom bar, a search button, and sticky top. The system handles the display for every device itself. When you set it up tidily and test on every screen, your header makes the site look professional, easy to use, and creates a good first impression for readers every time they arrive.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Can I set up the menu with no coding?</summary><p>Yes. Add, remove, rename, and reorder menu items by typing and dragging in the menu manager, with submenu (dropdown) support too, and no knowledge of code. The system turns it into a ready-to-use theme automatically.</p></details>
<details><summary>How does the mobile menu work?</summary><p>On mobile the menu collapses to a hamburger button with a panel that slides in from the left or right as chosen, and a bottom navigation bar appears automatically so readers can tap key items with a thumb.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the logo I add affect SEO?</summary><p>Yes. The blog name and logo URL set in the header sync to the SEO settings and schema (Organization/Logo) automatically, keeping your brand info consistent across the site and friendly to the Knowledge Graph.</p></details>
<details><summary>What is a sticky header?</summary><p>Sticky keeps the header at the top always as the reader scrolls down, so the menu and search button stay within reach for easy navigation. You can turn it on or off as you like.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does it support multi-level submenus?</summary><p>It supports submenus (dropdowns) to organize content into layers, keeping a site with many categories tidy. Readers open a main menu and see clearly grouped submenus.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/header">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a homepage Hero banner in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/hero</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/hero</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to set up the homepage Hero banner in a Blogger theme with BlogKub: edit the eyebrow, heading, subtext, button, circular image, left/center alignment, gradient/dark/soft background, and template-specific options, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/hero.png" type="image/png" length="335543"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/hero.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/hero.png" alt="How to build a homepage Hero banner in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a homepage Hero banner in a Blogger theme</h1>
<p class="lead">The Hero is the big welcome banner readers see first when they land on the homepage. It has a few seconds to say what the site is and why to stay. This article teaches you how to set up the Hero in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, editing the text, button, image, alignment, and background, along with template-specific options and how to write it effectively.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> the <strong>Hero</strong> block in BlogKub lets you edit the <strong>eyebrow, heading, subtext, CTA button</strong>, alignment (<strong>left/center</strong>), background (<strong>gradient/dark/soft</strong>), and a <strong>circular image</strong>. Every text can be left blank to hide it. It also has <strong>template-specific options</strong> such as a rating bar (review), feature chips (course), and a secondary button (company), then you Export it to use, all with no coding.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/hero.png" aria-label="View the homepage Hero banner at full size">
    <img alt="A homepage Hero banner in a Blogger theme showing an eyebrow, bold heading, subtext, CTA button, and circular image" title="A homepage Hero banner" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/hero.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="2400" data-original-height="804" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A Hero banner with an eyebrow, heading, subtext, CTA button, and circular image, with editable text, color, and alignment.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a Hero is, and why it is the most important part of the homepage</h2>
<p><strong>A Hero is the large main banner at the top of the homepage, usually made of a bold heading, short subtext, and a call-to-action button (CTA)</strong>, with an accompanying image. It is the most valuable space on the site, because it is the first thing readers see without scrolling (above the fold), and it decides whether readers stay or leave within a few seconds.</p>
<p>The Hero's job is to answer three questions in the reader's mind immediately: "What is this site?", "How does it relate to me?", and "What should I do next?" The heading says what the site is, the subtext says the value the reader gets, and the CTA button guides the next action. When the Hero answers all three clearly, readers understand and tend to explore further.</p>

<h2>The editable parts of the Hero</h2>
<p>BlogKub's Hero lets you edit every part, and every text can be left blank to hide it, so you can design anything from minimal to fully featured.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Eyebrow:</strong> a short text above the heading, such as "✦ Personal blog", to categorize or add context. Leave it blank to hide.</li>
  <li><strong>Heading (title):</strong> the most prominent text, saying what the site is. It should be short and powerful.</li>
  <li><strong>Subtext (subtitle):</strong> expands the heading slightly, stating the value or what the reader gets.</li>
  <li><strong>CTA button:</strong> a button that guides an action, such as "Read the latest posts".</li>
  <li><strong>Circular image:</strong> an accompanying image (such as a profile photo or brand image), which you can toggle and set the URL for.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can also choose the <strong>alignment</strong> between left or center, and choose a <strong>background</strong> in three styles: gradient (bright), dark (premium), and soft (clean). This flexibility lets the Hero fit the kind of site and mood you want.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to set up the Hero, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Select the Hero block.</strong> Most templates ship with a Hero on the homepage. Select it to edit, or add a Hero yourself.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Add the text and button.</strong> Set the eyebrow, heading, subtext, and CTA button text (leave fields blank to hide what you do not want).</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Choose alignment, background, and image.</strong> Choose left or center alignment, a gradient/dark/soft background, and toggle the circular image and set the image URL you want.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and check.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then view the Hero on both desktop and mobile, confirming the text reads easily and the button is tappable.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Template-specific options: a Hero that fits the kind of site</h2>
<p>What makes BlogKub's Hero smart is that it <strong>adapts the options to each template</strong>, because different kinds of site need different elements.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Review template:</strong> a review rating bar in the Hero, with a score (such as 4.8/5) and a review count, to build credibility on sight.</li>
  <li><strong>Course template:</strong> a feature list (chips) you add line by line, to show what students get in a quick scan.</li>
  <li><strong>Sidebar-blog template:</strong> tags in the Hero to state the blog's main topics.</li>
  <li><strong>Company template:</strong> an extra secondary button, such as "Contact us", alongside the main button, to support multiple goals.</li>
</ul>
<p>Having Hero options that match the kind of site lets you communicate on point without customizing it yourself. The review template gets credibility from the score, the course template gets to show its selling points, and the company template gets varied CTAs. All of it is designed to fit what each kind of reader is looking for.</p>

<h2>Write an effective Hero heading and CTA</h2>
<p>Because the Hero has a few seconds, the writing matters a lot. The principle of the heading is "short, clear, and stating the value". Avoid broad headings that say nothing, like "Welcome", and choose one that says what the site offers, such as "The most worthwhile product reviews" or "Build your own website in 30 days". Readers should understand within a few seconds what the site is about and whether it matches what they want.</p>
<p>The CTA button should guide a clear action with motivating words, such as "Read the latest posts", "Start learning free", or "See all reviews", which is better than a neutral "Click here". A good button tells the reader what they get by clicking, so they click with confidence. When the heading, subtext, and CTA work together consistently, the Hero effectively turns visitors into readers who explore the site further.</p>

<h2>The Hero, first impressions, and staying</h2>
<p>User behavior research finds that readers decide to stay or leave within the first few seconds, so the Hero is the gateway that determines whether readers scroll on or close. A clear, attractive Hero reduces the "bounce rate", because it communicates value fast enough to hold readers.</p>
<p>When the Hero does its job well, readers scroll down to other sections, such as article groups and recommendations. Designing the Hero to flow smoothly into the next section is therefore important. A CTA button that leads to the latest posts or a content section helps guide readers into the site naturally. Used with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/header">header</a> that navigates easily and an interesting group of articles below, your homepage works as a system for turning visitors into readers.</p>

<h2>The Hero, SEO, and speed</h2>
<p>The Hero heading is usually the largest text on the homepage and an important element search engines weigh. Writing a heading that clearly says what the site is about helps readers and also helps search engines understand the site's main topic. That said, keep the heading meaningful to readers first, not stuffed with keywords until it reads unnaturally, because the reader experience matters more and benefits SEO over the long term.</p>
<p>On speed, if the Hero has a large image, use an appropriately resized and compressed image, because the Hero image is usually the first to load and affects LCP (Largest Contentful Paint), one of the Core Web Vitals. Choosing a light image helps the homepage open fast, creating a good first impression in both look and speed. If you do not need an image, a text-only Hero with a gradient background is an option that is both beautiful and light.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The Hero image does not show</h3>
<p>Check that you turned on the image option and set a correct, reachable image URL. If you do not want an image, turn off this option for a clean text-only Hero.</p>
<h3>The Hero text is too long on mobile</h3>
<p>A long heading and subtext push up the Hero's height on small screens. Keep the text concise, especially the heading, so the Hero looks good on every screen.</p>
<h3>The background blends with the text</h3>
<p>Choose a background that contrasts with the text color, such as a dark background with light text. The system tunes readability to a degree, but choosing a clearly contrasting pair reads most comfortably.</p>
<h3>Template-specific options do not appear</h3>
<p>Options like a rating bar or feature chips depend on the chosen template. If you do not see them, the current template does not have that element, which is by design for each kind of site.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Write a short, clear heading that states the value, so readers understand within a few seconds.</li>
  <li>Use a CTA button that states the action clearly. Avoid neutral words like "Click here".</li>
  <li>Choose a background and alignment that fit the site's mood, and contrast with the text for readability.</li>
  <li>Use template-specific options (rating/features/secondary button) to communicate to the right kind of site.</li>
  <li>Test the Hero on both desktop and mobile, especially text length on small screens.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The Hero is the most valuable space on the homepage, because it is the first gateway deciding whether readers stay or leave. With BlogKub, you edit every part of the Hero with no coding, the eyebrow, heading, subtext, CTA button, circular image, alignment, and background, plus template-specific options that make the Hero fit the kind of site, whether a review's rating bar, a course's features, or a company's secondary button. When you write a clear heading and CTA, choose a design that fits the site's mood, and test on every screen, your Hero creates a strong first impression and leads readers into the site effectively.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>What is a Hero?</summary><p>A Hero is the large main banner at the very top of the homepage, usually with a bold heading, subtext, and a call-to-action button (CTA). It creates the first impression and tells readers immediately what the site is about and what to do next.</p></details>
<details><summary>What can I edit in the Hero?</summary><p>You can edit the eyebrow, heading, subtext, button text, alignment (left/center), background (gradient/dark/soft), and circular image. Every text can be left blank to hide it, so you can keep it simple or fully featured as you like.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the Hero have different options per template?</summary><p>Yes. The review template has a rating bar, the course and sidebar-blog templates have a feature/tag list, and the company template has a secondary button. The system adapts the Hero options to each template's kind of site automatically.</p></details>
<details><summary>How should I write the Hero heading?</summary><p>Write it short, clear, and stating the value or what the reader gets. A good heading lets the reader understand within a few seconds what the site is about, with the subtext expanding slightly, followed by a button guiding the next action.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the Hero display well on mobile?</summary><p>Yes. The Hero adapts to small screens automatically, laying out text and buttons to read easily and resizing the image, so the main banner looks good on both desktop and mobile with no separate setup.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/hero">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build an image block (with ALT + caption) in a Blogger theme</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/image</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/image</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add an image block to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: set the image URL, ALT text (important for SEO), a caption, and a 16:9/4:3/1:1 ratio so images look good and follow SEO best practice, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/image.png" type="image/png" length="316338"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/image.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/image.png" alt="How to build an image block (with ALT + caption) in a Blogger theme" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build an image block (with ALT + caption) in a Blogger theme</h1>
<p class="lead">Images are a key part of a site that looks good and reads well, but a good image is not just pretty. It needs correct ALT for SEO and accessibility, and a suitable ratio for a tidy look. This article teaches you how to add an image block to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, with ALT, a caption, and ratio choices.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> the <strong>Image</strong> block in BlogKub lets you set the <strong>image URL, ALT text</strong> (important for SEO/accessibility), a <strong>caption below the image</strong>, and choose a <strong>16:9 / 4:3 / 1:1 ratio</strong>. The system crops the image to fit the chosen ratio for a tidy look, then you Export it to use.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/image.png" aria-label="View the image block with ALT and caption at full size">
    <img alt="An image block in a Blogger theme showing a 16:9 image with a caption below and ALT" title="The image block with ALT and caption" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/image.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1360" data-original-height="948" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A 16:9 image block with a caption below and meaningful ALT, good for SEO and accessibility.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What the image block is, and when to use it</h2>
<p><strong>The image block is an element for placing a single image in the theme, with ALT, caption, and ratio settings.</strong> Use it when you want to place an image on a page (such as the homepage, a static page, or parts of the theme) with control over how it displays. Unlike inserting an image into article content through the Blogger editor, the image block is part of the theme structure you arrange.</p>
<p>The image block is valuable because it handles the details people often forget, especially ALT and the ratio. Having a clear field for ALT reminds you to add it every time, and choosing a ratio keeps images in the same spot at a consistent size instead of jumping around, so the page looks tidy and professional.</p>

<h2>ALT: the small detail that matters for SEO and accessibility</h2>
<p><strong>ALT (alternative text) is text that describes what the image is.</strong> It does not show to general readers, but it plays two important roles. The first is <strong>SEO</strong>: search engines cannot read what an image depicts, so they rely on ALT to understand it, which affects whether your image appears in image search (Google Images). The second is <strong>accessibility</strong>: users who cannot see use screen readers that read the ALT aloud, so they can perceive the image content.</p>
<p>Writing good ALT means describing the image meaningfully and concisely. For example, "Sunset view at Patong Beach, Phuket" is better than "image" or "image1", and you should not stuff keywords unnaturally, because it looks like spam. Good ALT states what is really in the image, which helps both search engines and readers using a screen reader. This connects to the principle of making images show in Google that we mention in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/lightbox">Lightbox</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/slider">image slider</a> articles too.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add an image block, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the image block.</strong> Drag the "Image" block from the library into the spot you want, such as the homepage or a section of the theme.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Set the image URL and ALT.</strong> Paste the image URL and add ALT that conveys the real meaning of the image. Do not leave it blank, because it matters for SEO and accessibility.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Add a caption and choose a ratio.</strong> Add a caption below the image if you want, and choose a 16:9, 4:3, or 1:1 ratio to match the image type and position.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and check.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then check that the image shows at the right ratio, crisp, with correct ALT and caption.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Choose a ratio to match the image type</h2>
<p>The image block offers three ratios, and the system crops the image to fit the chosen ratio for a tidy look. Choosing one that matches the image type makes it look its best.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>16:9 (wide landscape):</strong> good for scenery, atmosphere shots, banners, or cover images, giving a spacious, cinematic feel.</li>
  <li><strong>4:3 (standard):</strong> a classic, balanced ratio, good for general images that do not need to be especially wide or square.</li>
  <li><strong>1:1 (square):</strong> good for product images, profile pictures, or images that want symmetry, a ratio popular on social media.</li>
</ul>
<p>The benefit of locking the ratio is consistency. When images in the same spot share a ratio, the page looks orderly, with no oddly tall or short images. That said, cropping to a ratio means part of the image may be cut, so choose an image with the important subject centered, or a ratio close to the original, to reduce cutting out something important.</p>

<h2>ALT vs caption: how they differ</h2>
<p>Many people confuse ALT with the caption, because both concern the text of an image, but they serve different jobs. <strong>ALT is alternative text that general readers do not see</strong>, used by search engines and screen readers. The <strong>caption is text shown below the image that every reader sees</strong>, used to give context or describe the image further.</p>
<p>The two complement each other well. ALT describes what the image is for those who cannot see and for search engines, while the caption gives information every reader benefits from, such as the source, a place name, or an interesting note. You do not need to write both the same, because they serve different jobs. ALT focuses on describing the image content directly, while the caption adds context for the reader. Using both appropriately makes your images both SEO-friendly and informative for readers.</p>

<h2>Speed: keep images light</h2>
<p>Images are one of the biggest factors in site speed. A large image makes the page load slowly and affects Core Web Vitals, especially LCP (Largest Contentful Paint), which is often affected by a big image near the top of the page. So before uploading, resize the image to fit what will actually display and compress the file smaller without losing too much quality.</p>
<p>Using an image sharp enough to be crisp but not larger than necessary is a good balance. An image much larger than what displays wastes loading for no benefit. There are plenty of free image compression tools that reduce file size. Keeping images light is a good habit that affects both the reader experience and your speed-side SEO score. When images are beautiful, have correct ALT, and are light, you benefit on every front.</p>

<h2>Images, storytelling, and engagement</h2>
<p>Images are not just decoration, they are a powerful storytelling tool. Research finds that people remember information with visuals much better than plain text, and content with images tends to get higher engagement and shares. Good images explain what text struggles to, create emotion, and make a page more readable. Caring about choosing and placing images therefore affects both the reader's understanding and impression.</p>
<p>That said, an image should support the content, not just fill space. A relevant, meaningful image is worth more than a pretty one unrelated to the subject. Choosing images that fit the content and placing them at the right moments lets images do real storytelling. Combined with good ALT and a suitable ratio, images become elements that are beautiful, meaningful, and SEO-friendly all at once.</p>

<h2>Image copyright: something to care about</h2>
<p>An important thing bloggers often overlook is image copyright. Using an image from the internet without checking the rights can infringe copyright and lead to legal trouble. Use images you took yourself, licensed images you bought, or free images from sources that permit use (such as images under an open license), and follow each source's conditions, like giving credit if required.</p>
<p>Using images correctly not only avoids problems but reflects the site's professionalism and credibility. There are plenty of quality free image sources today, so choosing images from legitimate sources is not hard, and it is a good habit to have from the start of building a site. When you care about quality, relevance, ALT, speed, and copyright, you use images fully and correctly.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The image does not show</h3>
<p>Check that the image URL is correct and reachable externally. If you use an image hosted somewhere that requires login or is restricted, it may not show. Use an image hosted openly and reachable.</p>
<h3>The image crops out something important</h3>
<p>The system crops the image to fit the chosen ratio. If something important is cut, try a ratio closer to the original, or use an image with the important subject centered.</p>
<h3>Forgetting to add ALT</h3>
<p>Always add ALT, because it matters for SEO and accessibility. If you leave it blank, the image misses its chance to be discovered and screen reader users cannot access it.</p>
<h3>Images slow the page down</h3>
<p>Resize and compress images before uploading, because large images affect speed and LCP the most.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Add ALT that conveys the real meaning of the image every time. Do not leave it blank and do not stuff keywords.</li>
  <li>Choose a ratio to match the image type (16:9 scenery, 4:3 general, 1:1 product/profile).</li>
  <li>Use a caption to give extra context every reader sees.</li>
  <li>Resize and compress images before uploading to keep speed and LCP good.</li>
  <li>Choose images with the important subject centered to reduce cropping it out.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The image block helps you place images in the theme with control over the important details. With BlogKub, you set the image URL, ALT that matters for SEO and accessibility, a caption below the image, and a 16:9, 4:3, or 1:1 ratio, and the system crops the image to fit for a tidy, consistent look. The key to using images well is always adding meaningful ALT, choosing a ratio to match the image type, and managing file size to keep speed. Do all of this and your images will be beautiful, follow SEO best practice, be accessibility-friendly, and not weigh the site down, which is the standard of a quality site.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Why does ALT matter?</summary><p>ALT (alternative text) matters for both SEO and accessibility, because it helps search engines understand what the image is (affecting image search) and lets screen reader users who cannot see it perceive the image content. Write ALT that conveys the real meaning of the image.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I choose the image ratio?</summary><p>Yes. You can choose 3 ratios: 16:9 (wide landscape, good for scenery/banners), 4:3 (standard), and 1:1 (square, good for product/profile images). The system crops the image to fit the chosen ratio for a tidy look.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I add a caption below the image?</summary><p>Yes. Add a caption to show below the image, to give context or describe it. Unlike ALT, every reader sees the caption, while ALT is alternative text for search engines and screen readers.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is the image block different from placing an image in a post?</summary><p>The image block is a theme element (such as on the homepage or a static page) whose ratio, ALT, and caption you set in BlogKub. Placing an image in a post inserts it into the article content straight from the Blogger editor. The two are used in different contexts.</p></details>
<details><summary>What image size should I use?</summary><p>Use an image sharp enough to be crisp but not larger than necessary. Compress the file appropriately before uploading to keep the page fast, because large images affect Core Web Vitals, especially LCP.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/image">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build recent and random posts (Recent &amp; Random Posts) in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/morefrom</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/morefrom</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a recent or random posts section to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, pulled from the feed automatically, filterable by label, with images, titles, and dates, to keep readers reading, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/morefrom.png" type="image/png" length="323769"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/morefrom.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/morefrom.png" alt="How to build recent and random posts (Recent & Random Posts) in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build recent and random posts (Recent & Random Posts) in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">When a reader finishes an article, the question is "what should I read next?" If you do not suggest one, they usually close the page. A recent or random posts section answers that question by offering another article to read on. This article teaches you how to add it to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, pulled from the feed automatically and filterable by label, plus settings and fixes.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Random/Latest by label</strong> block in BlogKub, choose <strong>recent</strong> or <strong>random</strong> mode, set the heading, count, columns, and label, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. The system <strong>pulls posts from the feed automatically</strong>, shows them as cards with an image, title, and date, filters out the current page, and updates itself every time you publish a new post.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/morefrom.png" aria-label="View the recent/random posts section at full size">
    <img alt="A recent posts section on a Blogger site showing post cards with image, title, and date, in three columns" title="The recent/random posts section" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/morefrom.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1520" data-original-height="590" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">Recent post cards with image, title, and date, pulled from the Blogger feed automatically and filterable by label.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What the recent/random section is, and what it helps</h2>
<p><strong>This section is a grid of post cards that pulls posts from your blog to display, letting you choose to show "recent posts" in chronological order or "random posts" shuffled.</strong> Place it wherever you want to prompt readers to read on, such as at the end of an article, the homepage, or before the footer.</p>
<p>The main value is <strong>extending the time readers spend on the site</strong> and raising the number of pages they read per visit. When readers finish and see an interesting card for another article, the chance they click to read on is much higher than closing the page. This is the same principle big content platforms use: "never leave a dead end, always offer the next thing".</p>

<h2>Pulled from the Blogger feed: updates itself automatically</h2>
<p>The strength of this feature is that it <strong>pulls data straight from your Blogger post feed</strong>. When the page loads, the system calls the feed to take posts' cover images, titles, and dates and build them into cards. The result is that this section <strong>updates itself every time you publish a new post</strong>, with no going back to edit the theme or add links yourself.</p>
<p>This is an advantage over a fixed post list that needs manual updates every time. The automatic system means your site looks alive and current always, with new posts appearing here immediately, while random mode also revives older posts that still have value so they get read again, making use of the content archive you have built.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the recent/random section, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the recent/random block.</strong> Open the left block library and drag the "Random/Latest by label" block into the spot you want, such as at the end of an article or on the homepage.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Choose the mode and settings.</strong> Choose "recent" or "random" mode, set the heading (such as "Latest posts"), the post count, the number of columns, and a label if you want to filter to a specific category.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Check the post display.</strong> Open the live site to confirm the cards show the image, title, and date completely, lay out in columns correctly, and do not repeat the current article in the list.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Recent mode vs random mode: how to choose</h2>
<p>The two modes have different strengths and suit different positions.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Recent mode:</strong> shows the newest posts by time, good for the homepage or a spot where you want readers to see the blog's latest activity, like "what's new", signaling your site is still active.</li>
  <li><strong>Random mode:</strong> shuffles posts on every load, good for the end of an article or a spot where you want to prompt discovery, helping good older posts get read and not be forgotten because they scrolled far away.</li>
</ul>
<p>The tip is you can use both in different positions, such as recent mode on the homepage to show freshness and random mode at the end of an article to invite exploring the archive. This mix presents both new and old content in balance.</p>

<h2>Filter by label: recommend to the right group</h2>
<p>Setting a label makes this section pull only posts in the category you specify. The clearest benefit is recommending posts in the "same category" the reader is interested in. For example, if they are reading a travel article, showing other travel articles is more on-target than a random draw from every category.</p>
<p>On-target recommendations significantly raise the chance of clicking to read on, because they fit the interest the reader already showed through the article they chose to read. This idea is similar to <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related posts</a> but more flexible in the choice of mode and label, so you can design content navigation to suit each position on the site.</p>

<h2>Not repeating the current article: an important detail</h2>
<p>A small detail that makes this feature genuinely usable is that the system <strong>filters out the current page automatically</strong>. Imagine a reader reading article A and the "latest posts" section at the bottom showing article A again. That would look unprofessional and useless. So the system checks the current page URL and removes it from the list, keeping every card another article the reader has not read on this page.</p>
<p>This kind of detail is what separates a "well thought-out" feature from one done casually. Caring about these edge cases makes the reader experience smooth without them even noticing, which is the goal of good design.</p>

<h2>Examples of use in different kinds of blog</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>News/update blogs:</strong> recent mode on the homepage to show new stories, letting readers see the latest activity at once.</li>
  <li><strong>How-to/knowledge blogs:</strong> random mode filtered by label at the end of an article, to invite reading same-category articles still useful even if old.</li>
  <li><strong>Travel/lifestyle blogs:</strong> show same-category posts with beautiful images, drawing readers on with visuals.</li>
  <li><strong>Review blogs:</strong> recommend other reviews in the same category to readers comparing options.</li>
</ul>

<h2>A note on speed</h2>
<p>Because this section pulls data from the feed on page load, set the post count sensibly, not more than necessary. Showing around 6 cards is usually just right. The images used are small thumbnails so they load fast, and the system uses lazy loading for card images, helping keep the impact on the first page load low.</p>
<p>As with other feed-pulling features, choosing appropriately sized cover images helps both this section and the overall page load faster. Good image management is therefore the key to a feature that is beautiful and not sluggish.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The post section does not show</h3>
<p>The system hides this section if it cannot pull posts. Check that the blog has published posts, and if you set a label, make sure there are actually posts in that category. A label with no posts has nothing to show.</p>
<h3>Cards have no image</h3>
<p>Cards use the post cover image. If a post has no cover image, that card may have no image. Add a cover image to every post so the cards look complete.</p>
<h3>Posts shown do not match the category</h3>
<p>Check that the label is set to match the actual label name used in the posts. It must be spelled the same to filter to the right category.</p>
<h3>Random mode repeats the same posts often</h3>
<p>Random mode shuffles from the set of posts pulled. If the blog has few posts, the variety is naturally limited. As you write more posts, the variety of the shuffle increases.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Use recent mode on the homepage to show freshness, and random mode at the end of an article to invite exploring the archive.</li>
  <li>Set a label to recommend same-category posts, raising relevance and clicks.</li>
  <li>Add a cover image to every post so cards look complete and attractive.</li>
  <li>Set a sensible post count to keep the page fast.</li>
  <li>Use it with <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related posts</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/bookmark">bookmarks</a> to raise the chance readers keep reading and return.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The recent/random posts section is a key tool for extending the time readers spend on the site and raising the number of articles they read per visit. With BlogKub, you just add the block, choose recent or random mode, set the heading, count, columns, and label, and Export it. The system pulls posts from the feed automatically, shows them as cards with an image, title, and date, filters out the current page, and updates itself every time you publish a new post. Placed in the right spot and filtered to the right group, this section helps both new and old content get read, and turns readers about to close the page into ones who stay and explore your site more.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Where do recent/random posts get their data?</summary><p>From your own Blogger post feed (feeds/posts/default), taking the cover image, title, and date to show as cards, so it updates automatically every time you publish a new post, with no manual editing.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is recent mode different from random mode?</summary><p>Recent mode shows the newest posts in chronological order, good for readers to see the latest activity, while random mode shuffles posts randomly, good for prompting the discovery of older posts that still have value, so old content keeps getting read.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I filter to specific categories?</summary><p>Yes. Set a label to pull only posts in that category, such as showing posts in the same category the reader is reading, to recommend related content more precisely.</p></details>
<details><summary>Will the current article show up again?</summary><p>No. The system filters out the current page automatically, so it does not show the article the reader is reading again, keeping the list to other articles the reader has not seen.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is this different from related posts?</summary><p>Recent/random emphasizes showing posts by time or at random (optionally filtered by label), while related posts emphasizes the content relationship to the current article. The two can be used together to raise the chance readers keep reading.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/morefrom">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add a Newsletter signup box in a Blogger blog</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/newsletter</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/newsletter</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a Newsletter signup box (subscribe to new posts) to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: set the heading, subtext, button, and background, connect an email service, build a base of regular readers, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/newsletter.png" type="image/png" length="338519"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/newsletter.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/newsletter.png" alt="How to add a Newsletter signup box in a Blogger blog" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add a Newsletter signup box in a Blogger blog</h1>
<p class="lead">Social media and search engines control who sees your content, but email is a channel you fully own. A Newsletter signup box helps turn passing readers into followers you can send new posts to directly. This article teaches you how to add one to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, along with connecting an email service and approaches that work.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Intermediate</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Newsletter</strong> block in BlogKub, set the heading, subtext, button text, and background (soft/gradient/dark), then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. You get a ready-to-use, good-looking signup box. Then <strong>connect the form to an external email service</strong> (such as FollowIt, Mailchimp, Google Form), because Blogger has no built-in email storage, and you can send new posts straight to followers.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/newsletter.png" aria-label="View the Newsletter signup box at full size">
    <img alt="A Newsletter signup box on a Blogger site with a heading, subtext, an email field, and a subscribe button" title="A Newsletter signup box" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/newsletter.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1600" data-original-height="464" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">An email signup box to subscribe to new posts, set the heading, subtext, button, and background, connected to an external email service.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>Why a Newsletter matters for a blog</h2>
<p><strong>A Newsletter is where readers give their email to receive new posts or news from you through their inbox.</strong> The core value is in the phrase "owning the channel". When people follow you on social media, whether they see your posts depends on an algorithm you do not control, just like search traffic that rises and falls with rankings. But an email list is yours. When you have a new post, you can send it straight to everyone on the list.</p>
<p>This is why professional creators and bloggers put great importance on building an email list, because it is a long-term asset that does not disappear even when other platforms change the rules. Email followers also tend to be engaged and returning readers, because they deliberately signed up to receive your content specifically.</p>

<h2>Something to understand: Blogger does not store emails itself</h2>
<p>The key thing to understand first is that <strong>Blogger is a purely reader-side site with no backend for storing emails</strong>. So BlogKub's Newsletter box serves as a "ready-to-use, good-looking form", while the actual receiving, storing, and sending of emails relies on an external email service you connect.</p>
<p>This is not a strange limitation but the standard way of the web at large. Specialized email services do this far better, including managing lists, sending bulk emails without landing in the spam folder, handling unsubscribes, and complying with privacy law. BlogKub's job is to provide a beautiful form that fits the theme, and leave the rest to a specialized service.</p>
<div class="note">Popular services to use with Blogger include FollowIt (free, easy to connect to the feed), Mailchimp, MailerLite, or even Google Form for a simple start. Choose based on your needs and budget.</div>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the Newsletter box step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the Newsletter block.</strong> Open the left block library and drag the "Newsletter" block into the position you want, such as at the end of an article, the homepage, or before the footer.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Set the heading, subtext, button, and background.</strong> Type an inviting heading (such as "Get the news first"), subtext stating the benefit, button text, and choose a soft, gradient, or dark background to match your site's tone.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Connect an email service.</strong> Take the form code or action URL from the email service you use and connect it to the form, so the emails readers enter are sent to that system.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and test.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then test subscribing with a real email, confirming the email lands in the list of the service you connected.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Choose a background and write an effective invitation</h2>
<p>The Newsletter box has 3 backgrounds to choose from, each with a different feel. The "soft" one blends seamlessly into the page, ideal when you do not want the box to stand out over the content. The "gradient" one is bright and eye-catching, ideal for drawing attention. And the "dark" one looks premium and contrasts with a light page, ideal for creating a focal point. Choose based on the placement and tone of your site.</p>
<p>Just as important is the invitation. People give their email only when they see a clear benefit. Instead of writing just "Subscribe to news", try being specific about what they get, such as "Get new posts every week, plus tips not published on the site" or "Free, no spam, unsubscribe anytime". Stating the benefit and reducing spam worry genuinely raises the signup rate.</p>

<h2>Where to place the Newsletter box</h2>
<p>Placement affects the number of signups a lot. The spots that work well are usually the moments when a reader feels the value.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>End of the article:</strong> readers who finished are the ones who like your content most, a golden moment to invite them to follow.</li>
  <li><strong>Homepage:</strong> place it in a visible spot to catch readers exploring the site, ideal for blogs with heavy homepage traffic.</li>
  <li><strong>Before the footer:</strong> a standard spot readers expect to find, unobtrusive to reading but still visible.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can place it in more than one spot, but be careful not to make it so frequent it becomes annoying. Having a box at the end of the article plus one near the footer is often just right. Experiment to see which placement works best for your readers.</p>

<h2>The Newsletter and building a stable reader base</h2>
<p>In terms of long-term growth, a Newsletter is one of the highest-return tools, because it changes your relationship with readers from "found by chance" to "deliberately following". Every time you send a new post, you bring followers back to the site directly, which is stable traffic not dependent on external factors.</p>
<p>Used together with features that encourage returning and reading on, such as <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/bookmark">bookmarks</a> to save for later and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/morefrom">latest/random posts</a> to invite exploring content, the Newsletter is another layer that binds readers to your site. Accumulating an email list from day one is therefore a worthwhile investment. Even if signups are few at first, it grows and compounds over time.</p>

<h2>Privacy and doing it right</h2>
<p>Collecting emails is collecting personal data, so it comes with responsibility. You should tell subscribers clearly what you will use their email for, how often you send, and that there is a way to unsubscribe anytime. These should be consistent with your site's <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cookie">privacy policy</a> and relevant law, such as PDPA in Thailand.</p>
<p>The good news is that most good email services have tools to help, including automatic unsubscribe links in every email, consent management, and signup record keeping. Choosing a trustworthy service helps you run a Newsletter correctly without managing everything yourself. And importantly, do not send emails too frequently or send content readers did not sign up for, because that makes people unsubscribe and lose trust.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>Entering an email does nothing</h3>
<p>Check that you connected the form to an email service, because an empty, unconnected box stores emails nowhere. Test with a real email and see that it enters the list of the connected service.</p>
<h3>The confirmation email lands in the spam folder</h3>
<p>This is normal for automated email. Good email services have settings (such as SPF/DKIM) to reduce this. We recommend telling subscribers to check the spam folder and move your email to the primary inbox.</p>
<h3>The box does not fit the site</h3>
<p>Try changing the background to another option (soft/gradient/dark) and adjusting the text to match the site's tone. The box already uses the theme's colors, so it blends when you choose a suitable background.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Connect the box to a trustworthy email service before publishing, do not leave an unconnected box.</li>
  <li>Write an invitation that states a clear benefit and reduces spam worry.</li>
  <li>Place the box at the end of the article and near the footer, the moments when readers feel the value.</li>
  <li>Respect privacy, provide a way to unsubscribe, and send emails only as needed.</li>
  <li>Use it together with <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related articles</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/share">share buttons</a> to widen reach and increase the chance of new followers.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The Newsletter signup box is one of a blog's most important tools for building a long-term asset, because an email list is a channel you own, not dependent on external algorithms. With BlogKub you just add the Newsletter block, set the heading, subtext, button, and background, and Export it to use, then connect the form to the email service you choose, because Blogger has no built-in email storage. Placed well, written with a benefit-stating invitation, and respecting subscribers' privacy, a Newsletter turns passing readers into regular followers you can bring back whenever you have a new post, which is the foundation of a blog that grows steadily.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Does the Newsletter box store emails itself?</summary><p>BlogKub's Newsletter box is a ready-to-use, good-looking form, but the collecting and sending of emails needs to connect to an external email service such as FollowIt, Mailchimp, or Google Form, because Blogger is a purely reader-side site with no built-in email storage backend.</p></details>
<details><summary>How much can I customize the box's appearance?</summary><p>You can adjust the heading, subtext, button text, and choose from 3 backgrounds: soft, gradient, and dark, so the box fits your site's tone and stands out as you want.</p></details>
<details><summary>Why should a blog have a Newsletter?</summary><p>Because email is a channel you own, not dependent on social or search algorithms. When you have a new post, you can reach followers directly, helping bring people back to read again and building a stable base of regular readers.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do I need to collect emails per privacy law?</summary><p>You should. Collecting emails is collecting personal data, so tell subscribers what you will use it for, provide a way to unsubscribe, and comply with your privacy policy and relevant law. Most email services have tools to help with this.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is a Newsletter different from following via RSS?</summary><p>RSS lets readers follow through a feed reader, while a Newsletter sends posts straight to the email inbox, which people open more often, so it reaches general readers more widely. The two can be used together to serve different reader groups.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/newsletter">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a Post Grid (homepage post cards) in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/postgrid</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/postgrid</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to set up a Post Grid in a Blogger theme with BlogKub: show post cards from the feed automatically, adjust the column count, image, excerpt, read more button, corner radius, and card style (shadow/border/flat), plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/postgrid.png" type="image/png" length="319233"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/postgrid.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/postgrid.png" alt="How to build a Post Grid (homepage post cards) in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a Post Grid (homepage post cards) in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">The post grid is the heart of the homepage, the place readers see your posts laid out as attractive cards and choose what to click. This article teaches you how to set up a Post Grid in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, one that pulls posts from the feed automatically, adjusting the column count, image, excerpt, read more button, corner radius, and card style.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> the <strong>Post Grid</strong> block in BlogKub <strong>pulls posts from the feed automatically</strong>, showing them as cards with an image, title, excerpt, and date. You can adjust the <strong>column count (2 to 4), image, excerpt, read more button, card corner radius</strong>, and <strong>style (shadow/border/flat)</strong>. It is responsive automatically, then you Export it to use.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/postgrid.png" aria-label="View the Post Grid homepage post cards at full size">
    <img alt="A Post Grid in a Blogger theme showing post cards in three columns with an image, title, excerpt, and read more button" title="A Post Grid of homepage post cards" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/postgrid.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1800" data-original-height="756" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A post grid showing cards from the feed automatically, adjust the columns, image, excerpt, read more button, corner radius, and card style.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a post grid is, and why it matters</h2>
<p><strong>A Post Grid is a section that shows the blog's posts as cards in a grid layout, usually on the homepage below the Hero.</strong> It is where readers explore content and decide which post to read. Each card has a cover image, title, excerpt, and date, so readers get an overview of a post before clicking.</p>
<p>The post grid matters because it is the "gateway" to your content. If the cards look interesting and are well laid out, readers want to click in. But if they are cluttered or dull, readers may scroll past. Designing the post grid to be attractive therefore has a direct effect on how many posts get read and on reader engagement.</p>

<h2>Pulls from the feed automatically: cards that update themselves</h2>
<p>BlogKub's post grid <strong>pulls posts directly from the Blogger feed</strong>, which means that when you publish a new post, it appears in the grid automatically. You do not have to add cards or links one by one. The system takes each post's cover image, title, excerpt, and date to build the card for you.</p>
<p>This is the advantage of working with the feed. Your site always looks alive and current. The latest post reaches the homepage the moment you publish it, unlike a fixed post list you have to update by hand every time. Using the feed lets your homepage take care of itself while you focus on writing content.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to set up the post grid step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add or select the Post Grid block.</strong> Most templates include a Post Grid on the homepage. Select that block to edit, or add it yourself.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Set the heading, columns, and count.</strong> Enter a section heading (such as "Latest posts"), choose the column count (2 to 4) and the number of posts to show.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Adjust image, excerpt, and card style.</strong> Toggle the image and excerpt, set the read more button text (leave blank to hide), adjust the card corner radius, and choose a style between shadow, border, or flat.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and check the result.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then check the cards display correctly and are responsive on both desktop and mobile.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Adjust the column count and card style to fit the site</h2>
<p>The flexibility of the Post Grid lies in adjusting the card look to fit your design and site type.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Column count (2 to 4):</strong> fewer columns (2) make the cards large and prominent, ideal for blogs where images matter. More columns (4) show more posts in one space, ideal for content-heavy sites.</li>
  <li><strong>Card style:</strong> <em>shadow</em> gives a floating, modern feel; <em>border</em> gives a clean, clear look; <em>flat</em> gives a minimal simplicity. Choose to match your site's tone.</li>
  <li><strong>Card corner radius:</strong> adjust the roundness of the corners. More rounded looks soft and friendly, squarer looks serious and formal.</li>
  <li><strong>Image, excerpt, read more button:</strong> toggle as you like. An image-focused blog might feature a prominent image, while a text blog might emphasize the title and excerpt.</li>
</ul>
<p>These adjustments help the post grid become part of your site's identity, not just a standard list that looks the same on every site. Try adjusting until you get a look that fits your brand and appeals most to your readers.</p>

<h2>The importance of the cover image and excerpt</h2>
<p>Because the card uses the cover image and excerpt from the post, these elements directly affect its appeal. A beautiful, meaningful cover image makes the card clickable, while a well-written excerpt tells readers what the post is about and why to read it. Paying attention to these two elements in every post helps the whole post grid look good and work well.</p>
<p>In practice, use a cover image of suitable size and proportions, and write a concise but enticing excerpt. If a post has no cover image, its card may look emptier than the others. Having an image on every post helps the grid look consistent and professional. Besides, good images and excerpts also affect sharing on social media, because they are often used as the preview image and text.</p>

<h2>The post grid in a complete homepage system</h2>
<p>The post grid works best as part of a homepage designed systematically. Generally a good homepage has a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/hero">Hero</a> welcoming at the top, followed by the post grid showing content, and perhaps other supporting sections. This ordering leads readers from the welcome to the content naturally.</p>
<p>Used together with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sidebar">sidebar</a> that helps navigate by category and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/readtime">read time</a> shown on the cards, the post grid becomes a complete content discovery hub. Readers see the posts, know how long each takes to read, and easily choose based on interest, all of which increases the number of posts read per visit.</p>

<h2>The post grid and site speed</h2>
<p>Because the post grid pulls data from the feed and shows several images, the number of posts and image size affect homepage speed. Setting a reasonable number of posts (such as 6 to 9) balances showing enough content with keeping speed. The images in the cards are thumbnails and the system uses lazy loading in many cases, so it does not affect the first page open much.</p>
<p>What really matters is the file size of each post's cover image. If the image is very large, even when shown small in the card, the full file still has to download. Uploading cover images that are suitably resized and compressed helps both the post grid and the overall page load fast, which is good for both readers and Core Web Vitals scores, especially LCP, which is often affected by large images near the top of the page.</p>

<h2>The post grid across different kinds of sites</h2>
<p>The post grid adapts to almost any kind of site. Travel and food blogs where images are the star might use fewer columns for large cards showing beautiful images. News or knowledge blogs with many posts might use more columns to show more posts. Minimal blogs might choose a flat or border card style for clean simplicity. This flexibility makes the post grid an element that fits every site's identity.</p>
<p>Choosing settings that suit your site type helps the homepage communicate its identity at first glance. A reader entering a food blog and seeing large cards full of appetizing food images feels different from seeing a plain text list. Paying attention to adjusting the post grid to fit the content is therefore part of building an experience consistent with your brand.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The post grid does not show</h3>
<p>Check that the blog has published posts, because the grid pulls from the feed. If there are no posts yet, there are no cards to show. And check that you added/selected the block and Exported again.</p>
<h3>The cards have no image</h3>
<p>The cards use the post cover image. If a post has no cover image, its card has no image. We recommend adding a cover image to every post so the grid looks consistent.</p>
<h3>The cards are too narrow on mobile</h3>
<p>The system already reduces the column count on mobile. If it still feels narrow, try reducing the column count on desktop or check the display on a real screen.</p>
<h3>You want to show only certain categories</h3>
<p>The main post grid usually shows all latest posts. If you want to show only a category, consider using the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/morefrom">latest/random posts</a> section, which can filter by label, alongside it.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Add a good cover image and excerpt to every post, because the cards use these elements directly.</li>
  <li>Choose the column count and card style to fit your site type and how much images matter.</li>
  <li>Set a reasonable number of posts to keep speed and avoid an overly long homepage.</li>
  <li>Arrange the post grid as part of a homepage with a Hero and other elements systematically.</li>
  <li>Test the display on both desktop and mobile before publishing.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The post grid is the content discovery hub on the homepage, where readers choose which post to read. With BlogKub you can set up the Post Grid fully with no coding. The system pulls posts from the feed automatically and shows them as cards with an image, title, excerpt, and date. You can adjust the column count, card style, corner radius, and the toggling of various elements, and it is responsive automatically. When you attend to the cover image and excerpt of every post and arrange the grid as part of a systematic homepage, your post grid draws readers to click into several posts, which raises engagement and helps your content get read more.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Where does the Post Grid pull its data from?</summary><p>It pulls from your own Blogger post feed, taking the cover image, title, excerpt, and date to display as cards, so it updates automatically each time you publish a new post, with no need to add links yourself.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I adjust the column count and card style?</summary><p>Yes. You can choose 2 to 4 columns, adjust the card corner radius, and pick from 3 styles: shadow, border, and flat. You can also toggle the image, excerpt, and read more button as you like.</p></details>
<details><summary>Is the Post Grid responsive on mobile?</summary><p>Yes, it is responsive. On mobile the column count reduces automatically so the cards are not too narrow to read. The cards display nicely and are easy to read on both desktop and mobile with no separate setup.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is the Post Grid different from latest/random posts?</summary><p>The Post Grid is the homepage's main post section with detailed card customization (columns, style, excerpt, button), while latest/random posts is a supplementary section usually placed at the end of an article or elsewhere to invite reading on. Both pull from the feed alike.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the Post Grid help SEO?</summary><p>It helps indirectly. Showing posts as attractive cards helps readers click into several posts, increasing engagement and internal linking, which are good signals for navigation and overall SEO.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/postgrid">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a Post List (horizontal list) in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/postlist</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/postlist</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to set up a Post List in a Blogger theme with BlogKub: show posts as a horizontal list with a small image and a title, pulled from the feed automatically, set the heading, count, and toggle the image, ideal for narrow spaces, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/postlist.png" type="image/png" length="315514"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/postlist.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/postlist.png" alt="How to build a Post List (horizontal list) in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a Post List (horizontal list) in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">Sometimes large cards waste too much space. When you want to show several posts compactly, a Post List is the answer. It shows posts as horizontal rows with a small image and a title. This article teaches you how to set it up in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, one that pulls from the feed automatically, letting you set the count and toggle the image.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> the <strong>Post List</strong> block in BlogKub shows posts as a <strong>horizontal list</strong> with a small image and a title, <strong>pulled from the feed automatically</strong>. You can set the <strong>section heading, post count</strong>, and <strong>toggle the image</strong>. It suits narrow spaces or when you want to show many posts vertically and compactly. It is responsive, then you Export it to use.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/postlist.png" aria-label="View the Post List horizontal list at full size">
    <img alt="A Post List in a Blogger theme showing posts as horizontal rows with a small image and a title" title="A Post List horizontal list" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/postlist.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1240" data-original-height="824" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A post list of horizontal rows with a small image and a title, compact, ideal for narrow spaces, pulled from the feed automatically.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a Post List is, and how it differs from a Post Grid</h2>
<p><strong>A Post List shows posts as rows stacked vertically, each row with a small image and a title laid out horizontally.</strong> Unlike a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/postgrid">Post Grid</a> that shows cards in a grid emphasizing large images, a list uses vertical space compactly, so it can show many posts in a limited space while readers can still scan titles quickly.</p>
<p>This difference makes the two suit different situations. A Post Grid suits the main post section on the homepage that emphasizes image beauty, while a Post List suits narrow spaces like a sidebar, or a section where you want to show many posts without taking much space, such as a popular or latest posts list. Choosing the right one for the context helps the page have rhythm and use space efficiently.</p>

<h2>Pulls from the feed automatically like the other sections</h2>
<p>Like the Post Grid and the latest posts section, the Post List <strong>pulls data directly from the Blogger feed</strong>. The system takes each post's title, image, and date to display as list rows. The result is that the list updates itself every time you publish a new post, with no need to add or edit anything yourself.</p>
<p>Working with the feed is the same principle throughout BlogKub, which makes the various post sections take care of themselves. So you can be sure the Post List always shows the latest content while you focus on writing. The consistency of this approach also makes the features easy to understand and use, because they work alike.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to set up the Post List step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add or select the Post List block.</strong> Select the "Post List" block in the template, or drag it into the position you want, such as a sidebar or a supporting section.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Set the heading and count.</strong> Enter a section heading (such as "Popular posts") and choose the number of posts to show in the list.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Toggle the image.</strong> Choose whether to show a small image in front of each item. Turning off the image makes the list compact and title-focused.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and check the result.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then check the list displays correctly and is easy to read on both desktop and mobile.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Turn the image on or off: choose by space and goal</h2>
<p>The image toggle is a decision that affects the list's look and compactness. When the <strong>image is on</strong>, each item has a small image in front of the title, helping draw the eye and provide illustration, ideal when you have enough space and want the list to be interesting. When the <strong>image is off</strong>, the list is just titles and dates, very compact, showing many posts in little space, ideal for a narrow sidebar or a long list.</p>
<p>The choice depends on the goal. If you want readers to scan many titles quickly, turning off the image lets them see more posts on one screen. But if you want to attract with images, turning it on is more interesting. Try both in the spot where you will place the list, and choose the one that best fits your space and readers.</p>

<h2>The Post List in the site's navigation system</h2>
<p>A Post List often serves as a supporting section that aids content discovery. Placed in a sidebar to show popular or latest posts, it helps a reader who is reading one article see other posts and click to read on. This increases the chance for readers to explore the site more, which lengthens their time on the site.</p>
<p>Used together with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sidebar">sidebar</a> that places the list beside the content, and other read-on elements such as <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related articles</a>, the Post List is another layer of the system that always gives readers a reading option. Designing every point of the site to offer other posts is a key strategy for retaining readers and increasing the number of posts read.</p>

<h2>The Post List and designing the page's rhythm</h2>
<p>A good web page has a varied "rhythm" of presentation, not large cards stacked down the whole page. Mixing post display formats keeps the page from being dull and uses space appropriately. For example, use a large-card post grid for the latest posts you want to emphasize, then use a compact post list for a "Popular posts" or "Read more" section that does not need much space.</p>
<p>Alternating between large cards and compact lists creates visual variety that makes the page look designed, not just repeated content placement. The Post List is therefore a tool that lets you control the rhythm and information density in each section of the page, making the page both beautiful and space-efficient.</p>

<h2>The Post List on mobile</h2>
<p>A Post List has a special advantage on mobile, because the horizontal format with a small image on one side and a title on the other fits a narrow screen well. Unlike large cards that take a lot of height and require much scrolling, a row-based list lets mobile readers see several posts with few scrolls, which suits mobile scanning behavior where readers often scroll fast.</p>
<p>Since most readers come from mobile, having a compact post list in some parts of the page improves the mobile experience. The system already adjusts the display to suit small screens, so you can be sure the list reads easily on every device. Choosing to use a list in suitable spots is therefore a design that considers mobile readers from the start.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The Post List does not show</h3>
<p>Check that the blog has published posts, because the list pulls from the feed, and check that you added/selected the block and Exported again.</p>
<h3>The image in the list does not appear</h3>
<p>The list uses the post cover image. If a post has no image, its row has no image. Add a cover image to every post, or turn off the image for consistency.</p>
<h3>The list is too long</h3>
<p>Reduce the number of posts shown to fit the space, especially in a sidebar that should not be so long it pushes other content down.</p>
<h3>You want large-image cards instead</h3>
<p>If you want to emphasize images and large cards, use a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/postgrid">Post Grid</a> instead, which is designed specifically for a card display.</p>

<h2>Examples of using the Post List in different kinds of blogs</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>News/update blogs:</strong> a compact list of headlines in a sidebar, letting readers scan several latest news items quickly, ideal for content people want to update on fast.</li>
  <li><strong>Knowledge/how-to blogs:</strong> a "Popular posts" or "Read on" list at the end of an article or in a sidebar, recommending more content without taking much space.</li>
  <li><strong>Review blogs:</strong> a row list of other reviews in the same category, letting comparing readers see several options in one space.</li>
  <li><strong>Content-heavy sites:</strong> an image-off list to show many titles compactly, ideal for an article index or a topic roundup page.</li>
</ul>
<p>The common thread in every case is that a Post List helps show "many posts in little space", which complements the main post section and helps readers discover more content without making the page too long.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Use a Post List in narrow spaces or when you want to show many posts compactly.</li>
  <li>Turn the image on when you have space and want to attract, off when you want compactness.</li>
  <li>Set the number of posts to fit the space, not so long it pushes other content down.</li>
  <li>Add a cover image and a clear title to every post so the list looks good.</li>
  <li>Use it alongside a Post Grid and a sidebar for a complete content display system.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>A Post List is a compact way to show posts, suited to narrow spaces and showing many posts vertically. With BlogKub you can set up the Post List easily with no coding. The system pulls posts from the feed automatically and shows them as list rows with a small image and a title. You can set the section heading, post count, and toggle the image by space and goal, and it is responsive. When you use it in the right context, such as placing it in a sidebar to show popular posts, the Post List helps readers discover and read more posts, which supports your site's navigation and reader retention.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>How is a Post List different from a Post Grid?</summary><p>A Post List shows posts as horizontal rows with a small image and a title, using compact vertical space, while a Post Grid shows cards in a grid emphasizing large images. A list suits narrow spaces or when you want to show many posts vertically.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where does the Post List pull its data from?</summary><p>It pulls from your own Blogger post feed, taking the title, image, and date to display, so it updates automatically each time you publish a new post, with no need to add anything yourself.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I turn off the image in the list?</summary><p>Yes. You can toggle the small image in front of each item. Turning off the image makes the list compact and title-focused, ideal when you want to show many posts in a limited space.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where is a Post List good for?</summary><p>It suits a sidebar, a narrow space, or a section where you want to show many posts vertically, such as a popular or latest posts list, letting readers scan titles quickly.</p></details>
<details><summary>Is the Post List responsive?</summary><p>Yes, it is responsive. The list adjusts its display to suit small screens automatically, arranging the title and image for easy reading, so it works well on both desktop and mobile.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/postlist">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a Pros/Cons box + review score (Verdict) in Blogger articles</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/proscons</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/proscons</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a Pros/Cons box and a review verdict box (score + stars) to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, ideal for review articles, placed in the post with the .bk-pc / .bk-verdict classes, plus how to use it and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/proscons.png" type="image/png" length="340935"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/proscons.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/proscons.png" alt="How to build a Pros/Cons box + review score (Verdict) in Blogger articles" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a Pros/Cons box + review score (Verdict) in Blogger articles</h1>
<p class="lead">A good review article needs a spot where the reader sees the overview at a glance. The pros/cons box and the summary score box are the heart of that. This article teaches you how to add Pros/Cons and Verdict boxes to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, which lay out two columns with icons and stars automatically, ideal for any kind of review blog, plus how to use them and fixes.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Pros/Cons + review score</strong> block in BlogKub, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. In the post (HTML view) place a <code>&lt;div class="bk-pc"&gt;</code> for pros (bk-pros) and cons (bk-cons), and a <code>&lt;div class="bk-verdict"&gt;</code> for the summary score with stars. The system lays out two columns, check/cross icons, and stacks to a single column on mobile automatically.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/proscons.png" aria-label="View the Pros/Cons and review verdict boxes at full size">
    <img alt="A pros box (green), cons box (red), and a review verdict box scoring 4.5 with stars, in a Blogger review article" title="The Pros/Cons and review verdict boxes" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/proscons.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1440" data-original-height="786" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">Two-column pros/cons boxes with check/cross icons, and a summary score box with stars, ideal for review articles.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>Why a review article needs a summary box</h2>
<p><strong>Most review readers are "deciding", not just seeking knowledge.</strong> They want to know quickly what is good, what is bad, and whether to buy in the end. A common behavior is scrolling to find the summary box or score before reading all the details. The Pros/Cons and Verdict boxes answer this directly, summarizing the key points at a glance.</p>
<p>These boxes also make your article look professional like top review sites. Part of a review's credibility comes from a systematic presentation. When readers see clearly organized pros and cons and a reasoned summary score, they feel the review was considered thoroughly, not just an offhand opinion.</p>

<h2>Two parts: Pros/Cons and Verdict</h2>
<p>This feature gives two kinds of box that work together in a review article.</p>
<h3>The Pros/Cons box</h3>
<p>Two columns side by side. The left is "pros", a green background with a check icon. The right is "cons", a red background with a cross icon. Each column can hold several items, and the system adds an icon before each line automatically, so readers compare pros and cons in a single view.</p>
<h3>The Verdict box</h3>
<p>A horizontal box showing a large numeric score on the left (such as 4.5), a summary heading (such as "Excellent"), a row of gold stars, and a short summary about the product. This box is ideal as the closing summary of a review, giving readers a clear final verdict.</p>
<div class="note">Tip: place the Pros/Cons box first, then the Verdict box, so readers see the pros and cons first and then get the summary verdict, a natural reading order for a review.</div>

<h2 id="step1">How to add and use the Pros/Cons + Verdict boxes, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the Pros/Cons block.</strong> Open the left block library, category "Article &amp; UX", and drag the "Pros/Cons + review score" block in to embed the review box styles in the theme.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Place the boxes in the review post.</strong> In HTML view, place the pros/cons box with a <code>&lt;div class="bk-pc"&gt;</code> containing a <code>&lt;div class="bk-pros"&gt;</code> and a <code>&lt;div class="bk-cons"&gt;</code> inside, each with a heading and a ul/li list, and place the score box with a <code>&lt;div class="bk-verdict"&gt;</code>.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Check the display.</strong> Open the live article to confirm the pros box (green), cons box (red) with check/cross icons, and the score box with stars display correctly on both desktop and mobile.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Design that aids comparison</h2>
<p>The detail that makes the Pros/Cons box work well is using color and icons that convey meaning immediately. Green with a check says "this is a pro", red with a cross says "this is a con". Readers understand without even reading the heading. Placing two columns side by side also lets the eye sweep and compare easily, unlike writing pros and cons mixed into a long paragraph.</p>
<p>The check/cross icons in the box are SVG embedded in the theme's style, not loaded images, so they display sharply at any resolution and do not affect speed, like the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/callout">Callout box</a> that uses the same approach, keeping your whole site's element style consistent and light.</p>

<h2>The score box and clarity of the verdict</h2>
<p>The large numeric score in the Verdict box acts as an "eye-rest" that gives the fastest answer in the article. A reader in a hurry may look at just the score and stars to decide, while a thorough reader reads the accompanying summary to understand the reasons. Having the number, stars, and explanation in one box therefore serves both kinds of reader.</p>
<p>What matters is scoring reasonably and consistently with the content. If you write several cons but give a full score, readers feel the review is insincere. Conversely, a score reasonable against the pros and cons presented reinforces credibility, which is the heart of a sustainable review blog.</p>

<h2>On schema: do it correctly</h2>
<p>Many people want reviews to show stars in Google results, which requires Review/Rating schema. BlogKub's Pros/Cons and Verdict boxes focus mainly on <strong>formatting content for easy, attractive reading</strong>. If you want full review schema, use BlogKub's review template designed for this, or add schema in the post based on real data.</p>
<p>An important caution is that Google has strict policies on Review schema. Add it only when it is a genuine review of your own and matches the displayed content. Adding score schema that does not match the content may be seen as violating the guidelines and do more harm than good. Correctness and honesty come first always. When done right, the good reader experience from these boxes already has a positive effect on <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo">being cited by AI and Google</a>.</p>

<h2>Examples of using it in different kinds of review blog</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Tech product reviews:</strong> pros and cons of specs and real use, with an overall score readers look for.</li>
  <li><strong>Restaurant/cafe reviews:</strong> pros for taste and atmosphere, cons for price or parking, with a summary score.</li>
  <li><strong>Stay/hotel reviews:</strong> pros for the view and service, cons for the travel, helping readers decide to book.</li>
  <li><strong>Course/book/app reviews:</strong> pros and cons of content and value, with a verdict on who it suits.</li>
</ul>
<p>Whatever the review, the "pros, cons, verdict" structure is a formula readers are familiar with and expect. These boxes help you present that formula attractively and consistently in every article.</p>

<h2>Balance is the heart of a credible review</h2>
<p>What separates a review people trust from one that looks like an ad is "balance". A review full of pros with no cons at all makes readers doubt how sincere it is. The Pros/Cons box forces you to think about both sides systematically, a good habit for a reviewer. Daring to state cons honestly, even small ones, actually raises credibility, because it shows you assessed impartially.</p>
<p>In the long term, this honesty is what builds a loyal reader base. A reader who feels your review genuinely helps them decide, not just pushes them to buy, comes back for your next review and recommends it. The Pros/Cons box is therefore not just a visual element, but a tool that encourages ethical reviewing, the foundation of a review blog that grows sustainably.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The boxes have no color or icons</h3>
<p>Check that you added the Pros/Cons block and Exported again, and use the correct class names (bk-pc, bk-pros, bk-cons, bk-verdict) written in the post's HTML view.</p>
<h3>The two columns do not sit side by side</h3>
<p>Check that the bk-pros and bk-cons boxes are inside the same bk-pc. On mobile the boxes stack into a single column by design for easy reading, which is normal.</p>
<h3>Stars or score do not show</h3>
<p>The score, stars, and summary are text you write in the bk-verdict box. Check that you included the full structure per the example, with no odd formatting tags mixed in from the compose view.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Place the Pros/Cons box first, then the Verdict box, for a natural reading order.</li>
  <li>Score consistently with the pros and cons presented, to keep credibility.</li>
  <li>Write pros and cons concisely as items, so they are easy to scan.</li>
  <li>Add Review schema only when it is a genuine review matching the content, per Google's guidelines.</li>
  <li>Pair with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/callout">Callout box</a> and an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/faq">FAQ box</a> to make review articles complete and easy to read.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The Pros/Cons and Verdict boxes are key elements that make your review articles answer the needs of deciding readers. With BlogKub, you just add the block and Export it, then place the boxes with the bk-pc class for pros and cons and bk-verdict for the summary score. The system lays out two columns, adds check/cross icons, shows the score and stars, and stacks to a single column on mobile automatically. Presented sincerely and consistently with the content, these boxes make your reviews look professional, credible, and help readers decide with confidence.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>How do I use the Pros/Cons box?</summary><p>In the post's HTML view, place a &lt;div class='bk-pc'&gt; with two inner boxes: pros (bk-pros) and cons (bk-cons). Put items in each as a ul/li, and the system adds check/cross icons and lays out two columns automatically.</p></details>
<details><summary>What is in the review verdict box?</summary><p>The Verdict box shows a large numeric score, a summary heading (such as Excellent), a row of stars, and a short summary about the product. Place it with a &lt;div class='bk-verdict'&gt;, ideal as the closing summary of a review.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do the review boxes become a single column on mobile?</summary><p>Yes. On small screens the pros/cons boxes stack into a single column automatically for easy reading, without being squeezed too narrow.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does this box create Review schema automatically?</summary><p>The Pros/Cons and Verdict boxes are content formatting for easy, attractive reading. If you want full Review/Rating schema, use BlogKub's review template, or add schema in the post based on real data, for correctness.</p></details>
<details><summary>What do Pros/Cons boxes help with in a review article?</summary><p>They summarize the pros and cons so a reader who is deciding sees the overview quickly. Many people scroll to find the summary box before reading everything, so a clear box raises satisfaction and helps the decision.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/proscons">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add reading time on cards and articles in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/readtime</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/readtime</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add reading time &apos;⏱ X min&apos; on homepage cards and in articles of a Blogger theme with BlogKub: calculated automatically from the content, supports Thai, pulled via the feed and cached 12 hours, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/readtime.png" type="image/png" length="325317"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/readtime.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/readtime.png" alt="How to add reading time on cards and articles in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add reading time on cards and articles in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">The small "⏱ 5 min read" badge we see on leading sites is more powerful than you might think. It lets readers instantly decide whether to read now or save for later. This article teaches you how to add reading time to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, calculated automatically, supporting Thai, and displayable on both cards and in articles.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Reading time</strong> block in BlogKub, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. The system shows <strong>"⏱ X min"</strong> on the article page, and (if enabled) on homepage cards too, <strong>calculated automatically from the content and supporting Thai</strong>. On cards it pulls the content via the feed to calculate and <strong>caches it for 12 hours</strong> so it does not re-fetch often.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/readtime.png" aria-label="View reading time on cards and articles at full size">
    <img alt="Reading time ⏱ X min shown on an article card and in the meta section of a Blogger article" title="Reading time on cards and articles" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/readtime.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1440" data-original-height="858" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">The ⏱ X min badge shown both on homepage cards and in the article, calculated automatically from the content, supporting Thai.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What reading time is, and why it is valuable</h2>
<p><strong>Reading time is an estimate of how long an article takes to read, usually shown as "X min" with a clock icon.</strong> This number helps readers predict how much time it takes, which affects the decision to start reading now or save for later.</p>
<p>The real value is "reducing uncertainty". Readers hesitate less when they know how much time to invest. An article that says "3 min read" looks approachable and easier to click than one that says nothing, while a long article that says "12 min read" sets the right expectation, so ready readers can prepare, and busy ones save it for later instead of opening and quitting midway.</p>

<h2>The challenge: calculating Thai reading time correctly</h2>
<p>A typical reading time calculation counts the number of words and divides by an average reading speed (about 200 words per minute). This works well for English with clear spaces between words, but <strong>Thai has no spaces between words</strong>, so counting words by spaces gives a badly wrong result. A long Thai article might be counted as just a few words, making the reading time abnormally low.</p>
<p>BlogKub solves this by <strong>approximating the Thai word count from the character count</strong>, alongside counting English words as usual, so an all-Thai, Thai-English mixed, or all-English article all get a reasonable reading time. This is a very important detail for Thai blogs, because if the reading time is off, the badge is useless or, worse, misleads readers.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add reading time step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the reading time block.</strong> Open the left block library and drag the "Reading time" block into the page.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Choose whether to calculate on cards.</strong> Turn on the option to calculate reading time on homepage cards (the system pulls content via the feed to calculate, cached 12 hours) or turn it off if you want it only on article pages.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Check the time display.</strong> Open the homepage and an article page, confirm the "⏱ X min" badge shows in the right place (on cards and in the article meta) and the number is reasonable for the content length.</li>
</ol>

<h2>On homepage cards: feed fetching and a 12 hour cache</h2>
<p>Showing reading time on the article page is easy because the content is already on the page. But on homepage cards, the card shows only the title and image, with no full content to calculate. BlogKub therefore <strong>pulls the article content via Blogger's feed</strong> to calculate each card's reading time and fill in the badge.</p>
<p>To avoid re-fetching the feed every time the page loads, the system <strong>caches the result for about 12 hours</strong> in the reader's browser. The first visit fetches and calculates, and later visits within 12 hours use the cached result, keeping it fast and not wasting feed calls. This balances having up-to-date data with keeping speed. If you do not want reading time on cards, turn this option off so the system works only on article pages, which is lighter.</p>
<div class="note">Tip: if you especially prioritize homepage speed, or your theme has no article cards, turning off the card calculation reduces unnecessary work.</div>

<h2>Reading time and reader psychology</h2>
<p>The reason leading sites favor showing reading time comes from understanding reader behavior. People have limited time and attention. Seeing a time number helps them allocate it, such as "I have 5 free minutes while waiting, this 3 min article fits" or "a 15 min article, better save it for the evening". Both cases beat opening it and feeling it is longer than expected, then leaving.</p>
<p>In this sense, reading time works well with other features. When a reader sees an article is long but is still interested, they might use a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/bookmark">bookmark</a> to save it for later, or while reading, watch the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/progress">reading progress bar</a> to see how much is left. All of this helps readers feel in control of their own experience, which increases satisfaction and the chance of reading to the end.</p>

<h2>Accuracy: reading time is an estimate</h2>
<p>What to understand is that reading time is an "estimate", not an exact number, because each person's reading speed differs. Some read fast, some read slowly and consider carefully. Also, an article with lots of code, tables, or images takes a different time from plain text. The purpose of reading time is to give a "rough picture" to help decide, not a stopwatch that must be exact.</p>
<p>So do not worry if the number is slightly off from your own real time. As long as it reflects relative length correctly, short articles show less time and long ones show more, it does its job fully. Understanding that this is an estimate helps you use the feature correctly without expecting unrealistic precision.</p>

<h2>Reading time and site credibility</h2>
<p>Beyond usability, showing reading time also signals that your site attends to detail and is designed for readers. Small, polished elements like this appear on leading media sites and professional blogs. When your blog has these in full, readers subconsciously perceive it as credible and standard, a feeling that carries over to trust in the content.</p>
<p>Many small details together are what make the difference between a blog that looks "casual" and one that looks "serious". Reading time is one of them. The cost to add it is nearly zero because it is calculated automatically, but the effect on image and experience is valuable, making it a feature worth enabling in almost every blog.</p>

<h2>Examples of use in different kinds of blogs</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Knowledge/how-to blogs:</strong> readers often want to know how long it takes to learn this, and reading time sets the expectation.</li>
  <li><strong>News/summary blogs:</strong> a short reading time says it can be finished quickly, ideal for people who want fast updates.</li>
  <li><strong>Long-form/analysis blogs:</strong> a long reading time filters for readers ready to invest time, and encourages busy ones to save it first.</li>
  <li><strong>Multi-category content sites:</strong> reading time on cards helps readers easily choose an article based on the time they have.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>Reading time does not show</h3>
<p>Check that you added the reading time block and Exported again. On the article page, the badge shows in the article meta section. On cards, you must turn on the calculate-on-cards option and the theme must have real article cards.</p>
<h3>The reading time number looks abnormally low</h3>
<p>If it is a Thai article, the system already approximates from characters, but if most of the content is images or code rather than text, the word count will genuinely be low, which is normal because reading time counts text.</p>
<h3>The time on cards does not update immediately after editing an article</h3>
<p>Because the system caches the result for 12 hours, changes may reflect a little slowly on cards. Wait for the cache to expire or test in a browser with no cache yet.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Enable reading time on blogs with articles of varied length, to help readers choose by the time they have.</li>
  <li>Turn off the card calculation if you prioritize homepage speed or the theme has no article cards.</li>
  <li>Understand that reading time is an estimate, and do not worry about small discrepancies.</li>
  <li>Use it together with the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/progress">reading progress bar</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/bookmark">bookmarks</a> for a complete reading experience.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>Reading time is a small detail that helps readers decide and plan their reading better, reducing hesitation and quitting midway. With BlogKub you just add the reading time block and Export it to use, and the system shows "⏱ X min" on article pages and on cards (if enabled), calculated automatically from the content with Thai support, and caching the card result for 12 hours to keep speed. When you understand it as an estimate to help decide, and use it with other reading features, reading time raises your reader experience to a professional level like leading sites.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>How is reading time calculated?</summary><p>The system counts the number of words in the article content and divides by an average reading speed, supporting both English words and Thai characters (converting the Thai character count into an approximate word count), then displays it as minutes, rounded up to at least 1 minute.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can it show reading time on homepage cards?</summary><p>Yes. Turn on the calculate-on-cards option, and the system pulls the article content via the feed to calculate and display it on the card, caching the result for about 12 hours so it does not re-fetch often. If you want it only on article pages, you can turn this off.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does it support Thai?</summary><p>Yes. Because Thai has no spaces between words, the system approximates the word count from the Thai character count, so the reading time of a Thai article is reasonable, not a wrong value from counting by spaces.</p></details>
<details><summary>Why show reading time?</summary><p>It helps readers decide whether to read now or save for later, reducing hesitation and quitting midway. A short article looks approachable, while a long one sets the right expectation, improving the reader's experience and satisfaction.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does reading time affect site speed?</summary><p>Very little for article pages, because it calculates from the on-page content directly. On homepage cards there is one feed fetch cached for 12 hours, so it does not re-fetch every time, keeping the speed impact low.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/readtime">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add a search box in a Blogger blog</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/search</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/search</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a search box to a Blogger theme with BlogKub so readers can search posts on your site: set the heading and placeholder, uses Blogger&apos;s built-in search, works instantly with no external service, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/search.png" type="image/png" length="324169"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/search.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/search.png" alt="How to add a search box in a Blogger blog" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add a search box in a Blogger blog</h1>
<p class="lead">As your blog gains more posts, letting readers quickly find what they want matters. A search box lets readers type a word and instantly find posts on your site. This article teaches you how to add one to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, using Blogger's built-in search, working instantly with no external service, along with the settings and how to fix problems.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Search box</strong> block in BlogKub, set the heading (leave blank to hide) and placeholder, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. You get a search box that uses <strong>Blogger's built-in search</strong>. When a reader types a word and searches, it goes to the <code>/search</code> results page showing posts on your site matching the query. It works instantly with <strong>no external service or key needed</strong>.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/search.png" aria-label="View the search box in a blog at full size">
    <img alt="A post search box on a Blogger site with a heading and a search button, using Blogger's built-in search" title="A search box in a blog" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/search.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1280" data-original-height="394" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A site search box, set the heading and placeholder, uses Blogger's built-in search, works instantly.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>Why a blog needs a search box</h2>
<p><strong>A search box is a field for readers to type a query to find posts on your site.</strong> When a blog is still small with only a few posts, readers can scroll through them all, but once content accumulates to dozens or hundreds of posts, finding what you want without a search box becomes hard and frustrating.</p>
<p>A search box solves this by letting readers "go straight to what they want" instead of browsing menus or scrolling long pages. A reader who remembers you once wrote about something, or wants specific information, types a query and finds it immediately. This is the experience today's web users expect, because we are used to searching on every platform. Not having a search box on a content-heavy site is like a library with no catalog.</p>

<h2>Uses Blogger's built-in search: the benefit of simplicity</h2>
<p>BlogKub's search box uses <strong>Blogger's built-in search</strong>, which is a major advantage, because it works instantly with no complex setup. You do not sign up for an external search service, do not enter an API key, and do not wait for a search engine to build an index. When a reader types a query and searches, the system takes them to Blogger's search results page (the <code>/search</code> URL) showing posts on your site matching the query.</p>
<p>This simplicity aligns with BlogKub's philosophy of making everything work built-in without relying on external services that may go down or change terms. The search box is therefore a feature that "works the moment you install it", is reliable, and adds no maintenance burden, ideal for bloggers who want full functionality without dealing with much technical detail.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the search box step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the search box block.</strong> Open the left block library and drag the "Search box" block into the position you want, such as the header, the sidebar, or near the footer.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Set the heading and placeholder.</strong> Enter a heading above the field if you want (leave blank to hide the heading), and set placeholder text shown in the field, such as "Search the blog...", to tell readers what the field does.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test the search.</strong> Open the live site, type a query in the field and search, confirming it goes to Blogger's search results page and shows posts matching the query.</li>
</ol>

<h2>A good placeholder guides readers</h2>
<p>The placeholder text shown faintly in the search field seems small, but it plays a role in guiding readers. Instead of leaving the field blank, writing a clear placeholder tells them what the field does and what they can search, such as "Search the blog..." directly, or if your blog has a specific theme, adjust it to match, such as "Search recipes..." for a food blog.</p>
<p>A good placeholder reduces hesitation and encourages readers to try the search box. Conversely, an empty field with no hint may leave some unsure of what they can search. Attending to small details like this is what makes the web experience smoother bit by bit.</p>

<h2>Where to place the search box so readers find it</h2>
<p>The search box's position should be where readers expect to find it, because people are familiar with standard positions from other sites.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Header:</strong> the spot people look for a search box most, because it is at the top and always visible, ideal for sites where search is a key function.</li>
  <li><strong>Sidebar:</strong> ideal for layouts that already have a sidebar. Place the search box at the top of the sidebar for easy visibility. It works well with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sidebar">sidebar</a>.</li>
  <li><strong>Near the footer:</strong> for readers who scrolled all the way down and still have not found what they want, a footer search box gives them an option to keep searching.</li>
</ul>
<p>Choose the position by how important search is on your site. If the blog has lots of content and people often come to find specific topics, the header is most convenient. But if it is a supporting function, the sidebar or footer is enough.</p>

<h2>The search box, experience, and staying on the site</h2>
<p>A search box clearly benefits the user experience, because it reduces the friction of finding content. Readers who quickly find what they want are satisfied and tend to stay on the site longer, read several posts, and return when they need information. Conversely, readers who cannot find something often leave for elsewhere and may not return.</p>
<p>Although a search box is not a direct ranking factor, the positive behaviors it creates, such as longer time on site and reading several pages, are all indirect quality signals that are good for the site. Used together with other good navigation, such as <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/breadcrumb">breadcrumbs</a> that show the site structure and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related articles</a> that recommend nearby content, the search box is another piece that completes your site's navigation system.</p>

<h2>Limitations to understand</h2>
<p>Because the search box uses Blogger's built-in system, the results follow Blogger's capabilities, which focus on matching words in posts. It may not be as smart as advanced search systems with complex relevance ranking. However, for a general blog, the built-in search is sufficient and reliable. Readers who type a query matching a title or content usually find the post they want.</p>
<p>If your site grows a lot and needs more complex search in the future, there are other options to consider, but for the start and for most blogs, the built-in search is a good balance between usable functionality and simplicity of maintenance. Starting with something that works instantly beats having no search box at all.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>Searching does not find a post you know exists</h3>
<p>Blogger's search matches words in posts. Try a query that actually appears in the title or content. If the post uses a different word with the same meaning, you may need a more exact word. Writing titles and content with words readers are likely to search helps them find it more easily.</p>
<h3>Clicking search does nothing</h3>
<p>Check that you added the search box block and Exported again, and that the form points to <code>/search</code>, which is Blogger's search results page. Normally the system is set up correctly.</p>
<h3>The search box does not fit the site</h3>
<p>The field already uses the theme's colors and corner radius. If you want to adjust it, try setting a heading or changing the placeholder to match the tone, and place it in a spot that suits the layout.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Add a search box once the blog has enough posts that readers need to find them, not necessarily when there are only a few.</li>
  <li>Place it in a standard spot readers expect, such as the header or sidebar.</li>
  <li>Write a clear placeholder to guide readers and encourage them to try searching.</li>
  <li>Write titles and content with words readers are likely to search, so they find them easily.</li>
  <li>Use it together with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sidebar">sidebar</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/breadcrumb">breadcrumbs</a> for a complete navigation system.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>A search box is a basic navigation feature that becomes increasingly important as your blog accumulates content, because it helps readers go straight to what they want instead of scrolling to find it. With BlogKub you just add the search box block, set the heading and placeholder, and Export it to use, and the box uses Blogger's built-in search that works instantly with no external service or key. Placed where readers expect and with a clear placeholder, the search box reduces the friction of finding content, increases satisfaction, and keeps readers on your site longer, which is the foundation of a good experience and the site's growth.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>What system does the search box use?</summary><p>It uses Blogger's built-in search. When a reader types a query and searches, it goes to Blogger's search results page (/search) that shows posts on your site matching the query. It works instantly with no external service or key needed.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I customize the search box's appearance?</summary><p>Yes. You can set a heading above the field (leave blank to hide the heading) and set placeholder text in the field, such as 'Search the blog...'. The field uses the theme's colors and corner radius, so it blends with the site design.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is the search box different from searching on Google?</summary><p>The site search box searches only posts on your blog through Blogger's system, while a Google search searches the whole internet. The site box helps readers already on the site quickly find old posts or topics of interest without leaving for Google.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where should I place the search box?</summary><p>Popular spots are the header, the sidebar, or near the footer, because those are where readers expect to find it. Placing it in a standard spot helps readers find the search box immediately when they need it.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the search box help SEO?</summary><p>It helps indirectly through user experience. A search box makes it easy for readers to find content and stay on the site longer. When people find what they want, they tend to read several posts and return, which are good quality signals for the site overall.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/search">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add social share buttons in Blogger articles</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/share</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/share</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add inline social share buttons to Blogger articles with BlogKub: buttons for Facebook, X, LINE, and copy link, shown in the article, uses clean links, mobile friendly, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/share.png" type="image/png" length="325674"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/share.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/share.png" alt="How to add social share buttons in Blogger articles" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add social share buttons in Blogger articles</h1>
<p class="lead">Word of mouth is one of a blog's most powerful ways to grow. Inline social share buttons in an article let an impressed reader share it with friends in one click, on every screen size including mobile. This article teaches you how to add them to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, with a copy link button, clean links, and how to use them effectively.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Social Share</strong> block in BlogKub, toggle the <strong>Facebook, X, LINE, copy link</strong> channels and set lead text, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. You get inline share buttons on the article page (usually at the end), shown on <strong>every screen size including mobile</strong>, using the clean canonical link (stripping m=1), with the copy link button having a fallback for old browsers.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/share.png" aria-label="View the social share buttons in an article at full size">
    <img alt="Inline social share buttons at the end of a Blogger article with Facebook, X, LINE, and copy link buttons" title="Social share buttons in an article" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/share.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1440" data-original-height="358" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">Inline share buttons at the end of an article, with Facebook, X, LINE, and copy link, shown on every screen size including mobile.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What inline social share buttons are</h2>
<p><strong>Inline social share buttons are a group of share buttons placed in the article content, usually at the end after the reader finishes reading.</strong> When clicked, the system opens that platform's share window with the article link and title, letting readers share with friends or post to their own feed in a few clicks.</p>
<p>The end-of-article position has a reason, because it is the moment the reader has just finished and feels the value of the content most. If they are impressed, this is when they are most likely to want to spread the word. Having share buttons waiting right there helps turn that impression into an actual share.</p>

<h2>Why have inline share buttons when there is already a floating bar</h2>
<p>BlogKub has both a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sharebar">floating side share bar</a> and inline share buttons, because the two complement each other in different contexts. The key difference is that <strong>inline buttons show on every screen size, including mobile</strong>, while the floating side bar is hidden on mobile so as not to cover content.</p>
<p>Since most blog readers today come from mobile, having inline share buttons is very important. It ensures mobile readers, who are the majority, can share too. Used together, the floating bar catches desktop readers while reading, and the inline buttons catch everyone who finishes reading, covering both moments and every device completely.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add social share buttons step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the Social Share block.</strong> Open the left block library and drag the "Social Share" block in, usually placed at the end of the article after the main content.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Choose channels and lead text.</strong> Toggle Facebook, X (Twitter), LINE, and the copy link button as you like, and add lead text such as "If you liked this article, please share it with friends" to encourage sharing.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test the sharing.</strong> Open a live article page, click each share channel and the copy link button, confirming the shared link matches the page and is a clean URL.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Clean links: a detail professionals attend to</h2>
<p>When a reader shares an article, the outgoing link should be the main, tidy URL that matches the real page. Blogger often appends the <code>m=1</code> parameter to the URL for the mobile version, which, if shared, looks cluttered and may cause confusion. BlogKub's share buttons therefore pull the page's <strong>canonical</strong> link and <strong>strip the m=1 parameter</strong> before sharing.</p>
<p>This detail is good for both image and SEO. A clean, consistent link helps share signals consolidate on a single URL, not spread across several versions of the same page. When everyone shares the same link, the value of sharing accumulates efficiently. This is care readers do not notice but that pays off in the long run.</p>

<h2>The copy link button: the channel people actually use</h2>
<p>Besides the big social buttons, the copy link button is a channel people really use to share in daily life. Many copy the link to paste into a private chat, a LINE group, or an app with no dedicated share button. The copy link button is therefore the most comprehensive and flexible share channel. When clicked, the button shows a "Copied" state to confirm.</p>
<p>This button uses the modern Clipboard API first, and if the browser does not support it, it switches to a fallback method automatically, so most readers can copy even on older browsers. This is the same as the copy button in other BlogKub features, such as the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/copycode">copy code button</a> that uses the same approach, for the widest compatibility.</p>

<h2>Write lead text to encourage sharing</h2>
<p>Adding short lead text above the share buttons genuinely increases sharing, because it is a polite "ask". Behavioral research finds that people are more likely to do something asked of them than left to guess. Text like "If this article was helpful, please share it with a friend who might be interested" therefore works better than bare buttons.</p>
<p>The tip is to make the text sincere and connected to the value the reader just received, not a curt ask. Saying "Share it with a friend facing the same problem" makes readers think of someone who would benefit, which encourages sharing more than a generic request. Adjust the text to fit your blog's tone and each content type for the best results.</p>

<h2>Share buttons and site growth</h2>
<p>Social sharing is a word-of-mouth growth channel with high credibility, because when a friend shares an article, those who see it usually click out of trust in the sharer. Traffic from sharing is therefore high quality and has a chance of becoming new readers who share again, creating a natural growth cycle.</p>
<p>Although share counts are not a direct ranking factor, the increased visibility and traffic often lead to positive signals such as mentions and backlinks from other sites. Used together with quality content and read-on elements such as <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/morefrom">latest/random posts</a>, your site has a good foundation for sustainable growth.</p>

<h2>Privacy and lightness: sharing with no tracking script</h2>
<p>Many share buttons on the web use scripts embedded directly from social platforms, which not only slow the page but also embed trackers that collect reader data even if they do not click share. BlogKub's share buttons take a different approach, being <strong>standard share links that open the platform's share window only when the reader clicks</strong>, with no tracking script embedded on the page.</p>
<p>The result is that your page is lighter, loads faster, and respects reader privacy more. Readers who do not click share are not tracked by these buttons, which aligns with BlogKub's philosophy of prioritizing privacy and speed. Getting both full share functionality and good lightness for Core Web Vitals is an unseen but valuable long-term advantage.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The share buttons do not show</h3>
<p>Check that you added the Social Share block and Exported again, and view it on a real article page, because the buttons show in the article context. Also check that at least one share channel is enabled.</p>
<h3>The shared link has m=1 at the end</h3>
<p>Normally the system strips this parameter. If you still see it, check that the page has a correct canonical tag, which BlogKub's theme already includes.</p>
<h3>Copying does not work on some browsers</h3>
<p>The system has a fallback, but some environments with restricted clipboard permissions (such as non-HTTPS pages) may fail to copy. Make sure the site is served over HTTPS, which Blogger already supports.</p>
<h3>You want share buttons during reading too</h3>
<p>Use the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sharebar">floating side share bar</a> alongside, so desktop readers can share while reading, while the inline buttons serve readers on every device who finish reading.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Place share buttons at the end of the article, the moment readers are most likely to want to share.</li>
  <li>Add sincere lead text connected to the content's value to encourage sharing.</li>
  <li>Always enable the copy link button, because it is the channel people really use in private chat.</li>
  <li>Choose only the channels your readers use, no need to enable every button.</li>
  <li>Use it together with a floating side share bar to cover both during reading and after finishing, on every device.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>Inline social share buttons are an important tool for turning a reader's impression into word of mouth. With BlogKub you just add the Social Share block, enable the Facebook, X, LINE channels plus the copy link button, add lead text, and Export it to use, and the buttons show on the article page at every screen size including mobile, using the clean canonical link, with a fallback for copying. Used together with a floating side share bar, your site is ready for readers to spread the word at every moment and on every device, which is the foundation of sustainable word-of-mouth growth.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>How are social share buttons different from a floating side share bar?</summary><p>Social share buttons are inline buttons placed in the article content (such as at the end), shown on every screen size including mobile, while a floating side share bar is a floating bar on the side shown only on wide screens and hidden on mobile. The two are used together to cover readers on every device.</p></details>
<details><summary>Which channels can I share to?</summary><p>It supports Facebook, X (Twitter), and LINE, plus a copy link button. You can toggle each channel and set lead text. The copy link button is very useful for sharing through private chat.</p></details>
<details><summary>Is the shared link a clean URL?</summary><p>Yes. The system pulls the canonical link and strips parameters like Blogger's m=1, so the shared link is the main URL that matches the real page, not the mobile version with a trailing parameter.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do share buttons show only on article pages?</summary><p>Yes. Share buttons show on article (post) pages, where readers have content to share, so the buttons appear in a suitable context and do not clutter unrelated pages.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the copy link button work on old browsers?</summary><p>Yes. The system uses the modern Clipboard API first, and if it is not supported, it switches to a fallback method automatically, so most readers can copy the link even on older browsers.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/share">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add a Sidebar (content plus side column) in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sidebar</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sidebar</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a Sidebar to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: place the main content beside a side column, choose the left or right side, set the width, add search, categories, archive, and about the author, laid out automatically, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/sidebar.png" type="image/png" length="312488"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/sidebar.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/sidebar.png" alt="How to add a Sidebar (content plus side column) in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add a Sidebar (content plus side column) in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">A sidebar is a side column that places supporting elements like categories, search, and archive beside the main content. It is a classic layout that aids navigation in content-heavy blogs. This article teaches you how to add one to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, which lays it out beside the content automatically, letting you choose the side and width, with commonly used widgets.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Sidebar Layout</strong> block in BlogKub near the post group, choose the <strong>left/right</strong> side, set the <strong>width</strong>, and enable the widgets you want (<strong>search, categories/labels, archive, about the author</strong>). The system <strong>arranges the sidebar beside the main content automatically</strong> on Export, and <strong>collapses it below on mobile</strong> so the content gets full space.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/sidebar.png" aria-label="View the Sidebar content plus side column at full size">
    <img alt="A Sidebar layout in a Blogger theme with article content on the left and a side column (search, categories, about the author) on the right" title="A Sidebar of content plus side column" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/sidebar.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1800" data-original-height="1086" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A sidebar layout: article content beside a side column with search, categories, and about the author, laid out automatically.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a sidebar is, and who it suits</h2>
<p><strong>A sidebar is a vertical column placed beside the main content, used to show supporting elements such as search, categories, archive, and author information.</strong> It is a classic, familiar two-column layout where the main content takes up most of the space, while the sidebar is a narrow column that aids navigation and provides extra information.</p>
<p>A sidebar suits blogs with many posts and several categories, because widgets like categories and archive help readers explore the content easily. Conversely, blogs focused on focused long-form reading, or a minimal design, might choose a single-column layout so the sidebar does not pull attention from the content. Choosing to use a sidebar therefore depends on your site's nature and goals.</p>

<h2>Laid out automatically: you do not arrange the columns yourself</h2>
<p>What makes BlogKub's sidebar easy to use is that <strong>the system lays it out automatically</strong>. You do not deal with building a two-column structure yourself. Just place the Sidebar block near the post group (such as postgrid, postlist, or featured), and on Export XML the system arranges the sidebar beside the main content on the side and width you set.</p>
<p>This saves a lot of hassle, because building a two-column layout by hand in Blogger XML is complex and requires understanding section structure and CSS. BlogKub handling it means you get a correct, responsive sidebar layout just by choosing a few options, with no touching code at all.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the sidebar step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the Sidebar block.</strong> Open the left block library and drag the "Sidebar Layout" block near the post group (postgrid/postlist/featured), so the system knows beside which content to place the sidebar.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Choose the side and width.</strong> Choose the sidebar on the left or right, and set the width, such as 280px, as suits your layout.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Choose the widgets in the sidebar.</strong> Enable the widgets you want, namely search, labels/categories, archive, and about the author. Choose only what benefits your site.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and check the result.</strong> Click Export, upload it to Blogger, then check the sidebar sits beside the content correctly on desktop and collapses below the content on mobile.</li>
</ol>

<h2>The sidebar widgets and the benefit of each</h2>
<p>A sidebar is valuable only when the widgets in it benefit readers. BlogKub has main widgets to enable.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Search:</strong> lets readers search posts on the site from the sidebar, ideal for content-heavy sites. It uses the same idea as the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/search">search box</a> placed elsewhere.</li>
  <li><strong>Labels/categories:</strong> show the blog's categories for readers to click into posts in a category of interest, aiding topic-based navigation.</li>
  <li><strong>Archive:</strong> organizes posts by time period, letting readers revisit old posts by month/year, ideal for blogs that publish regularly.</li>
  <li><strong>About the author:</strong> shows the author's profile, building connection and credibility (E-E-A-T), letting readers know who wrote it.</li>
</ul>
<p>The tip is to choose only the widgets your readers genuinely benefit from. A sidebar stuffed with everything until it runs long looks cluttered and diminishes the importance of each part. Having just the right widgets, arranged by importance, lets the sidebar do its job best.</p>

<h2>The sidebar on mobile: collapses below automatically</h2>
<p>The challenge of a two-column layout is that on mobile there is not enough room for two columns side by side. BlogKub solves this by <strong>collapsing the sidebar below the main content automatically on small screens</strong>, so the main content gets full width and is easy to read, while the sidebar widgets are still reachable when readers scroll down.</p>
<p>This handling matters because most readers come from mobile. If the sidebar did not collapse and squeezed the content narrow, reading would be painful. The system doing the responsive work automatically means you get the benefit of a sidebar on desktop without losing the mobile reading experience. This is design that considers every device from the start.</p>

<h2>Choose a balanced side and width</h2>
<p>Choosing the sidebar's side affects the feel of the page. A <strong>right</strong> sidebar is the most common classic, because it keeps the main content on the left where the eye starts reading, while a <strong>left</strong> sidebar feels like a navigation panel before the content, ideal for sites that emphasize navigation. Both work, so choose by the design and balance you want.</p>
<p>As for the width, around 280px is a sweet spot for a general sidebar. It is wide enough for widgets to show their content fully without feeling cramped, and not so wide that it steals space from the main content. Set too wide, and the main content gets squeezed and harder to read. Finding the balance between content space and the sidebar is the key to a good layout.</p>

<h2>Sidebar vs single column: trends and choice</h2>
<p>In recent years, many sites have shifted to a single-column layout focused on content, especially long-form reading blogs and minimal sites. The reason is that a single column helps readers focus on the content with no side distractions, and looks modern and clean. However, the sidebar is not obsolete. It still clearly benefits sites where navigation and content discovery matter, such as sites with hundreds of posts across several categories.</p>
<p>The choice is therefore not right or wrong, but a matter of goals. If your site wants readers to explore many posts and navigate by category, a sidebar helps a lot. But if the goal is for readers to focus on a single article to the end, a single column may fit better. The advantage of BlogKub is that you can choose either and switch as you like. Try which fits your readers and content best.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The sidebar is not beside the content</h3>
<p>Check that you placed the Sidebar block near the post group (postgrid/postlist/featured), because the system uses this position to arrange the sidebar beside the content. If placed far from the post group, the layout may not be as expected.</p>
<h3>The main content is too narrow</h3>
<p>You may have set the sidebar width too high. Try reducing the width (such as back to 280px) to return space to the main content.</p>
<h3>The sidebar widgets do not show</h3>
<p>Check that you enabled the widgets you want and Exported again. Some widgets, such as archive, show only when there are enough posts to group by time.</p>
<h3>The sidebar looks cluttered on mobile</h3>
<p>Because the sidebar collapses below, having many widgets makes the lower section long. Try reducing the widgets to only the essential ones so mobile stays compact.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Always place the Sidebar block near the post group, so the system arranges it beside the content correctly.</li>
  <li>Choose only widgets readers genuinely benefit from, do not stuff everything until the sidebar is long and cluttered.</li>
  <li>Set a balanced width (around 280px) so it does not squeeze the main content.</li>
  <li>Consider whether your site suits a sidebar or a single column, by the nature of the content.</li>
  <li>Use the search and category widgets together with <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/breadcrumb">breadcrumbs</a> for a complete navigation system.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>A sidebar is a classic layout that aids navigation in content-heavy blogs by placing supporting elements like search, categories, archive, and author information beside the main content. With BlogKub you just place the Sidebar block near the post group, choose the left/right side, set the width, and enable the widgets you want, and the system arranges the sidebar beside the content automatically on Export and collapses it below on mobile to preserve the reading experience, with no touching code at all. When you choose genuinely useful widgets and set a balanced width, the sidebar helps readers explore your content more easily, which is especially suited to blogs that have accumulated many posts.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Where is the Sidebar placed, and do I place it myself?</summary><p>You do not place it manually. Put the Sidebar block near the post group (postgrid/postlist/featured), and the system arranges the sidebar beside the main content automatically on Export XML. You only choose the left or right side and the width.</p></details>
<details><summary>What can I put in the sidebar?</summary><p>There are widgets to enable, such as search, labels/categories, archive, and about the author (profile). Choose only what you want so the sidebar is useful without clutter.</p></details>
<details><summary>How does the sidebar show on mobile?</summary><p>On mobile with limited space, the sidebar collapses below the main content automatically, so the main content gets full width and is easy to read. Readers can still reach the sidebar widgets by scrolling down.</p></details>
<details><summary>Left or right side, which is better?</summary><p>It depends on the site style. A right sidebar is the classic, common choice and keeps content on the left following the reading flow, while a left sidebar feels like a navigation panel. Both work, so choose by design and page balance.</p></details>
<details><summary>What kind of blog is a sidebar good for?</summary><p>It suits blogs with many posts and several categories, because the sidebar aids navigation with categories, archive, and search. Blogs focused on simplicity or long-form reading might choose a single-column layout to focus on the content.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sidebar">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add an image slider/gallery with captions in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/slider</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/slider</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add an image slider/gallery with captions to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: navigate images with buttons and position dots, supports swipe on mobile, placed in a post with the .bk-slider class, plus usage and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/slider.png" type="image/png" length="347314"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/slider.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/slider.png" alt="How to add an image slider/gallery with captions in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add an image slider/gallery with captions in Blogger articles</h1>
<p class="lead">Some things are told better with several images than with text, but placing images in a long row makes an article stretch and scroll on and on. An image slider/gallery solves this by gathering several images into one scrollable space. This article teaches you how to add one to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, with captions, navigation buttons, position dots, and swipe support on mobile.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>image slider/gallery</strong> block in BlogKub, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. Then in the post (HTML view), place a <code>&lt;div class="bk-slider"&gt;</code> containing several <code>&lt;figure&gt;</code> elements, each with an <code>&lt;img&gt;</code> and a <code>&lt;figcaption&gt;</code>. The system adds <strong>navigation buttons, position dots, and swipe support (scroll-snap)</strong> automatically, saving space and telling a story with images beautifully.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/slider.png" aria-label="View the image slider/gallery with captions at full size">
    <img alt="An image slider/gallery in a Blogger article with previous/next buttons, position dots, and a caption under the image" title="An image slider/gallery with captions" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/slider.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1360" data-original-height="1088" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A scrollable image slider with previous/next buttons, position dots, and a caption under the image on a gradient bar.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What an image slider/gallery is, and what it solves</h2>
<p><strong>An image slider is a box that shows several images in one space, showing one at a time and letting readers scroll to the next with buttons, swipe, or by tapping the position dots.</strong> Instead of placing 6 or 7 images in a row until the article stretches like a kite tail, a slider gathers them all into one compact frame. Interested readers scroll through all of them, while those not interested can scroll past quickly.</p>
<p>This solves the space problem in articles with many images, such as an accommodation review that wants to show several angles, or a travel article with many beautiful images of one place. Using a slider keeps the content concise, smooth to read, and tidy, while still presenting all the images.</p>

<h2>How BlogKub's slider works</h2>
<p>When you add this block, the system embeds the slider's styles and script in the theme. When you place the slider structure in a post, the system makes it fully functional with these elements.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Scroll-snap scrolling:</strong> each image "snaps" into place when scrolled, so it does not stop halfway, and swiping on mobile is smooth.</li>
  <li><strong>Previous/next buttons:</strong> round buttons on both sides for desktop users who want to navigate by clicking.</li>
  <li><strong>Position dots:</strong> dots below show which image out of the total you are viewing, and tapping jumps to that image. The current image's dot stretches into a bar to stand out.</li>
  <li><strong>Caption under the image:</strong> the text in the figcaption shows over the bottom of the image on a dark gradient bar, easy to read without covering the main image.</li>
</ul>
<p>All of this works together while you just place a simple HTML structure, and the system handles the interactive part for you.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add and use the image slider step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the image slider block.</strong> Open the left block library, the "Article &amp; UX" category, and drag the "Image slider/gallery" block in, to embed the slider styles and script in the theme.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Place the slider in a post.</strong> In HTML view, place a <code>&lt;div class="bk-slider"&gt;</code>, then add several <code>&lt;figure&gt;&lt;img src="..."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;caption&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;</code> in a row for as many images as you want.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test the navigation.</strong> Open a live article, click the previous/next buttons, tap the position dots, and try swiping on mobile, to confirm it scrolls smoothly and the captions show correctly.</li>
</ol>
<div class="note">Tip: use images with similar aspect ratios (such as all 16:10) so the slider looks tidy. The system already sets a consistent aspect ratio, but source images with similar ratios get cropped the least.</div>

<h2>Captions: adding context to images</h2>
<p>An image with a caption is more powerful than a bare image, because the caption tells readers what they are looking at, where, or what is interesting. In BlogKub's slider, the caption sits over the bottom of the image on a gradient from transparent to dark, so the white text reads clearly whether the image behind is bright or dark.</p>
<p>Beyond helping readers, captions and image alt text are also good for accessibility and image SEO. When you describe images meaningfully, both screen reader users and image search engines understand the content better. If you are interested in making images discoverable, read the guidance on making images show in Google in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/lightbox">Lightbox guide</a> too, since both are about presenting images in articles.</p>

<h2>Slider vs Lightbox: they can be used together</h2>
<p>Many readers wonder how a slider differs from a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/lightbox">Lightbox</a>. The answer is that the two do different jobs and complement each other.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Slider:</strong> gathers several images in one space in the content, scrolling one at a time, ideal for presenting a set of images concisely.</li>
  <li><strong>Lightbox:</strong> clicking an image to expand it full screen on a dark background, ideal when a reader wants to see the details of one image large.</li>
</ul>
<p>Used together, readers can scroll through images in the slider for an overview, then click an image of interest to expand and see the details full screen, a complete image-viewing experience, ideal for articles where images are the star, such as travel, food, and accommodation reviews.</p>

<h2>Considerations for speed and images</h2>
<p>The slider itself is CSS and a small script, so it barely affects speed. But what really matters is the <strong>file size of the images</strong>, because a slider often has several images. If each is very large, the page loads slower. We recommend resizing and compressing images suitably before uploading, and setting meaningful file names and alt text.</p>
<p>Another technique is that Blogger already supports lazy loading in many cases, so images not yet scrolled to do not load immediately, helping the first page open faster. Managing images well is therefore the key to a slider that is both beautiful and fast, which is good for both readers and Core Web Vitals scores.</p>

<h2>Examples of using the slider in different kinds of blogs</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Travel blogs:</strong> gather several angles of one place in a slider, with captions naming the spot or the best time to go.</li>
  <li><strong>Accommodation/hotel reviews:</strong> show the room, view, and amenities in one slider, helping readers get an overview before deciding.</li>
  <li><strong>Food blogs:</strong> images of cooking steps or several dishes at a restaurant, scrollable and concise.</li>
  <li><strong>Creative/portfolio blogs:</strong> show several works in one gallery, with captions naming each piece.</li>
</ul>
<p>Every case shares "several related images", which suits gathering into one slider more than a long row, because it keeps the article concise and presents the images with finesse.</p>

<h2>When not to use a slider</h2>
<p>Although a slider is useful, it is not the answer for every situation. In some cases, placing images normally is better, such as when each image is equally important and you want to be sure readers see all of them. Hiding images in a slider may leave some readers not scrolling through all of them. In this case, placing images in a row so all are visible may fit better.</p>
<p>Another case is when images are part of a sequence that must be read in order with accompanying text for each image. Splitting the images into a slider may break the connection between the image and its explanation. In short, use a slider when images are a "set viewed together" and readers can choose what to view, but if every image must be seen and tied to specific text, placing them normally communicates better. Choosing the right tool for the job is the heart of good presentation.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The slider does not scroll or has no buttons</h3>
<p>Check that you added the slider block and Exported again, and used the correct structure, that is <code>bk-slider</code> wrapping several <code>figure</code> elements, written in the post's HTML view. If you use the compose view, the structure may get converted so the slider does not work.</p>
<h3>The images are cropped too much</h3>
<p>The slider sets a consistent aspect ratio for tidiness. If source images differ a lot from the frame's ratio, they get cropped a lot. We recommend using images with similar ratios or close to the frame to reduce cropping.</p>
<h3>The captions do not show</h3>
<p>Check that you added text in the <code>figcaption</code> of each figure. If there is no figcaption, there is no caption to show, which is normal behavior.</p>
<h3>The slider loads slowly</h3>
<p>This is usually from image files being too large. Resize and compress images before uploading, because the number and size of images affects speed more than the slider itself.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Use images with similar ratios so the slider looks tidy and gets cropped less.</li>
  <li>Add meaningful captions and alt text to every image, for readers and image SEO.</li>
  <li>Resize and compress images before uploading to keep page speed.</li>
  <li>Use a slider for "a set of related images", not single images that do not need scrolling.</li>
  <li>Pair it with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/lightbox">Lightbox</a> so readers can scroll through an overview and click to expand an image of interest.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>An image slider/gallery is a tool that keeps image-heavy articles concise, smooth to read, and presents images with finesse. With BlogKub you just add the slider block and Export it to use, then place a bk-slider structure with several figures, each with an img and a figcaption, and the system adds navigation buttons, position dots, captions under the images, and swipe support on mobile automatically. When you manage images at suitable sizes and add good captions, the slider tells a story with images beautifully and fast, especially in travel, food, review, and portfolio articles where images are the heart of the content.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>How do I use the image slider?</summary><p>In the post's HTML view, place a &lt;div class='bk-slider'&gt;, then add several &lt;figure&gt; elements inside, each with an &lt;img&gt; and a &lt;figcaption&gt; for the caption. The system adds navigation buttons, position dots, and swipe support automatically.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the slider support swipe on mobile?</summary><p>Yes. The slider uses scroll-snap scrolling, so you can swipe to move images smoothly on mobile, with previous/next buttons and position dots for desktop users.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I add captions under the images?</summary><p>Yes. Add text in the &lt;figcaption&gt; of each figure. The caption shows over the bottom of the image on a dark gradient bar, easy to read and not covering the main image.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the slider slow the site down?</summary><p>The impact is small because the slider is CSS and a small script, using no heavy library. However, you should resize image files suitably before uploading, because having many images affects loading more than the slider itself.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is the slider different from a Lightbox?</summary><p>A slider is a gallery to scroll through several images in one space in the content, while a Lightbox is clicking an image to expand it full screen. The two can be used together, such as scrolling through a slider and clicking to expand an image of interest.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/slider">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>All 8 BlogKub Blogger theme templates and how to choose the right one</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/templates</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/templates</guid>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>An overview of BlogKub&apos;s 8 Blogger theme templates: Personal, Travel, Tech, Classic + Sidebar, Magazine, Company, Online Course, and Product Review, who each suits, what blocks and features they include, and how to choose the one that fits your site.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/templates.png" type="image/png" length="327449"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/templates.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/templates.png" alt="All 8 BlogKub Blogger theme templates and how to choose the right one" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>All 8 BlogKub Blogger theme templates and how to choose the right one</h1>
<p class="lead">Starting a site with a template that fits your kind of site saves time and gets better results. BlogKub has 8 templates designed for different kinds of site, each with blocks and features installed to match. This article introduces all 8, who they suit, what they include, and how to choose the one that fits your site.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 16 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 11 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> BlogKub has <strong>8 templates</strong>: <strong>Personal Blog, Travel Blog, Tech Blog, Classic + Sidebar</strong> (blog category), <strong>Magazine</strong> (news/magazine), <strong>Company</strong> (business), <strong>Online Course</strong> (education), and <strong>Product Review</strong> (affiliate). Each installs the blocks and features suited to that kind of site automatically. Every template is customizable, and supports SEO/schema and responsive design out of the box.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/templates.png" aria-label="View the BlogKub Blogger theme templates overview at full size">
    <img alt="Examples of 4 BlogKub templates: Personal Blog, Tech Blog, Product Review, Online Course" title="The BlogKub Blogger theme templates overview" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/templates.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1683" data-original-height="1277" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">Examples of BlogKub templates: Personal, Tech, Product Review, Online Course (of 8 total).</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>Why choosing the right template matters</h2>
<p>A template is not just a "look", it is the starting point that sets what structure and features your site has. <strong>Choosing a template that matches your kind of site gives you the right elements from the start</strong>, without assembling them yourself. For example, if you build a review site, starting with the review template that has a rating bar and Pros/Cons box is faster than starting from scratch and adding each piece.</p>
<p>In BlogKub, choosing a template <strong>installs the blocks and features suited to that kind of site automatically</strong>. Then you customize the text, colors, fonts, and turn features on or off by dragging, with no coding. A template is therefore a "good starting point" that gets you to the site you want faster. Let us look at who each of the 8 suits.</p>

<h2>Blog category: Personal, Travel, Tech, Classic + Sidebar</h2>
<h3>1. Personal Blog</h3>
<p>A personal blog template emphasizing warmth and approachability, good for people who want to share stories, thoughts, or general knowledge. It has a welcoming <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/hero">Hero</a> with a circular profile image, and a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/postgrid">post grid</a> that shows content beautifully. A good starting point for general bloggers who want a good-looking site without complexity.</p>
<h3>2. Travel Blog</h3>
<p>A travel blog template emphasizing images and atmosphere, good for people writing place reviews, travel journals, or destination guides. The design favors showing beautiful photos, pairing well with an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/slider">image slider</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/lightbox">Lightbox</a>, making travel articles attractive and telling stories through images fully.</p>
<h3>3. Tech Blog</h3>
<p>A tech blog template that looks modern and clean, good for people writing technology articles, coding tutorials, or gadget reviews. It pairs neatly with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/copycode">copy code button</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/callout">Callout box</a>, suited to content with code and technical information.</p>
<h3>4. Classic + Sidebar</h3>
<p>A classic blog template with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sidebar">sidebar</a> beside the content, good for blogs with many articles and categories, because the sidebar aids navigation by category, search, and an archive. It is a format readers are familiar with and suits sites focused on content discovery.</p>

<h2>News/magazine category: Magazine</h2>
<h3>5. Magazine</h3>
<p>A magazine/news style template emphasizing professional media-style content layout. The highlight is a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/featured">featured article</a> pinned with a label, so you choose which story should be the big headline. It suits sites with varied, frequently updated content, such as news sites, article collections, or sites that want to look like serious media. Arranging a headline with secondary articles creates a hierarchy that makes the homepage interesting.</p>

<h2>Business category: Company</h2>
<h3>6. Company</h3>
<p>A template for a company or business site, emphasizing credibility and communicating services. It has a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/hero">Hero</a> that can include a secondary button (such as Contact us), <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/columns">feature columns</a> to show service highlights, and an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/about">About block</a> that can include stats. It suits businesses that want a professional-looking site to describe services and generate leads through a clear <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cta">CTA</a>.</p>

<h2>Education category: Online Course</h2>
<h3>7. Online Course</h3>
<p>A template for an online course or education site, emphasizing persuading people to enroll. It has a Hero that can include a feature list (chips) of the course, a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cta">CTA</a> that can include student stats, and an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/about">instructor block</a> that adds credibility. It suits people selling courses, teaching online, or building an educational site that wants to turn visitors into students.</p>

<h2>Affiliate category: Product Review</h2>
<h3>8. Product Review</h3>
<p>A template for product review and affiliate sites, designed to help readers decide to buy. The highlights are a Hero with a review rating bar, a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/proscons">Pros/Cons box and summary score</a> to summarize the pros and cons, and an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/about">author block</a> that can include a verification badge. It suits people building review sites to earn from affiliate, who want to present reviews credibly and lead readers toward a purchase.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to choose and use a template</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Choose a template by kind of site.</strong> Pick 1 of 8 templates that best matches your kind of site, and the system installs suitable blocks and features.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Customize blocks and features.</strong> Adjust the text, colors, fonts, reorder blocks by dragging, and turn features on or off as you like.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Check on every screen.</strong> Open the live site to confirm the template displays correctly and responsively on both desktop and mobile.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Which template to choose: a short guide</h2>
<p>If you are still unsure, ask yourself what your site is "about" and "what you want readers to do". A site sharing personal stories suits Personal, a site where images are the star suits Travel, a technical site suits Tech, a site with many articles suits Classic + Sidebar, a news site suits Magazine, a business site suits Company, a teaching site suits Online Course, and a review site earning revenue suits Product Review.</p>
<p>The upside is that you do not have to decide permanently from the start. You can try different templates in BlogKub before exporting to use, and customize everything as you like. A template is just a good starting point, not a fixed frame. Importantly, every template ships with SEO structure, schema, and responsive design out of the box, so whichever you choose, you get a site that is search-friendly and displays well on every device as a foundation.</p>

<h2>Every template has the same good foundation</h2>
<p>Even though each template has its own design and specific features, all of them share the same quality foundation: a search-friendly structure, schema data that helps the site display well in search, responsive design that renders well on every device, and experience-raising features like <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode</a> and a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a> that every template can enable.</p>
<p>That means choosing a template is about "kind and starting point" more than about the underlying quality. You do not have to worry that choosing wrong gets you an inferior site, because all of them are built on the same standard. So choose by the kind closest to your site, then customize with confidence. To dive into each feature installed with a template, see all the guides in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub Learning Center</a>, and if you are just starting a blog, read the guide to <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/start-blogger-blog">starting a free Blogger blog from scratch to a beautiful theme</a> to lay a complete foundation first.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>You chose the wrong-kind template</h3>
<p>No problem. You can choose another template in BlogKub before exporting. Changing the template installs the blocks and features suited to the new kind.</p>
<h3>You want a feature from another template</h3>
<p>Most features can be turned on or off in every template by adding a block. Even though some specialized elements (such as the rating bar in the Hero) are in specific templates, the basic features are available generally.</p>
<h3>You customized and want to revert</h3>
<p>You can always start over from the template. Customizing builds on the template and does not destroy the underlying structure.</p>
<h3>Not sure whether the template supports SEO</h3>
<p>Every template ships with SEO structure and schema out of the box, so it is friendly to every search engine.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Choose the template closest to your kind of site as a starting point, then customize further.</li>
  <li>Use the template's specialized features (such as review scores, course highlights) to match the site's goal.</li>
  <li>Try several templates before exporting to find the one that best fits your content and brand.</li>
  <li>Adjust the text, colors, and fonts to reflect the site's identity, do not leave them at default.</li>
  <li>Study the feature guides in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">Learning Center</a> to use every feature of the template fully.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>BlogKub has 8 templates designed for different kinds of site: Personal, Travel, Tech, Classic + Sidebar for blogs, Magazine for news/magazine, Company for business, Online Course for education, and Product Review for affiliate. Each installs the blocks and features suited to that kind automatically, so you start fast and on target. Choosing a template is about the kind and the starting point, because all of them are built on the same standard for SEO, schema, and responsiveness. So choose by the kind closest to your site, try several before exporting, and customize everything with no coding. When you choose a fitting template and use its features fully, you get a Blogger site that is beautiful, easy to use, and search-friendly from day one.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>How many templates does BlogKub have?</summary><p>There are 8 templates: Personal Blog, Travel Blog, Tech Blog, Classic + Sidebar, Magazine, Company, Online Course, and Product Review, covering blogs, news/magazine, business, education, and affiliate.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I change the template later?</summary><p>Yes. You can pick and try other templates in BlogKub. Choosing a template installs the blocks and features suited to that kind of site automatically, then you customize further before exporting to use.</p></details>
<details><summary>What is different between the templates?</summary><p>They differ in design, block structure, and the features installed to match the kind of site. For example, the review template has a rating bar and Pros/Cons box, the course template has features and stats, and the news template has a pinned featured article.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can every template be customized?</summary><p>Yes. Every template lets you adjust text, colors, fonts, and turn features on or off by dragging, with no coding. A template is a good starting point that installs suitable blocks and features, then you customize as you like.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do all templates support SEO and mobile?</summary><p>Yes. Every template ships with SEO structure, schema, and responsive design out of the box, rendering well on both desktop and mobile, with basic elements friendly to search engines.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/templates">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build an AEO summary box in Blogger, so AI cites you</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add an AEO (Answer Engine Optimization) summary box at the top of Blogger posts with BlogKub, pulled from the Search Description with no AI API, so Google AI Overviews, ChatGPT, and Perplexity cite your content.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/aeo.png" type="image/png" length="302655"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/aeo.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/aeo.png" alt="How to build an AEO summary box in Blogger, so AI cites you" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build an AEO summary box in a Blogger theme, so AI and Google cite you</h1>
<p class="lead">In an age where more people ask AI their questions, having an "answer summary box" at the top of an article is one of the most powerful ways to get your content cited. This article teaches you how to add an AEO summary box to a Blogger theme with BlogKub in detail, without any API or AI.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 10 minute read &nbsp; Level: Intermediate</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>AEO Summary Box</strong> block in BlogKub, set the heading and style, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. From there, <strong>fill in the "Search Description" on every post</strong> as a short 1 to 2 sentence answer summary. The box pulls that text and shows it at the top of the article, clearly for both readers and AI, with speakable markup, and needs no AI API at all.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/aeo.png" aria-label="View the AEO (Answer Engine Optimization) summary box image at full size">
    <img alt="An AEO summary box at the top of a Blogger article showing a short answer summary from the Search Description" title="The AEO (Answer Engine Optimization) summary box at the top of an article" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/aeo.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1480" data-original-height="238" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">The AEO summary box at the top of the article, pulling text from the Search Description so readers and AI see the answer immediately.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What AEO is, and how it differs from SEO</h2>
<p><strong>AEO (Answer Engine Optimization) is tuning your content so "answer engines" can pull it straight into their answer to a user.</strong> Unlike traditional SEO, which aims to rank a link and wait for a click, AEO aims to get your answer to appear directly in answer boxes such as Google AI Overviews, ChatGPT Search, Perplexity, or a featured snippet. Behavior has changed, and many people now get a complete answer right on the search page without even clicking through.</p>
<p>The heart of AEO is "answer first, explain later". AI tools favor content that gives a clear, concise answer in a place that is easy to find. A summary box at the top of the article is therefore the most on-point AEO tool, because it places the main answer right at the top in a form that both people and machines understand immediately.</p>

<h2>How BlogKub's AEO summary box works (no API needed)</h2>
<p>A common misconception is thinking you have to connect an AI to summarize the article. In reality, <strong>BlogKub's summary box pulls its text straight from the "Search Description" you fill in on the post</strong>, which is the same value Blogger uses to build the meta description. The upside is that you write the summary yourself, so you control quality and accuracy 100%, pay no API cost, and never risk AI inventing something wrong.</p>
<p>Technically, this box reads <code>data:view.description</code>, which holds the post's Search Description on a single article page. If a post has none filled in, the system trims the first paragraph of the content and shows it automatically on the server side, so it can never be an empty box. The box also carries the class <code>.qt-aeo-summary</code>, paired with a SpeakableSpecification in the structured data, which tells Google and voice assistants which part is the readable summary.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the AEO summary box in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li id="step2"><strong>Add the AEO Summary Box block.</strong> Many templates install it already. If yours does not, open the left library, category "Article &amp; UX", and drag the "AEO Summary Box" block in. The system places it at the top of the article automatically.</li>
  <li><strong>Set the box heading and style.</strong> Click the block to set a heading, such as "Summary" or "Short answer", and pick a box style (card / highlight / minimal) to match your site's design.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Fill in the Search Description on every post.</strong> In the Blogger post editor, open the settings panel on the right → "Search Description", and write a short 1 to 2 sentence summary of the article's main answer (about 40 to 60 words). This is the most important step.</li>
  <li id="step5"><strong>Check the display.</strong> Open the actual article page and confirm the box shows the text you wrote, not a first paragraph the system trimmed. If you see the first paragraph, it means the description is not filled in.</li>
</ol>
<p class="note">The AEO box is placed in the post's includable and wrapped in a <code>data:view.isSingleItem</code> condition, so it appears only on single article pages, keeping the homepage and list pages clean.</p>

<h2>How to write an AEO summary that AI will cite</h2>
<p>The quality of the box text is everything. Follow these principles when writing the Search Description:</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Answer the main question in the first sentence.</strong> Do not preamble, give the answer right away. For an article on "how to soft-boil an egg", open with "A soft-boiled egg takes 6 minutes in boiling water, then straight into cold water", not "The soft-boiled egg is a popular dish...".</li>
  <li><strong>Keep it 40 to 60 words.</strong> Long enough to have substance, short enough for AI to lift the whole thing. A summary that runs too long gets truncated and loses the point.</li>
  <li><strong>Include the keywords and numbers that are the answer.</strong> Numbers, durations, steps, or a specific conclusion help AI be confident this is the answer.</li>
  <li><strong>Write it as complete sentences,</strong> not strung-together keywords, because AI and voice assistants read aloud straight from this text.</li>
  <li><strong>Do not just repeat the title.</strong> Add substance the title does not state, to increase value.</li>
</ul>

<h2>AEO vs meta description vs featured snippet</h2>
<p>These three are related but not the same. Understanding the difference helps you use the summary box to its full potential.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>The meta description</strong> is text hidden in the code to show under a search result. Readers do not see it on the page.</li>
  <li><strong>The AEO summary box</strong> takes that same text and "shows it on the page", clearly for both readers and AI at the top of the article, with speakable markup.</li>
  <li><strong>The featured snippet / AI Overviews</strong> is the result Google or AI pulls the answer into, and a well-written summary box improves the odds of being chosen.</li>
</ul>
<p>Put simply, the AEO box is the bridge that makes your Search Description do two jobs at once: it gives a new reader the overview immediately, and it helps AI understand what the article answers.</p>

<h2>The AEO box with GEO and voice assistants</h2>
<p>GEO (Generative Engine Optimization) is getting your content cited in the answers of generative AI. The summary box plays a big role because it places the answer in the position and format language models like, which is short, clear, and factual. When ChatGPT Search or Perplexity reads a page, they look for the section that summarizes the point best to lift into an answer with a citation, and the box at the top of the article is the first thing scanned.</p>
<p>On top of that, the speakable markup tied to the box helps voice assistants like Google Assistant choose to read this summary when a user asks by voice, making your content more reachable in contexts without a screen.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The box shows the first paragraph instead of the summary you intended</h3>
<p>It means that post has no Search Description filled in, so the system trims the first paragraph and shows it instead. The fix is to open the post and fill in the description. This is the most common cause.</p>
<h3>The box does not show at all</h3>
<p>Check that you are viewing a single article page (not the homepage or a label page), because the box shows only on article pages, and check that the AEO block is still in the theme structure.</p>
<h3>The box content is too long or too short</h3>
<p>Adjust the post's Search Description to land in the 40 to 60 word range, which is comfortable to read and well suited to being lifted into an answer.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Fill in the Search Description on every post, never leave it blank, because it is both the meta description and the AEO box content in one.</li>
  <li>Place the box at the top of the article above the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a>, so it is the first thing people and AI see (BlogKub positions it automatically).</li>
  <li>Write answer-first summaries, with specific numbers or conclusions, and avoid preamble.</li>
  <li>Pair it with an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/faq">FAQ</a> in the article, so you have both a main summary and sub-questions AI can cite from several angles.</li>
  <li>Review and update the summary when you edit the article, so the answer always matches the current content.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Example AEO summaries: well written vs missed</h2>
<p>Theory can feel abstract, so look at a real example to see the difference between a summary AI wants to cite and one that gets overlooked. Say the article is "How often should I water my houseplants".</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Missed:</strong> "Houseplants are something many people love. This article walks through tips for keeping plants beautiful." This sentence answers nothing, it is just a preamble, so AI has nothing to pick up.</li>
  <li><strong>Well written:</strong> "Most houseplants should be watered 1 to 2 times a week, when the top 2 to 3 cm of soil has dried out. Succulents like cacti need less, while large-leaf plants need water more often." It answers immediately, has numbers and conditions, and AI can lift it straight into an answer.</li>
</ul>
<p>Notice the difference is not length, but "answers or does not answer". A good summary gives a usable answer from the first sentence. This is the heart of writing an AEO summary, and it is what separates an article cited in the answer box from one that gets scrolled past.</p>

<h2>Pair the AEO box with an FAQ to cover multiple questions</h2>
<p>The summary box answers one main question well, but a single article usually has several sub-questions people wonder about. Adding an FAQ section helps here, because each question and answer in the FAQ is also an answer-first unit AI can cite. Using both a summary box at the top and an FAQ at the end covers both the main and the secondary questions, expanding the space where your content can be cited.</p>
<p>Importantly, BlogKub's FAQ also embeds FAQPage schema automatically, so both the summary box and the FAQ reinforce each other, both as answer-first content and as structured data that search engines understand.</p>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The AEO summary box is one of the most worthwhile features for the AI search era, because it makes the Search Description you already write work harder, both helping readers see the answer immediately and opening the door for Google AI Overviews, ChatGPT, and Perplexity to cite your content. What you need to do is add the AEO block in BlogKub and have the discipline to write a good short answer summary on every post, without relying on any API or AI. To see the whole SEO picture from the basics to AI Search, read the guide to <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/blog/blogger-seo">Blogger SEO and ranking on Google's first page</a>.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Does the AEO summary box need an AI API?</summary><p>No API or AI is needed. The box pulls its text straight from the 'Search Description' you fill in on the post (the same value Blogger uses for the meta description). If a post has none, the system trims the first paragraph and shows it automatically on the server side.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is AEO different from the meta description?</summary><p>Both come from the same Search Description, but the meta description is hidden in the code for search results, while the AEO box shows that text clearly to readers and AI at the top of the article, with speakable markup, making it easier for answer engines to pick up.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the AEO box really help me appear in AI Overviews?</summary><p>It improves the odds, because AI Search favors content that answers clearly from the start. A well-written answer-first summary is a spot AI often cites. But nobody can guarantee a 100% appearance, since it also depends on overall content quality.</p></details>
<details><summary>Why is my summary box empty or showing the first paragraph?</summary><p>Because that post has no Search Description filled in. When it is blank, the system trims the first paragraph and shows that instead. The fix is to open the post and fill in the Search Description on every article.</p></details>
<details><summary>Which pages show the AEO box?</summary><p>It shows only on single item pages, at the top of the article above the content. It does not appear on the homepage or list pages, so it matches where readers and AI most want a summary.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build anchor links (copy a link to a heading) in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/anchorlink</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/anchorlink</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add anchor links to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, letting readers copy a link straight to the H2/H3 heading they want. The system generates ids automatically and supports Thai, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/anchorlink.png" type="image/png" length="336125"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/anchorlink.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/anchorlink.png" alt="How to build anchor links (copy a link to a heading) in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build anchor links (copy a link to a heading) in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">In a long article, sending the whole-page link and making the other person scroll to find a heading is annoying. Anchor links solve this by letting readers copy a link that points straight to the heading they want. This article teaches you how to add it to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, which generates ids automatically and supports Thai.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Anchor Link</strong> block in BlogKub, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. The system adds a link icon to every H2/H3/H4 heading, generates an <code>id</code> automatically from the text (Thai supported, no clashes), and when a reader clicks it <strong>copies a link straight to that heading</strong> to share a precise spot in a long article at once.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/anchorlink.png" aria-label="View the anchor link icon on an article heading at full size">
    <img alt="A heading in a Blogger article with an anchor link icon on the left for copying a link to the heading" title="The anchor link icon on an article heading" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/anchorlink.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1440" data-original-height="568" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A link icon appears beside the heading. Click it to copy a link straight to that heading for sharing.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What an anchor link is, and what problem it solves</h2>
<p><strong>An anchor link (heading link) is a link that points straight to a specific heading on the page.</strong> When you open that link, the browser scrolls to the specified heading immediately, instead of opening at the top of the page and leaving the reader to scroll and find it. The technique relies on an <code>id</code> attached to the heading and a <code>#</code> in the link to say where to jump.</p>
<p>The clearest problem anchor links solve is sharing content in a long article. Imagine a 3,000-word guide with 15 headings. When a friend asks a question you already answered in heading 9, you want to send a link that takes them straight there, not a bare page link with "scroll down to the section on...". Anchor links make sharing precise and professional.</p>

<h2>How BlogKub's anchor links work</h2>
<p>When you add this block, the system embeds a script that scans every <code>H2</code>, <code>H3</code>, and <code>H4</code> heading in the article content and does two things automatically. First, it <strong>generates an id for the heading</strong> if it does not have one, and second, it <strong>adds a small link icon</strong> beside the heading. When the reader hovers over the heading, the icon appears faintly, and clicking it copies the heading's full link to the clipboard, while updating the URL in the address bar to match.</p>
<p>The refined part is <strong>generating ids without clashes</strong>. The system converts the heading text into a usable id string (keeping Thai and English characters, turning spaces into dashes), and if an article has several headings with the same name, it appends a number so they do not collide, such as <code>summary</code>, <code>summary-2</code>, so each heading's link always points to the right spot.</p>
<p>On mobile, where there is no hover, the system shows the link icon faintly beside the heading anyway, so mobile users can tap to use it and it is not missed for lack of a mouse.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add anchor links in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the Anchor Link block.</strong> Open the left block library, category "Article &amp; UX", and drag the "Anchor Link" block in to enable it across the theme.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Test on a heading.</strong> Open a live article, hover over a heading until the link icon appears (on mobile you already see a faint icon), then click it to copy the link.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Check the jump to the heading.</strong> Open a new tab and paste the copied link, confirming the page scrolls to the correct heading immediately.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Anchor links vs a table of contents: the difference, and using both</h2>
<p>Many people confuse anchor links with a table of contents, because both concern in-page navigation and use heading <code>id</code>s, but their roles differ.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Table of contents:</strong> a combined list of links to all headings placed at the top of the article, letting readers see the overview and jump to a section of interest from one place. An "in-page navigation" tool.</li>
  <li><strong>Anchor link:</strong> an icon on each heading that lets readers "copy that heading's link" to share externally. A "share a precise spot" tool for others.</li>
</ul>
<p>The two do not compete, they complement each other neatly, and because both use heading ids, enabling both features makes your article's navigation system complete. If you have not set up a table of contents, we recommend reading how in the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents guide</a> to use it alongside anchor links.</p>

<h2>Anchor links, SEO, and content discovery</h2>
<p>Having an <code>id</code> on every heading benefits SEO more than many people think, because it enables "deep links" to a section of the page, which is the basis of features like Google showing jump-to links to the section matching a query in the results. When your headings have clear, meaningful ids, the chance that a sub-section is linked directly increases.</p>
<p>Moreover, when a reader shares a deep link to a useful heading, whoever clicks in finds the answer immediately without scrolling to find it. This good experience raises the chance they read on and come back to your site. Used with an answer-first <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo">AEO</a> summary box and a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/breadcrumb">breadcrumb</a> that helps convey the site structure, your content becomes both easy to discover and easy to navigate.</p>

<h2>Why Thai-supporting ids matter</h2>
<p>Most Thai blogs have Thai headings, so generating ids that support Thai characters is necessary. If the system dropped Thai characters to make English-only ids, many Thai headings would end up with empty or duplicate ids and broken links. BlogKub's system is therefore designed to keep Thai characters in id generation and turn spaces into dashes, so links to Thai headings genuinely work.</p>
<p>The result is that whether your headings are in Thai, English, or a mix, anchor links generate correct, non-clashing ids automatically. So you never have to set ids yourself in HTML view heading by heading, a tedious and error-prone task if done by hand.</p>

<h2>Examples of using anchor links in different kinds of blog</h2>
<p>Anchor links are especially valuable for long content with many sections. Look at some examples.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Guide and how-to blogs:</strong> readers or a team can share a link straight to a problematic step, such as sending a link to the "How to fix X" heading to a colleague at once.</li>
  <li><strong>FAQ collection blogs:</strong> each question is a heading, so when someone asks the same question, you send a link to that answer, saving time and looking systematic.</li>
  <li><strong>Long review blogs:</strong> readers share a link to the "Pros and cons" or "Price and value" heading with a friend deciding to buy.</li>
  <li><strong>Technical docs and manuals:</strong> deep links to a specific section are a standard of good documentation, helping cross-reference precisely.</li>
</ul>
<p>The common thread is "long content that needs to point to a specific section". The longer and more valuable the article, the more anchor links help it get shared and used.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The link icon does not appear</h3>
<p>Check that you added the anchor link block and Exported again. The icon appears on hover over a heading on desktop, while on mobile you see a faint icon beside the heading. If you see nothing at all, confirm the heading uses an actual H2/H3/H4 tag.</p>
<h3>Clicking does not scroll to the heading</h3>
<p>Check that the copied link has a <code>#</code> followed by the heading's id. If you paste the link in an app that strips the <code>#</code>, the jump will not work. Try pasting in the browser directly to test.</p>
<h3>The Thai heading id looks strange</h3>
<p>It is normal for a Thai id to contain Thai characters, which genuinely work. The system is designed to keep Thai characters and avoid clashes, so do not worry about the id's shape as long as the link jumps to the right heading.</p>
<h3>Headings where you set an id yourself</h3>
<p>If you set an id on a heading yourself in HTML view, the system respects the existing id and does not overwrite it, so links you already shared keep working and do not break.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Name headings clearly and meaningfully, because the id is generated from the heading text. Good headings make the link easier to read.</li>
  <li>Enable anchor links alongside the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a>, so long articles have both in-page navigation and precise-spot sharing.</li>
  <li>Test copying and jumping on both desktop and mobile after setup.</li>
  <li>Use it with the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/copycode">copy code button</a> in tech articles, so readers can both jump to a heading and copy the code in that section conveniently.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>Anchor links are a small feature that makes your long articles much easier to share and more systematic. With BlogKub, you just add the anchor link block once and Export it, and the system adds a link icon to every H2/H3/H4 heading, generates ids automatically with Thai support and no clashes. Readers can copy a link to the heading they want at once, sharing a precise spot, supporting content discovery, and pairing with a table of contents for complete navigation, without you setting a single id yourself.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>What is an anchor link?</summary><p>An anchor link is a link that points straight to a specific heading on the page. When opened, the page scrolls to that heading immediately, letting you share a precise spot in a long article instead of sending the whole page and making the recipient scroll to find it.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do I have to set an id on each heading myself?</summary><p>No. The system generates an id for every heading automatically from the heading text, and keeps ids from clashing. If there are headings with the same name, it appends a number so they do not collide.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do anchor links support Thai?</summary><p>Yes. The system generates ids from Thai heading text, keeping the Thai characters and turning spaces into dashes, so links to Thai headings work correctly.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is an anchor link different from a table of contents?</summary><p>A table of contents is a combined list of links to all headings at the top of the article to aid in-page navigation, while an anchor link is an icon on each heading that lets readers copy that heading's link to share. The two complement each other and can share heading ids.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do anchor links help SEO?</summary><p>Indirectly. Having an id on a heading enables deep links to a section of the page, which supports Google showing jump-to results or links to a relevant section, and readers sharing deep links widens access to your content.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/anchorlink">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add a Back to Top button in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/back-to-top</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/back-to-top</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a floating Back to Top button to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: it appears when readers scroll down, scrolls smoothly to the top, lets you pick the left or right side, stays lightweight, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/back-to-top.png" type="image/png" length="322683"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/back-to-top.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/back-to-top.png" alt="How to add a Back to Top button in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add a Back to Top button in a Blogger theme: a step by step guide</h1>
<p class="lead">A small floating button that carries readers back to the top in a single tap is the kind of detail that makes long articles far more comfortable to use, especially on mobile. This article shows you how to add a Back to Top button to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, one that appears as you scroll down and scrolls up smoothly, along with the UX reasoning and the settings.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Back to Top</strong> block in BlogKub (many templates already include it), choose the bottom-right or bottom-left corner, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. You get a <strong>floating button that appears when you scroll down and scrolls smoothly back to the top when clicked</strong>. It uses a tiny script, does not affect speed, and makes long articles more comfortable to use, especially on mobile.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/back-to-top.png" aria-label="View the floating Back to Top button at full size">
    <img alt="A floating Back to Top button in the bottom-right corner of a Blogger article, a round shape with an upward arrow" title="The floating Back to Top button" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/back-to-top.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1520" data-original-height="840" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A Back to Top button that appears when you scroll down, click it to scroll smoothly back to the very top.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a Back to Top button is, and why it matters</h2>
<p><strong>A Back to Top button is a floating button, usually in the lower corner of the screen, that returns the reader to the very top of the page the moment they click it.</strong> The button stays hidden while the reader is near the top, and appears once they have scrolled down a fair amount, so it does not get in the way when it is not yet needed.</p>
<p>Its value is clearest with long articles. When a reader has scrolled all the way to the end and wants to get back to the table of contents, the menu, or a heading up top, scrolling back by hand a little at a time is tedious and tiring, especially on mobile where a long article stretches far down the screen. The Back to Top button solves this by offering a shortcut back to the start in a single tap.</p>

<h2>The small details that separate a good button from an ordinary one</h2>
<p>A Back to Top button may look like a basic feature, but the details of doing it well matter a great deal to how it feels. BlogKub pays attention to these three points.</p>
<h3>1. Appears only when needed</h3>
<p>The button does not show while you are at the top of the page, because there is no reason to go up when you are already up there. It appears with a soft transition once the reader has scrolled down a certain distance, so the button never distracts the eye unnecessarily.</p>
<h3>2. Scrolls up smoothly</h3>
<p>When clicked, the page scrolls back to the top with a smooth scroll rather than jumping instantly. This kind of motion helps the reader sense the direction and avoid confusion about what just happened, unlike an instant snap that costs them their sense of position.</p>
<h3>3. Choose a side so it does not clash with other buttons</h3>
<p>Because a site may have several floating buttons, such as a dark mode toggle, the Back to Top button can be set to the right or left side, preventing an overlap that leads to mis-taps.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the Back to Top button in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the Back to Top block.</strong> Many templates already include it. If yours does not, open the left library, the "Article &amp; UX" category, and drag the "Back to Top" block in.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Choose the button position.</strong> Click the block to set the button to the bottom-right or bottom-left corner, picking the side that does not overlap other floating buttons on the site.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test the scrolling.</strong> Open a long article, scroll down to see the button appear, then click it to confirm the page scrolls back to the top smoothly.</li>
</ol>

<h2>The Back to Top button alongside other reading features</h2>
<p>The Back to Top button pairs perfectly with other reading aids. Used together with a table of contents at the start of the article, readers can click Back to Top to return to the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a> and jump quickly to another section. Used together with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/progress">reading progress bar</a>, readers get both a position indicator and a shortcut back to the start, making navigation in a long article complete.</p>
<p>The one caution is that if you enable several floating buttons at once, such as Back to Top, a dark mode toggle, and a share bar, you should position them so they do not overlap, choosing left and right sides appropriately, so each button is easy to tap and not confusing.</p>

<h2>Back to Top vs other ways to navigate back up</h2>
<p>Besides the Back to Top button, there are other ways to help readers return to the top. Understanding the pros and cons of each helps you choose what fits your site.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Sticky header:</strong> the menu stays fixed at the top at all times, so the menu is always reachable, but it takes up screen space, especially on mobile, and it does not actually take you back to the very "top" of the article.</li>
  <li><strong>Table of contents at the start of the article:</strong> it helps jump to a heading, but the reader has to scroll back up to find the table of contents first, which loops back to the original problem.</li>
  <li><strong>Back to Top button:</strong> takes no space when unused (it stays hidden), appears when needed, and returns you to the top in a single tap, making it the most balanced choice for long articles.</li>
</ul>
<p>The best approach is often to use them together, for example a sticky header for the main menu plus a Back to Top button for a quick return to the start of the article. The two complement each other without overlapping.</p>

<h2>The Back to Top button on the modern web</h2>
<p>If you look at leading article sites, you will see the Back to Top button has become a standard element of long-form pages. The reason is not just following a trend, but that reading habits on the web have changed. People read on mobile more, and articles have grown longer to answer questions thoroughly and stay search-friendly. As articles get longer, the need for a shortcut back to the top only rises.</p>
<p>Small details like this are what separate a site that "cares about readers" from one that merely has content. Because BlogKub builds a carefully made Back to Top button into the theme, your Blogger blog looks and works on the same level as a professional site, without you having to write any script yourself.</p>

<h2>The Back to Top button, SEO, and user experience</h2>
<p>The Back to Top button is not a direct ranking factor, but it helps indirectly through a better user experience. When readers can navigate a long article comfortably, they are more likely to keep exploring the content, open the table of contents, or go back to reread a section of interest, instead of leaving because they feel stuck at the bottom of an endless page. Those behaviors reflect user satisfaction, which is a positive signal.</p>
<p>Importantly, BlogKub builds this button with a small script that loads no external files and does not affect site speed, so you gain the UX benefit without trading away your Core Web Vitals scores, the same philosophy as the theme's other features.</p>

<p>Another angle not to overlook is how readers feel. A button that appears smoothly and carries them back up fluidly creates a small good impression that accumulates into an image of a site that is polished and attentive to detail, something readers remember and that makes the site feel more trustworthy without their realizing it.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The button does not appear</h3>
<p>It may be because the page content is too short to scroll, so the button does not show. Try testing on an article that is long enough, or check that you added the Back to Top block to the theme.</p>
<h3>The button overlaps another floating button</h3>
<p>If the Back to Top button overlaps the dark mode toggle or the share bar, move the button to the other side in the block settings.</p>
<h3>It snaps up instantly instead of scrolling smoothly</h3>
<p>Normally BlogKub's button scrolls smoothly. If it snaps instantly, it may be because a browser or system setting has motion turned off (reduced motion), which is the correct behavior for accessibility.</p>

<p>All of this reflects the idea that a good feature does not have to be flashy or complex, it just has to be in the right place at the right time. The Back to Top button is a clear example of a quiet feature that works when the reader needs it and steps out of the way when they do not, which is the heart of design that truly cares about users.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Enable the Back to Top button on sites with long articles, where it is most useful, especially for mobile readers.</li>
  <li>Choose a side that does not overlap other floating buttons such as the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode toggle</a>, to avoid mis-taps.</li>
  <li>Use it together with a table of contents and a reading progress bar for complete navigation in long articles.</li>
  <li>Test on a real phone, since that is the device where this button is used most.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The Back to Top button is a small detail that genuinely raises the comfort of reading long articles, especially on mobile where scrolling back by hand is tiring. With BlogKub you simply add the Back to Top block, choose the position you like, and Export it to use. You get a button that appears when needed, scrolls up smoothly, stays light on speed, and paired with a table of contents and a reading progress bar, your long articles become easy to navigate and comfortable to use at a professional level.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Is the Back to Top button always visible?</summary><p>No, it is not always shown. The button stays hidden while the reader is at the top of the page, and gradually appears once they scroll down a fair amount, so it does not clutter the screen when it is not needed.</p></details>
<details><summary>When I click the button, does it jump or scroll up smoothly?</summary><p>It scrolls up smoothly (smooth scroll) rather than jumping instantly, so the reader senses the direction of movement and it feels fluid and natural.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I choose the button position?</summary><p>Yes. You can set the floating button to sit in the bottom-right or bottom-left corner in the block settings, so it does not overlap other floating buttons such as the dark mode toggle.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the Back to Top button slow the site down?</summary><p>No, it does not slow things down. The button uses a small script that watches the scroll position and scrolls up when clicked. It loads no external files and does not affect Core Web Vitals.</p></details>
<details><summary>Is a Back to Top button necessary on mobile?</summary><p>It is very useful on mobile, because long articles run far down a narrow screen, so scrolling back to the top by hand is tiring. This button lets readers return to the top in a single tap.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/back-to-top">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a bookmark (save articles for later) in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/bookmark</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/bookmark</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a bookmark button that lets readers save articles for later in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, stored in the browser with no login, with a counter and a saved list, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/bookmark.png" type="image/png" length="333891"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/bookmark.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/bookmark.png" alt="How to build a bookmark (save articles for later) in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a bookmark (save articles for later) in a Blogger theme</h1>
<p class="lead">Often a reader finds an interesting article but has no time to read it right then. Letting them save it for later in one click helps draw them back to the site. This article teaches you how to add a bookmark to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, stored in the browser with no login, along with the reasoning and settings.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Bookmark</strong> block in BlogKub, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. Readers tap the bookmark icon on a card or within an article to <strong>save it for later, stored in the browser with no login</strong>, with a counter and a saved list to open, helping draw readers back to the site and deepen their bond.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/bookmark.png" aria-label="View the bookmark button on an article card at full size">
    <img alt="A bookmark icon on a Blogger article card for saving for later, the first card in the saved state" title="The bookmark button on an article card" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/bookmark.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1520" data-original-height="594" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A bookmark icon in the top-right of the card. Tap it to save for later (the left card is the saved state).</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a bookmark is, and why a blog should have one</h2>
<p><strong>A bookmark is a feature that lets readers tap to save an interesting article to come back and read later</strong>, without remembering the URL or searching again. The reader just taps a bookmark or heart icon, and that article is stored in a saved list, ready to reopen any time.</p>
<p>The reason this feature is valuable is real reader behavior. Many people find a good article during a break or while scrolling quickly but have no time to read it properly. With no way to save it, they close it and forget. But if saving is easy, they come back to read it and return to your site. A bookmark is therefore the bridge that turns "interested but not free now" into "actually comes back to read".</p>

<h2>How BlogKub's bookmark works (no login)</h2>
<p>The key highlight is that <strong>readers do not need to sign up or log in</strong>, because the bookmark stores data in the reader's own browser. When they tap the save icon, that article is added to the saved list at once, with a counter showing how many are stored. Readers open the list to view and go back to read the saved articles anytime.</p>
<p>The bookmark button can appear in several spots for convenience, on the article cards in list pages, and within the article itself. When tapped, the icon changes state to clearly show it is saved, and tapping again removes it. All of this works reader-side with no membership system or back-end database.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add a bookmark in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the Bookmark block.</strong> Open the left library, category "Article &amp; UX", and drag the "Bookmark" block in to embed the icon and save system in the theme.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Test saving.</strong> Open the site, tap the bookmark icon on an article card or within an article, then check that the counter increases and the article appears in the saved list.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Check persistence after refresh.</strong> Refresh the page to confirm the saved list is still there, because the data is stored in the reader's browser.</li>
</ol>

<h2>The theme's bookmark vs the browser's bookmark</h2>
<p>Many people wonder why not let readers use the browser's existing bookmark function. The answer is about experience and context.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Easy to tap in the content context.</strong> The theme's bookmark icon is on cards and within articles, tappable the moment they are interested, unlike the browser bookmark that requires opening a menu and can be several steps on mobile.</li>
  <li><strong>Gathers the list on the site.</strong> All saved articles are collected in one list on your site, so readers come back to the site to view the list, drawing them back directly.</li>
  <li><strong>Designed to fit the design.</strong> The icon and saved state blend with the theme, feeling like part of the site, not a separate browser function.</li>
</ul>
<p>The two do not entirely replace each other, but the theme's bookmark is designed specifically to encourage coming back to read and engaging with your site.</p>

<h2>A limitation to understand: reader-side storage</h2>
<p>Because the bookmark is stored in the reader's browser without an account, there is a limitation worth stating clearly to set the right expectations. The saved list is tied to that browser and device, meaning if the reader switches to another device, or clears the site's data in the browser, the saved list does not carry over.</p>
<p>This is a worthwhile trade-off for a typical blog, because the upside is it works immediately with no complex membership system, no storing personal data, and no added privacy burden. Most readers who save an article usually come back to read it within a short time on the same device, so this limitation barely affects real use.</p>

<h2>The bookmark, drawing readers back, and engagement</h2>
<p>From a site-growth angle, a repeat reader is worth more than a one-time visitor, because they are familiar with the site, tend to read several articles, and may become a regular follower. A bookmark helps create a reason for readers to return, because saving is an intention to come back and keep reading.</p>
<p>Used with other read-on features, like related posts and an easy-on-the-eyes <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode</a>, the bookmark reinforces an overall experience that is impressive and inviting to return to, which is the foundation of building a stable reader base over the long term.</p>

<h2>Examples of using bookmarks in different kinds of blog</h2>
<p>Bookmarks help differently by kind of content. Look at some examples to see how it helps your readers.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Recipe blogs:</strong> readers often save recipes they want to try another day, then come back when heading to the kitchen. The bookmark is like a personal recipe book on your site.</li>
  <li><strong>Travel blogs:</strong> trip planners often save several articles about places, stays, and restaurants first, then come back to read them together when planning for real.</li>
  <li><strong>Tutorial / how-to blogs:</strong> readers save lessons they want to follow later when they have time and the right tools, bringing them back to your site to actually do it.</li>
  <li><strong>Review blogs:</strong> people deciding to buy often save several reviews to compare before deciding later.</li>
</ul>
<p>Notice the common thread is "interested now, but will use it later", a behavior found in almost every kind of blog. So the bookmark is a feature that raises the chance readers return no matter what you write about.</p>

<p>Overall, a bookmark is a small investment that pays off in long-term reader retention. The more quality content your site has to save, the more valuable this feature is, because it helps turn passing readers into repeat readers.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>Saved articles disappear after clearing browser data</h3>
<p>This is normal, because the data is stored in the browser. If the reader clears the site's data, the list is gone. Let readers know the bookmark is tied to that device and browser.</p>
<h3>The bookmark icon does not show</h3>
<p>Check that you added the bookmark block in the theme and Exported again. If you use a template without article cards, the icon may not appear in some spots.</p>
<h3>The state does not change when tapped</h3>
<p>It may be because the browser blocks storage in some private modes. Try testing in normal mode to confirm it works.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Enable the bookmark on sites with many articles, so readers have a reason to save and come back.</li>
  <li>Use it with <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related posts</a> to encourage reading and saving several articles at once.</li>
  <li>Test saving and persistence after refresh on both desktop and mobile.</li>
  <li>Communicate to readers that the bookmark is tied to the device and browser, to set the right expectation.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>A bookmark is a feature that turns a passing interest into an actual return, letting readers save an article for later in one click. With BlogKub, you just add the bookmark block and Export it, and readers save and come back to read with no login, because the data is stored in their own browser. Even with the device-tied limitation, it trades for ease of use and no privacy burden, making it a good tool for drawing readers back and building a stable reader base.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Does bookmark in BlogKub require login?</summary><p>No login. Readers tap the bookmark icon to save an article at once, and the data is stored in the reader's own browser (localStorage), so no sign-up or account is needed.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where are saved articles kept?</summary><p>In the reader's browser on that device, with a counter and a saved list to open. So readers can come back and reopen articles they saved to keep reading, any time on the same device.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is this different from the browser's own bookmark?</summary><p>The theme's bookmark works directly on your site, easy to tap from a card or within an article, and gathers the saved list in one place on the site, unlike the browser's bookmark, which is stored separately and opened from the browser menu.</p></details>
<details><summary>If I clear browser data, do saved articles disappear?</summary><p>Yes, because the data is stored in the browser. If the reader clears the site's data or changes devices, the saved list does not carry over. This is a natural limitation of reader-side storage without an account.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does bookmark help people return to the site?</summary><p>Yes. When a reader saves an article, they intend to come back to read it, raising the chance they return to the site, increasing repeat readers and their bond with the site.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/bookmark">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build breadcrumbs + schema in Blogger, a detailed guide</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/breadcrumb</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/breadcrumb</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add breadcrumbs (Home › Category › Article) with BreadcrumbList JSON-LD to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, so they appear in Google results and improve navigation and SEO.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/breadcrumb.png" type="image/png" length="309387"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/breadcrumb.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/breadcrumb.png" alt="How to build breadcrumbs + schema in Blogger, a detailed guide" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build breadcrumbs with schema in a Blogger theme, a detailed guide</h1>
<p class="lead">A breadcrumb is the small trail that tells readers where they are on your site, and it is one of the markups Google likes to show in the results. This article teaches you how to add breadcrumbs with BreadcrumbList JSON-LD to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, covering every step.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner to Intermediate</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Breadcrumb</strong> block in BlogKub, set the first item text (such as "Home"), then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. From there, <strong>add a label to every post</strong>, because the breadcrumb uses the first label as the category name. The system builds a Home › Category › Article path and embeds BreadcrumbList schema automatically, making it eligible to show in Google results.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/breadcrumb.png" aria-label="View the breadcrumb on a Blogger article page at full size">
    <img alt="A breadcrumb trail Home › Domestic › Article title above a Blogger article heading" title="The breadcrumb on a Blogger article page" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/breadcrumb.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1720" data-original-height="476" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">The breadcrumb shown above the article heading, pulling the category name from the post's first label automatically, with BreadcrumbList schema.</figcaption>
</figure>




<h2>What a breadcrumb is</h2>
<p><strong>A breadcrumb is a small row of links that shows the current page's place in the site hierarchy.</strong> It usually sits above the article heading and looks like this:</p>
<div class="demo">Home › Travel › 10 must-visit spots in Chiang Mai</div>
<p>The name "breadcrumb" comes from the fairy tale of scattering breadcrumbs to find the way back. The web uses the same idea, letting readers know where they came from and return to the main category in one click. It looks simple, but it has a significant effect on both user experience and SEO.</p>

<h2>Why breadcrumbs matter for SEO</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Google shows them in place of the URL:</strong> in the results, Google often replaces a long URL with an easy-to-read breadcrumb path, such as <code>blogkub.com › Travel › Chiang Mai</code>, making results look tidy and more clickable.</li>
  <li><strong>Helps bots understand the site structure:</strong> breadcrumbs connect an article to its category, so Google understands which larger topic this content belongs to, which helps topical grouping and ranking (topical authority).</li>
  <li><strong>Adds meaningful internal links:</strong> a link back to the category spreads internal link equity and opens a path for readers to explore related content.</li>
  <li><strong>Lowers immediate bounce:</strong> when readers see a path to a category they are interested in, they have another option besides closing, so they stay longer.</li>
</ul>

<h2>The difference between the "displayed" breadcrumb and the "schema"</h2>
<p>A good breadcrumb has two parts working together. The first is the path the <strong>reader sees</strong> on the page. The other is the <strong>BreadcrumbList JSON-LD</strong> hidden in the code for Google to read. Many sites do only the visible part but forget the schema, so they never get the nice path in the results. BlogKub's strength is that it builds both parts to match, automatically, on every article, so you never have to worry whether it is complete.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add a breadcrumb in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li id="step2"><strong>Add the Breadcrumb block.</strong> Open the left library, category "Article &amp; UX", and drag the "Breadcrumb" block in. The system places it at the top of the article automatically.</li>
  <li><strong>Set the first item text.</strong> Click the block to set the first item text, such as "Home", to match your site's language.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Add a label to every post.</strong> In the post editor's "Labels" field, add the article's category, such as "Travel", because the breadcrumb uses the first label as the category name in the path.</li>
  <li id="step5"><strong>Verify with the Rich Results Test.</strong> Put the article URL into Google's Rich Results Test to confirm the BreadcrumbList reads correctly with no errors.</li>
</ol>
<p class="note">BlogKub's breadcrumb sits in the post's includable, so it has <code>data:post.labels</code> in scope, letting it pull the category from the label correctly, and the displayed path always matches the schema.</p>

<h2>How to write and categorize so breadcrumbs are most useful</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Use labels that are real categories,</strong> such as "Travel", "Reviews", "Health", not scattered terms like a specific place name. The first label should be a category broad enough to hold several articles.</li>
  <li><strong>Use your labeling system consistently.</strong> Plan the site's main categories in advance (say 5 to 8) and sort every post into them, for a site structure Google understands easily.</li>
  <li><strong>Do not add too many labels.</strong> The first label is the category in the path, so if you use several, order them so the main category label is in the right position.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The path has no category (only Home › Article)</h3>
<p>This happens when the post has no label. Open the post in the Blogger editor, add a category label in the Labels field, then save again, and the path is complete immediately.</p>
<h3>The Rich Results Test shows a warning</h3>
<p>BlogKub's breadcrumb usually passes the test. If there is a warning, it is often because the Blogger category URL has no articles yet. Publish at least one article in that category first.</p>
<h3>Breadcrumbs do not show in the results right away</h3>
<p>Google has to crawl the new page first, so it can take several days to weeks to show the path in the results. You can speed it up by submitting the URL through Search Console.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Use breadcrumbs together with a well-planned label structure, to benefit both navigation and topical SEO.</li>
  <li>Set the first item text to match your site's language and keep it consistent. Do not switch between "Home" and other words.</li>
  <li>Pair it with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related posts</a> to build a web of internal links that helps both readers and rankings.</li>
  <li>Check the Rich Results Test after your first theme upload to confirm the schema works.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Examples of real site category structures</h2>
<p>Breadcrumbs are powerful only when the site's category structure is well planned. Look at examples of category layouts for three different kinds of blog, as a guide for designing your own labels.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Travel blog:</strong> main categories might be "Domestic", "International", "Short trips", "Cafes", "Stays". Each article carries the one category label that fits best, and the path becomes Home › Domestic › 3 days 2 nights in Nan.</li>
  <li><strong>Product review blog:</strong> organize by product type, such as "Appliances", "Gadgets", "Home goods", "Beauty". A path like Home › Gadgets › Review of the new wireless earbuds tells both people and Google at once which group the content is in.</li>
  <li><strong>Health blog:</strong> split by topic, such as "Nutrition", "Exercise", "Mental health", "Conditions and symptoms", which builds topical authority that Google values for YMYL content.</li>
</ul>
<p>The principle is to choose main categories that are "broad enough to hold several articles, but narrow enough to convey meaning", roughly 5 to 8 for a typical blog. Too many gets scattered, too few gets so broad it means nothing.</p>

<h2>Breadcrumbs and E-E-A-T and topical authority</h2>
<p>Google assesses sites with the E-E-A-T idea (Experience, Expertise, Authoritativeness, and Trust), and one signal of expertise is a site covering a topic systematically. Breadcrumbs paired with a good category structure help show that your site groups content in an organized way, not scattered articles with no connection.</p>
<p>When a reader or bot clicks from an article back to a category page and sees other articles on the same topic grouped together, that is structural evidence your site goes deep on that subject. The more articles you write in the same category and the better they interconnect through breadcrumbs, related posts, and internal links, the more the site accumulates topical authority, which affects the rankings of the whole category over the long term.</p>

<h2>Breadcrumbs on mobile and common misconceptions</h2>
<p>On a narrow mobile screen, a long path can wrap or feel cramped. The good fix is to keep the path short and meaningful. Generally three levels (Home › Category › Article) is just right. Do not nest several sub-category levels so the path gets too long, because it wastes space on mobile and confuses readers more than it helps.</p>
<p>The first common misconception is thinking breadcrumbs must mirror the URL structure exactly. In reality, breadcrumbs reflect the "logical hierarchy of the content", which can differ from the URL. For example, Blogger's URL is date-based, but the breadcrumb shows the category from the label, which is more useful to the reader. The second misconception is thinking that adding a breadcrumb gets you the path in the results immediately. In reality, you have to wait for Google to crawl and process, which takes time. The last is doing only the visible path and forgetting the schema, which sadly misses the chance for a rich result. BlogKub handles all three correctly from the start.</p>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The breadcrumb is a small element with a big payoff. It keeps readers from getting lost, helps Google understand the site structure, and makes your results look tidy and clickable. With BlogKub, you just add the breadcrumb block, set the first item text, and label your posts with discipline, and the system builds the BreadcrumbList schema to match the displayed path automatically, so your Blogger site is ready for rich results from day one.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Does breadcrumb in BlogKub embed schema automatically?</summary><p>Yes, automatically. Every article gets BreadcrumbList JSON-LD that matches the displayed path, making it eligible to appear as a navigation trail in Google results, without you writing any code.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where does breadcrumb pull the category name from?</summary><p>From the post's first label. So add a label that conveys the category to every post, so the path is Home › Category › Article title correctly.</p></details>
<details><summary>What if a post has no label?</summary><p>The path becomes just Home › Article title, which still works, but we recommend always adding a label for a complete path and to help categorize the site.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do breadcrumbs really help SEO?</summary><p>Yes. Google uses breadcrumbs to show the site hierarchy in results instead of a long URL, making results cleaner and more clickable, and helping users and bots understand the site structure and connect pages.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do breadcrumbs show on every page or only article pages?</summary><p>Mainly on article pages, because that is where the Home › Category › Article path is meaningful. BlogKub places the breadcrumb at the top of the article automatically.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/breadcrumb">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add a cookie consent bar in Blogger (PDPA and AdSense)</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cookie</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cookie</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a cookie consent bar to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: supports PDPA and AdSense, remembers acceptance, lets you edit the text and policy link, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/cookie.png" type="image/png" length="310118"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/cookie.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/cookie.png" alt="How to add a cookie consent bar in Blogger (PDPA and AdSense)" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add a cookie consent bar in a Blogger theme (supports PDPA and AdSense)</h1>
<p class="lead">If your site uses Analytics or AdSense, informing visitors and requesting consent for cookies is not just a matter of courtesy, it is a requirement of both the law and the ad platform. This article teaches you how to add a cookie bar to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, one that remembers acceptance and is customizable, and explains PDPA and AdSense along the way.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Cookie bar (Consent)</strong> block in BlogKub, set the text, the privacy policy link, and the background color, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. You get a floating card in the bottom-left that <strong>remembers acceptance (no repeat showing) and supports PDPA and AdSense</strong>. On mobile it spans the full width along the edge. Do not forget to create a privacy policy page to link to.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/cookie.png" aria-label="View the cookie consent bar supporting PDPA and AdSense at full size">
    <img alt="A cookie consent bar in the bottom-left of a Blogger site with an accept button and a policy link" title="A cookie consent bar supporting PDPA and AdSense" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/cookie.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1520" data-original-height="420" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A cookie bar in the bottom-left corner: it remembers acceptance, supports PDPA and AdSense, and lets you edit the text, policy link, and color.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>Why a Blogger site with ads or Analytics needs a cookie bar</h2>
<p><strong>A cookie bar is a notice to visitors that the site uses cookies, with a button to accept.</strong> Cookies are small files a site stores in the browser to remember information, such as settings, visit statistics, or the display of relevant ads. When your site installs Google Analytics or AdSense, it means cookies are being used to collect visitor data, which must be disclosed.</p>
<p>For site owners in Thailand, this relates to <strong>PDPA (the Personal Data Protection Act)</strong>, which emphasizes informing and requesting consent before collecting data. And if you use AdSense, Google's own policy requires publishers to obtain consent for the use of cookies from users in many regions. Having a cookie bar is therefore both compliance with requirements and a way to build trust in your site.</p>
<p class="note">This article gives general information for understanding, not legal advice. If your site collects sensitive data or has a large audience, you should consult a PDPA expert to prepare a complete policy.</p>

<h2>How BlogKub's cookie bar works</h2>
<p>BlogKub's cookie bar shows as a <strong>floating card in the bottom-left</strong> of the screen, with text announcing the use of cookies, a link to the privacy policy page, and an accept button. The highlight is that when a visitor clicks accept, the system <strong>remembers it in the browser and does not show the bar again</strong> on later visits, so it does not repeatedly bother readers.</p>
<p>Because it is a fixed floating card, it does not push the main content around, so it does not affect the layout or the speed score. On mobile the bar spans the full width along the edge for easy reading and tapping (the same approach as the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/translate">language menu</a>), without covering important content.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the cookie bar in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the cookie bar block.</strong> Open the left library, the "Add-ons" category, and drag the "Cookie bar (Consent)" block in.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Set the text, policy link, and color.</strong> Click the block to set the cookie notice text, the accept button text, the policy link text, the policy page URL, and the bar background color to match your site's design.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Create a privacy policy page.</strong> In Blogger, create a new page called "Privacy Policy" explaining how the site collects and uses data, then take that page's URL into the policy link of the cookie bar.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
</ol>

<h2>How to write appropriate cookie bar text</h2>
<p>The text in the bar should not be long or vague. Communicate directly what the site uses cookies for. A good example is "This website uses cookies to improve your experience and analyze traffic", followed by a "Privacy Policy" link and an "Accept" button. The principles are:</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>State the purpose briefly,</strong> such as to analyze traffic or show ads, so users understand what they are accepting.</li>
  <li><strong>Include a link to the full policy,</strong> for those who want to read more detail.</li>
  <li><strong>Make the accept button clear,</strong> using easy words like "Accept" or "OK".</li>
</ul>

<h2>The cookie bar and AdSense: points to watch</h2>
<p>If you intend to earn from AdSense on your Blogger site, cookie consent matters even more, because Google requires publishers to obtain consent for the use of cookies for personalized advertising in many regions. Having a cookie bar together with a clear policy page helps your site comply with requirements and reduces the risk around the approval or standing of your AdSense account.</p>
<p>Besides the cookie bar, the privacy policy page should also state that the site uses AdSense and that third parties may use cookies to show interest-based ads, which is standard wording AdSense recommends having.</p>
<p>Another point worth knowing is that in some regions with strict laws, such as the European Union, Google requires publishers to use a certified consent management system. If many of your readers come from those regions, you should study AdSense's additional requirements. But for a blog focused mainly on Thai readers, a cookie bar with a clear policy page is a suitable starting point that covers the basic needs well.</p>

<h2>PDPA basics for bloggers</h2>
<p>PDPA, or the Personal Data Protection Act, is a Thai law that sets principles for the collection, use, and disclosure of personal data. For a general blogger, what to understand is that when your site collects visitor data, for example through Analytics or advertising cookies, you should inform users and give them the chance to know what is happening with their data.</p>
<p>The key principles the cookie bar helps address are "transparency" and "notice". A bar that shows clear text with a link to the full policy is the first step to making your site communicate with users honestly. Even a small personal blog may have low legal risk, but building good habits from the start helps the site grow with confidence, and be ready when visitors increase or when you start earning from ads.</p>

<h2>What should be in the privacy policy page</h2>
<p>The privacy policy page is the companion to the cookie bar, because the bar links to it. Here are the basic topics it should include to be complete and credible.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>What data the site collects,</strong> such as visit data through cookies, statistics from Analytics, or data users enter themselves (if any).</li>
  <li><strong>What the data is used for,</strong> such as improving content, analyzing traffic, or showing relevant ads.</li>
  <li><strong>Third parties involved,</strong> such as stating that the site uses Google Analytics and AdSense, which may use cookies to show interest-based ads (standard wording AdSense recommends).</li>
  <li><strong>Users' rights and a contact channel,</strong> such as how to turn off cookies in the browser, and a channel to ask about data.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can create this page easily as a page in Blogger, then take the URL into the policy link of the cookie bar. When both parts work together, your site communicates about data with users completely and professionally.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The cookie bar does not show</h3>
<p>It may be because you already clicked accept, so the system remembers it. Try opening in incognito mode or clearing the site data in your browser, and the bar will show again.</p>
<h3>The bar overlaps another floating button</h3>
<p>The bar sits in the bottom-left. If there is another floating button nearby, move that button to the right side so they do not overlap.</p>
<h3>The policy link goes to a blank page</h3>
<p>Check that you created the privacy policy page in Blogger and copied the correct URL into it. If there is no page yet, create it first.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Always enable the cookie bar if the site uses Analytics or AdSense, for compliance with PDPA and ad policy.</li>
  <li>Create and link a privacy policy page that fully explains data collection and use.</li>
  <li>Write the bar text short, clear, direct, and unambiguous.</li>
  <li>Test on both desktop and mobile to make sure the bar does not cover important content and accept is easy to click.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The cookie bar is a basic element that a site using Analytics or AdSense should have, both to comply with PDPA and the ad platform's policy, and to build trust with readers. With BlogKub you just add the cookie bar block, set the text and policy link, and Export it to use. The system shows a bar that remembers acceptance and does not bother readers again, working well on both desktop and mobile. Do not forget to pair it with a fully written privacy policy page.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Is a cookie bar necessary for a Blogger site?</summary><p>It is necessary if your site stores cookies to analyze traffic or show ads, for example using Google Analytics or AdSense. Both Thailand's PDPA law and AdSense policy advise informing visitors and requesting consent for the use of cookies.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does BlogKub's cookie bar remember acceptance?</summary><p>Yes. When a visitor clicks accept, the system saves it in the browser and does not show the bar again on later visits, so it does not repeatedly bother readers.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I edit the text and policy link in the cookie bar?</summary><p>Yes. You can set the cookie text, the accept button text, the policy link text, the policy URL, and the bar background color yourself in the block settings.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where does the cookie bar show, and does it affect the layout?</summary><p>It shows as a floating card in the bottom-left of the screen (on mobile it spans the full width along the edge). Being a floating position, it does not push the main content around, so it does not affect the layout or speed.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do I also need a privacy policy page?</summary><p>You should have one, because the cookie bar usually links to a policy page explaining how the site collects and uses data. It is both an AdSense requirement and a trust builder under PDPA principles. You create this page in Blogger and put its URL into the bar.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/cookie">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build a copy code button in Blogger code blocks</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/copycode</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/copycode</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a copy code button to code blocks (&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;) in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, so readers copy in one click without selecting by hand, with a &apos;Copied&apos; state, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/copycode.png" type="image/png" length="338016"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/copycode.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/copycode.png" alt="How to build a copy code button in Blogger code blocks" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build a copy code button in Blogger code blocks</h1>
<p class="lead">For blogs with code samples, letting readers copy the whole block in one click is a small detail that makes a huge difference. This article teaches you how to add a copy code button to a Blogger theme with BlogKub that works automatically on every code block, along with the reasoning, settings, and common fixes.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>copy code button</strong> block in BlogKub, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. The system adds a "Copy" button in the top-right of every <code>&lt;pre&gt;</code> code block in your articles automatically. Readers copy the full code in one click, with a <strong>"Copied"</strong> state, and there is a fallback for older browsers.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/copycode.png" aria-label="View the copy code button on a pre block at full size">
    <img alt="A code block in a Blogger article with a copy button in the top-right showing the 'Copied' state" title="The copy code button on a pre block" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/copycode.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1440" data-original-height="556" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A copy button in the top-right of a code block. One click copies all the code, with a "Copied" state.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a copy code button is, and why tech blogs cannot do without it</h2>
<p><strong>A copy code button is a small button on the corner of a code block that, when a reader clicks it, copies all the code in that block to the clipboard at once</strong>, without dragging the mouse to select line by line, without fear of missing lines or accidentally selecting line numbers. Just click once and paste in your own program.</p>
<p>For blogs that teach coding, share scripts, or write tech how-tos, this button is something readers expect to be there, because leading documentation sites and developer communities all have a copy button on every code block. When your blog has it, readers immediately feel the site looks professional and cares about their experience. Conversely, if they have to drag-select themselves on mobile, which is very hard, plenty of readers will give up and leave the page.</p>
<p>Behaviorally, copying code is one of the most frequent actions a tech reader takes. Every time they fight with drag-selecting is friction that erodes their good feeling toward the site. A copy button is therefore a small investment with a high return in satisfaction and repeat reading.</p>

<h2>How BlogKub's copy code button works</h2>
<p>The highlight is that it <strong>works automatically on every code block without you touching the theme's code at all</strong>. When you add this block, the system embeds a tiny script that scans every <code>&lt;pre&gt;</code> tag in the article content and adds a "Copy" button with an icon in the top-right of each block. So you write articles and place code as usual, without adding a button per block.</p>
<p>When a reader clicks the button, the system takes the text in the block (from the inner <code>&lt;code&gt;</code>, or the whole block if none) and writes it to the clipboard via the modern Clipboard API. The button then changes its text to "Copied" and changes color briefly to confirm success, before returning to normal on its own, giving clear feedback without disrupting the eye.</p>
<p>Importantly, the system has a <strong>fallback</strong>. If the reader's browser does not support the modern Clipboard API, it switches to the older copy technique automatically, so most readers can copy even on older browsers or restricted environments.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the copy code button in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the copy code button block.</strong> Open the left block library, category "Article &amp; UX", and drag the "Copy code button" block in to enable the automatic button system across the theme.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file to upload the new theme.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Put code in the post with a pre block.</strong> When writing an article, put your code in a <code>&lt;pre&gt;&lt;code&gt;...&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;</code> tag, and the system recognizes it as a code block and adds the copy button itself.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test copying.</strong> Open the live article, click the copy button in the top-right of the code block, then paste it into a text editor to confirm you got every line with no odd characters.</li>
</ol>
<div class="note">Tip: if you already use a syntax highlighter, the copy button still works as long as the code is in a <code>&lt;pre&gt;</code> tag, because the system reads the real text in the block, not the colors or formatting.</div>

<h2>Why code blocks must use the &lt;pre&gt; tag</h2>
<p>The <code>&lt;pre&gt;</code> (preformatted text) tag is the web standard for showing text that must keep its spacing and line breaks as in the source, which is essential for code where indentation has meaning. The copy button system relies on this tag as the signal that "this is a code block", so it does not add a button in the wrong place on a normal paragraph.</p>
<p>The benefit of using <code>&lt;pre&gt;</code> with <code>&lt;code&gt;</code> also includes semantic meaning, letting search engines and screen readers understand that this section is code, helping your content be friendly to both SEO and accessibility. When you set the structure correctly, the copy button works precisely and automatically.</p>
<p>If you paste code into Blogger and it becomes one long line, check that the editor is in "HTML view" and the code is genuinely wrapped in <code>&lt;pre&gt;</code>, because the "compose" mode sometimes strips line breaks, distorting both the display and the copy.</p>

<h2>Details that make the copy button look good and easy to use</h2>
<p>A good button is not just "click and it copies", it must communicate its state so readers are confident. BlogKub's copy button has these small details designed in.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Fixed top-right position.</strong> Placed where readers expect by tech-web convention, recognizable at a glance as a copy button.</li>
  <li><strong>A document-pair icon.</strong> Uses the two-overlapping-sheets icon that is the universal symbol for copying, conveying meaning even without reading text.</li>
  <li><strong>"Copied" feedback.</strong> On success, the button changes text and color briefly, then returns to normal on its own, giving confidence with no disruptive popup.</li>
  <li><strong>Blends with the theme.</strong> The button uses your theme's colors and rounded corners, in both light and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode</a>, so it looks like part of the site, not a foreign element.</li>
</ul>
<p>These details may seem small, but together they make readers feel your site is refined and credible, a feeling that carries over to the credibility of the content too.</p>

<h2>The copy code button and the mobile experience</h2>
<p>On mobile, drag-selecting text in a horizontally scrolling code block is extremely frustrating. Readers often fail to select all of it, or accidentally scroll the screen instead. The copy button is therefore even more valuable on mobile than desktop, because it turns a near-impossible task into a single tap.</p>
<p>Considering that most blog readers today come from mobile, having a copy button is not a gimmick but a fix for a real usability problem affecting many readers, reducing the mid-page exit rate of those who came to use the code.</p>

<h2>The copy code button, SEO, and time on page</h2>
<p>Even though the copy button is not a direct ranking factor, it has a valuable indirect effect on SEO through user-experience signals. When readers copy code conveniently, they tend to stay on the page longer, read to the end, and come back when they need the code again. These behaviors are quality signals search engines value.</p>
<p>Beyond that, blogs with genuinely usable, easy-to-copy code samples tend to get shared and cited more, leading to more links and traffic naturally. Used with good content structure, such as a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a> that helps readers jump to the code section they want, and an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo">AEO</a> summary box that answers concisely, your site becomes friendly to both readers and search engines at once.</p>

<h2>Examples of use in different kinds of blog</h2>
<p>The copy code button is more broadly useful than you might think, not limited to coding blogs.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Coding tutorial blogs:</strong> readers copy sample scripts to run or adapt at once, cutting steps and typing errors.</li>
  <li><strong>Template and snippet blogs:</strong> sites giving away CSS, HTML, or various recipes, where the copy button makes them easy to use and raises the chance readers come back for code.</li>
  <li><strong>Blogger/web technique blogs:</strong> articles recommending decoration or theme-fix code, where readers copy and paste precisely, reducing broken code from missing pieces.</li>
  <li><strong>Command and config blogs:</strong> sites sharing command-line commands or config files, where copying it all correctly matters greatly, because one wrong character fails to run.</li>
</ul>
<p>The common thread is that readers want to "use the code", and the copy button helps them succeed smoothly, which adds value to your content in readers' eyes.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>Clicking copy gives incomplete code or odd characters</h3>
<p>This usually happens because the code is not correctly in a <code>&lt;pre&gt;</code> tag, or there is nested formatting inserting special characters. Check in HTML view that the code is wrapped in <code>&lt;pre&gt;&lt;code&gt;</code> with no odd formatting tags in between.</p>
<h3>The copy button does not appear</h3>
<p>Check that you added the copy code button block in the theme and re-exported, then confirm the code block genuinely uses a <code>&lt;pre&gt;</code> tag, because the system only adds a button to <code>&lt;pre&gt;</code> blocks.</p>
<h3>Clicking does not copy on some browsers</h3>
<p>Normally the system switches to the fallback itself, but some restricted environments (such as a non-HTTPS page) may block clipboard access. Make sure your site is served over HTTPS, which Blogger already supports.</p>
<h3>The button overlaps the first line of code</h3>
<p>The button floats in the top-right of the block. If the first line is long enough to hit the button, readers can still scroll to read normally, but if you want, add a blank line at the top of the code for tidiness.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Always wrap code in <code>&lt;pre&gt;&lt;code&gt;</code> in HTML view, so the copy button and display are correct.</li>
  <li>Test copying on both desktop and mobile, especially articles with multiple code blocks.</li>
  <li>Place code that is genuinely usable once copied, with no special characters from web formatting mixed in.</li>
  <li>Use it with <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/anchorlink">anchor links</a> so readers can share a link straight to the section with the code they want.</li>
  <li>For long articles with many code sections, add a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a> to help readers jump to the relevant code block faster.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The copy code button is a small detail that instantly raises a tech blog's professionalism and usability. With BlogKub, you just add the copy code button block once and Export it, and the system adds a button to every <code>&lt;pre&gt;</code> code block in every article automatically. Readers copy in one click with a confirmation state, and there is a fallback for older browsers, reducing friction, raising satisfaction, and giving readers a reason to come back for code from your site, without you writing any theme code yourself.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>What code blocks does the copy button work with?</summary><p>It works with code blocks written using the &lt;pre&gt; tag in the article content. The system scans every &lt;pre&gt; in the content and adds a copy button in the top-right automatically, and clicking it copies all the text in that block.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do I have to add a copy button to each block?</summary><p>No. Add the copy code button block once, and the system adds a button to every code block in every article automatically. You just write code in &lt;pre&gt; tags as usual.</p></details>
<details><summary>What if a reader uses an old browser without the Clipboard API?</summary><p>The system has a fallback. If the browser does not support the modern Clipboard API, it switches to the older copy method automatically, so most readers can copy even on older browsers.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the copy button slow the site down?</summary><p>Almost no effect, because it is a tiny reader-side script with no external file or heavy library, so it does not significantly affect speed or Core Web Vitals.</p></details>
<details><summary>How does the copy code button help SEO?</summary><p>Indirectly through user experience. When readers copy code conveniently, they tend to stay on the page longer and come back to read again, a good quality signal for tech blogs with many code samples.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/copycode">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build dark mode in Blogger, a detailed guide</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a dark mode toggle to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: switch dark/light, remember the reader&apos;s choice, sync across the whole site, no flash on load, plus the UX benefits and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/dark-mode.png" type="image/png" length="320442"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/dark-mode.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/dark-mode.png" alt="How to build dark mode in Blogger, a detailed guide" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build dark mode in a Blogger theme, a detailed step-by-step guide</h1>
<p class="lead">Dark mode has become a feature readers now expect, especially those reading at night or on mobile. This article teaches you how to add a dark mode button to a Blogger theme with BlogKub that remembers the reader's choice, syncs across the site, and does not flash on load, along with the UX reasoning and fixes.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Dark Mode Toggle</strong> block in BlogKub (many templates install it already), choose the button position (floating in a corner or in the header), then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. The system gives you a dark/light toggle that <strong>remembers the reader's choice, syncs across the site, and does not flash white on load</strong>, with no coding at all.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/dark-mode-light.png" aria-label="View the Blogger article page in light mode at full size">
    <img alt="A Blogger article page in light mode, white background and dark text" title="A Blogger article page in light mode" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/dark-mode-light.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1720" data-original-height="1240" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">The article page in light mode.</figcaption>
</figure>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/dark-mode-dark.png" aria-label="View the Blogger article page in dark mode at full size">
    <img alt="The same Blogger article page in dark mode, dark background and light text, every part changing color consistently" title="A Blogger article page in dark mode" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/dark-mode-dark.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1720" data-original-height="1240" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">The same page in dark mode. Header, content, table of contents, and footer change color together consistently.</figcaption>
</figure>




<h2>Why a modern Blogger site should have dark mode</h2>
<p><strong>Dark mode lets readers choose to view the site with a dark background and light text, instead of the standard white.</strong> It is not just a beauty trend, it solves real problems. Many people read blogs at night in bed, where a bright white background strains the eyes and makes long reading hard. Dark mode reduces eye fatigue in low light, and on OLED screens it also saves battery.</p>
<p>In terms of user experience, having a button to choose signals that the site cares about details and is modern, which affects the first impression and credibility. Readers who feel comfortable tend to stay longer and return.</p>

<h2>The three keys to dark mode done right</h2>
<p>Good dark mode is not just "inverting colors", it has to pass these three, which BlogKub handles fully:</p>
<h3>1. Remember the reader's choice (persistence)</h3>
<p>When a reader taps dark mode, the site must remember this person likes dark mode, then show dark mode on the next page and the next visit, always. If it does not remember, the reader has to tap again on every page, which is very annoying.</p>
<h3>2. No flash on load (no FOUC)</h3>
<p>The classic dark mode problem is the page loading white for a moment before jumping to dark, called Flash of Unstyled Content, which strains the eyes and looks unprofessional. BlogKub sets the theme before the page renders, so someone who chose dark mode sees a dark background immediately with no white flash.</p>
<h3>3. Sync across the site consistently</h3>
<p>When you toggle, every part must change together, the header, content, cards, footer, and extra features, because BlogKub sets colors through one set of theme variables. So toggling changes the whole site to be readable in both modes, with no spot where text sinks into the background.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add dark mode in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li id="step2"><strong>Add the Dark Mode Toggle block.</strong> Many templates install it already. If yours does not, open the left library, category "Article &amp; UX", and drag the "Dark Mode Toggle" block in.</li>
  <li><strong>Choose the button position.</strong> Click the block to set the position, such as a floating button in the bottom-right corner, or shown in the header, as well as in the mobile bottom bar.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test the toggle and persistence.</strong> Open the live site, tap the toggle, then refresh the page. Confirm the site remembers your choice with no white flash on load. Try switching to another page to see the mode stays.</li>
</ol>
<p class="note">BlogKub's dark mode button works with the site's central theme controller, so it syncs consistently with the dark mode button in the bottom bar and other features, without conflicting.</p>

<h2>Dark mode and the device setting</h2>
<p>Some readers already set their device to dark mode system-wide. BlogKub respects this. If a reader has never chosen on your site, the site starts by following the device setting (prefers-color-scheme) automatically, but when the reader taps to choose, that choice is remembered and takes priority over the system setting. This is the correct behavior by modern web standards.</p>

<h2>Does dark mode affect SEO?</h2>
<p>Dark mode is not a direct ranking factor, but it has a good indirect effect, because it reduces eye fatigue and increases reading comfort, so readers stay longer and bounce less, which is a behavioral quality signal. Importantly, BlogKub builds dark mode without hiding or duplicating content and without affecting page speed, so it is completely safe for SEO.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>Some images or boxes are glaringly bright in dark mode</h3>
<p>This usually happens with transparent-background images or PNGs that have a white background. Use images with a genuinely transparent background, or images that look good in both modes, and avoid embedding fixed white in article content.</p>
<h3>Some text is hard to read in dark mode</h3>
<p>This happens when you set a fixed text color (such as black) in the post yourself. Leave the color as the theme default, so the system switches colors to be readable in both modes automatically.</p>
<h3>The button overlaps another floating button</h3>
<p>If you enable several floating buttons at once (such as back-to-top and dark mode), choose opposite sides in the block settings so they do not stack.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Enable dark mode as a standard feature of the site, especially blogs people read at length or at night.</li>
  <li>Do not embed fixed text/background colors in post content. Let the theme control the color so toggling looks good.</li>
  <li>Use images that look good in both modes, or transparent-background images, so there is no odd white frame in dark mode.</li>
  <li>Test both modes before publishing every time, especially the live article page with images and boxes.</li>
  <li>To let readers customize more, try adding a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/themepicker">theme color picker</a> alongside, so they can adjust both brightness and accent tone.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Color theory and contrast for comfortable dark mode</h2>
<p>Good dark mode is not just inverting white to pure black. A pure black background (#000000) with glaring white text (#ffffff) gives contrast so high it causes "halation", where text seems to glow and blur, especially for people with astigmatism. A good standard uses a dark blue-gray background (such as a #0f172a tone) and soft white text instead of glaring white, keeping contrast at a comfortable level.</p>
<p>BlogKub designs its dark mode palette to pass accessibility contrast (WCAG), with the main text and background different enough for continuous reading while not so glaring it tires the eyes. Accent colors and links are tuned to still stand out on a dark background without disappearing. This is the detail people often overlook when making dark mode themselves, but it is what makes dark mode "genuinely comfortable to read" rather than just "there to tap".</p>
<p>The caution on the writer's side is: do not set fixed text or background colors in post content, because embedded colors do not adapt to the mode, making some paragraphs unreadable in dark mode. Letting the theme control the color is the safest path.</p>

<h2>Dark mode and site speed (Core Web Vitals)</h2>
<p>A common question is whether adding dark mode slows the site. The answer is that it has almost no effect, because BlogKub does dark mode by switching CSS color variables, not loading a second stylesheet or calling extra external files. The script that sets the theme before rendering is tiny and fast, so it does not significantly affect Largest Contentful Paint (LCP) or Interaction to Next Paint (INP).</p>
<p>Importantly, setting the theme before rendering prevents a layout shift from the page changing color mid-load, which is also good for the Cumulative Layout Shift (CLS) score. You could say BlogKub's dark mode is designed to be "light and fast", in line with the whole theme's philosophy of embedding CSS in b:skin and not relying on external resources.</p>

<h2>A pre-publish checklist for dark mode</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Open the live article page in dark mode and read every part: headings, paragraphs, links, callout boxes, tables, and image captions, and check they are all clear.</li>
  <li>Check images for no odd white frame or white background clashing with the dark background.</li>
  <li>Toggle the mode and refresh, confirming the site remembers the choice and does not flash.</li>
  <li>Test on a real phone, because most people use dark mode on mobile the most.</li>
  <li>Check the dark mode button does not overlap another floating button, such as back-to-top.</li>
  <li>Visit the site for the first time in dark mode (from a device set to dark system-wide) to see the system default works.</li>
</ul>
<p>Once you pass this checklist, you can be confident your dark mode is ready in every situation, both for readers who deliberately choose and readers who let the site follow their device. This one round of testing prevents the annoying issues that often appear after publishing, such as an unreadable paragraph or an image that stands out, which are harder to fix later than checking thoroughly from the start.</p>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>Dark mode is a feature that instantly lifts reading comfort and the site's modern image. The keys are remembering the reader's choice, no flash on load, and syncing colors across the site consistently, all three of which BlogKub handles automatically. You just add the Dark Mode Toggle block, choose the button position, and Export it. With that, your readers get a better reading experience day and night. And to raise long-article reading further, try adding a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/progress">reading progress bar</a> alongside.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Does dark mode in BlogKub remember the reader's choice?</summary><p>Yes. When a reader toggles to dark or light, the site saves the choice and uses it on the next visit, keeping the experience consistent across every page.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the page flash white before turning dark?</summary><p>No. The system sets the theme before the page renders, so a reader who chose dark mode sees a dark background immediately with no white flash (FOUC).</p></details>
<details><summary>Can dark mode follow the reader's device setting?</summary><p>Yes. If the reader has never chosen themselves, the site follows the device setting (prefers-color-scheme). When the reader taps to choose, that choice is remembered and takes priority over the system setting.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where can the dark mode button go?</summary><p>Both a floating button in a screen corner (such as bottom right) and a button in the header, as well as in the mobile bottom bar. You choose the position in the block settings.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does dark mode work on every part of the site?</summary><p>It works site-wide, because colors are set through theme variables. When you toggle, the header, content, cards, footer, and features change together consistently, readable in both modes.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add a magazine-style dropcap in Blogger articles</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dropcap</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dropcap</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a dropcap (a large magazine-style first letter) to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: the system picks the real first paragraph automatically, you can choose an accent color or the normal text color, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/dropcap.png" type="image/png" length="341124"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/dropcap.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/dropcap.png" alt="How to add a magazine-style dropcap in Blogger articles" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add a magazine-style dropcap in Blogger articles</h1>
<p class="lead">A dropcap is a classic layout flourish from the world of magazines and books that makes the first letter of an article large and striking. This article teaches you how to add a dropcap to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, one that picks the real first paragraph automatically and lets you adjust the color, along with the design reasoning and how to fix problems.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Large first letter (Dropcap)</strong> block in BlogKub, choose the color as an <strong>accent color</strong> or the <strong>normal text color</strong>, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. The system makes the first letter of the first content paragraph larger in a magazine style automatically, picking the correct paragraph by skipping images, summary boxes, and the table of contents.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/dropcap.png" aria-label="View the magazine-style large first-letter dropcap at full size">
    <img alt="A Blogger article opening paragraph with a large accent-colored first letter in a magazine style (dropcap)" title="A magazine-style large first-letter dropcap" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/dropcap.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1440" data-original-height="568" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">The first letter of the first content paragraph is enlarged in an accent color, drawing the eye to the start of the article.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a dropcap is, and where it comes from</h2>
<p><strong>A dropcap is the first letter of a paragraph enlarged several times and spanning several lines downward.</strong> It is a layout technique that dates back to the era of illuminated manuscripts and carried through to quality magazines, books, and newspapers. Its original purpose was to draw the reader's eye to say "start reading here" and to give the page a refined feel.</p>
<p>In the modern web, the dropcap keeps that same value. It turns an ordinary opening paragraph into a distinctive start, making an article look like deliberate writing rather than just text placed in a row. For a blog that wants to project a magazine image or a premium lifestyle feel, the dropcap is a small detail that clearly raises the overall impression.</p>

<h2>Why "automatic" paragraph selection matters</h2>
<p>The real challenge of a dropcap on the web is not making the letter large, it is <strong>picking the correct paragraph</strong>. Simple dropcap methods using CSS alone (such as <code>:first-of-type</code>) often miss, because a real Blogger article does not always start with a text paragraph. Often the first paragraph is an image, a summary box, or a table of contents, which makes the dropcap land in the wrong place or not appear at all.</p>
<p>BlogKub solves this with a small script that <strong>searches for the first content paragraph that is real text</strong>, skipping image-only paragraphs, skipping <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo">AEO</a> summary boxes, and skipping the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a>, then adds the dropcap class to that paragraph. The result is that the large first letter always lands on real text, whatever the article's opening structure, so you never have to fix it article by article.</p>
<div class="note">This is the difference between "making a dropcap that seems to work" and "making a dropcap that truly works on every article". BlogKub chooses the latter, because real blogs have varied opening structures.</div>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the dropcap in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the Dropcap block.</strong> Open the left block library, the "Article &amp; UX" category, and drag the "Large first letter" block into the page to enable it across the whole theme.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Choose the letter color.</strong> In the block settings, choose "Accent" to make the first letter use the theme's main color for prominence, or "Normal text color" for an understated, blended look.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Check the first paragraph.</strong> Open a real article to confirm the first letter of the first content paragraph is enlarged nicely and does not land on an image or a summary box.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Which color to choose: accent vs normal text color</h2>
<p>Choosing the dropcap color affects the mood of the article more than you might think. The two options suit different situations.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Accent:</strong> the first letter uses the theme's main color, making the start of the article prominent and lively. It suits lifestyle, travel, or any site that wants brightness and wants the dropcap to be an eye-catching spot of color.</li>
  <li><strong>Normal text color:</strong> the first letter is enlarged but uses the same color as the content, giving a classic, refined, formal feel. It suits academic blogs, company sites, or content that wants a composed tone.</li>
</ul>
<p>A simple recommendation: if your site has a clear brand color and you want to reinforce your identity, choose the accent. But if you emphasize easy reading and formality, the normal text color blends better. Try both in a real article and choose the one that best fits your site's overall look.</p>

<h2>The dropcap and Thai: things to watch</h2>
<p>The dropcap was designed from Latin letters, which have consistent height. Applied to Thai, there are extra considerations, because many Thai consonants have upper vowels, lower vowels, or tone marks that take up vertical space. When you enlarge the first letter, these elements grow too and may crowd the neighboring lines.</p>
<p>In practice, BlogKub's dropcap works with Thai and automatically scales smaller on mobile screens to reduce crowding, but we recommend checking the opening paragraph of Thai articles after setup, especially if the first letter is a consonant with a vowel or tone mark attached. If it feels too tight, starting the first paragraph with a consonant of a simpler shape helps the dropcap look nicer.</p>

<h2>The dropcap, reading, and good design</h2>
<p>A dropcap is not just decoration, it plays a role in visual hierarchy. It quietly tells the reader that the content starts here, and creates a gentler entry into the article than jumping straight into the text. Used in moderation, the dropcap makes the article page look deliberately laid out and professional.</p>
<p>That said, the key is moderation. A dropcap suits "a single opening paragraph" of an article, and should not be added to every paragraph, which would look cluttered. BlogKub is therefore designed to apply it only to the first content paragraph, to preserve the elegance of the technique and let it draw the eye to the start without stealing attention from the rest of the content.</p>
<p>When you pair the dropcap with other reading elements, such as <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode</a>, which helps reading in low light, and a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/progress">progress bar</a>, which shows how far along you are, your article becomes both beautiful and easy to read at once.</p>

<h2>Examples of using the dropcap in different kinds of blogs</h2>
<p>The dropcap fits certain content types especially well. Look at these examples to picture how to use it aptly.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Story/essay blogs:</strong> the dropcap fits descriptive writing beautifully, because it creates a literary atmosphere from the very first line.</li>
  <li><strong>Lifestyle and fashion blogs:</strong> the magazine tone of the dropcap reinforces a premium image well, especially when you choose an accent color to match your brand color.</li>
  <li><strong>Travel blogs:</strong> an opening paragraph describing a destination becomes more inviting when a large first letter leads the eye.</li>
  <li><strong>Academic or analytical blogs:</strong> choose the normal text color for formality, and the dropcap adds refinement without looking too playful.</li>
</ul>
<p>Notice the dropcap suits content that has a clear "text opening paragraph". If your articles often start with a large image first, BlogKub's automatic paragraph selection still ensures the dropcap lands on the first text paragraph correctly.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The dropcap does not appear</h3>
<p>Check that you added the Dropcap block and Exported again. If an article has no real text paragraph at all (for example only images or a list), the system has no paragraph to apply the dropcap to. Make sure the article has at least one content paragraph.</p>
<h3>The dropcap lands on a summary box or the table of contents</h3>
<p>Normally the system skips these elements. If you still see the problem, check that the summary box or table of contents was added via a real BlogKub block, not a structure you laid out yourself that the system does not recognize.</p>
<h3>The Thai first letter looks crowded with its vowel or tone mark</h3>
<p>This is natural for Thai when a letter is enlarged. Try checking the display on mobile, where the system already reduces the size, or adjust the opening paragraph to start with a consonant of a simpler shape for a better look.</p>
<h3>You want to turn the dropcap off for certain articles</h3>
<p>The dropcap is a theme-level setting that applies to the first paragraph of every article. If you need per-article control, plan your article openings to be consistent, or consider which article types should have a dropcap from the start.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Use the dropcap to reinforce a magazine image, not everywhere, and choose a color that fits your site's overall tone.</li>
  <li>Check the opening paragraph of Thai articles after setup, especially when the first letter has a vowel or tone mark.</li>
  <li>Test the display on both desktop and mobile, since the dropcap size scales with the screen.</li>
  <li>Pair it with other reading elements such as a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a> and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related articles</a> so it is both beautiful and easy to use.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The dropcap is a small design detail that gives your articles a premium, magazine feel from the very first line. BlogKub's strength is picking the real first content paragraph automatically, skipping images, summary boxes, and the table of contents, so the dropcap always lands in the right place without you fixing it article by article. Just add the block, choose an accent or normal color, and Export it, and every article gets an elegant, distinctive start that raises your site's image to look deliberate and professional.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>What is a dropcap?</summary><p>A dropcap is the first letter of a paragraph made several times larger, spanning multiple lines. It is a classic layout technique from magazines and books, used to draw the eye to the start of the content and add style to an article.</p></details>
<details><summary>Which paragraph does the dropcap land on in BlogKub?</summary><p>The system picks the real first content paragraph automatically, skipping image-only paragraphs, AEO summary boxes, and the table of contents, so the large first letter always lands on real text, not another element.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I change the dropcap color?</summary><p>Yes. You can choose between an accent color that uses the theme's main color for prominence, or the normal text color for an understated look. You set it in the block settings in BlogKub.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the dropcap work with Thai?</summary><p>It works. The first letter of the paragraph is enlarged whether it is a Thai or Latin character. That said, Thai consonants with vowels or tone marks may need a little extra spacing, so check the first paragraph looks good after setup.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the dropcap affect SEO or speed?</summary><p>No. The dropcap is mainly CSS styling plus a small script that runs on the reader's side. It loads no external files and does not change the content, so the text remains fully readable for search engines.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dropcap">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build an FAQ + FAQPage schema in Blogger, a detailed guide</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/faq</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/faq</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a frequently asked questions (FAQ) accordion with FAQPage JSON-LD to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, to help AEO/GEO so AI cites your answers, plus how to write it and what to know about rich results.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/faq.png" type="image/png" length="305224"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/faq.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/faq.png" alt="How to build an FAQ + FAQPage schema in Blogger, a detailed guide" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build an FAQ with FAQPage schema in a Blogger theme</h1>
<p class="lead">A frequently asked questions section not only clears up readers' doubts, it is also an answer-first content unit that AI and Google like to cite. This article teaches you how to add an accordion FAQ with automatic FAQPage schema to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, along with the latest things to know about rich results.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 10 minute read &nbsp; Level: Intermediate</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>FAQ</strong> block in BlogKub to enable the FAQ styles and script in the theme, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. In a post, write a <code>.bk-faq</code> block using <code>&lt;details&gt;&lt;summary&gt;</code>, and the system builds an accordion and <strong>FAQPage JSON-LD matching the displayed questions</strong> automatically, helping both AEO/GEO and content clarity.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/faq.png" aria-label="View the accordion FAQ with FAQPage schema at full size">
    <img alt="A frequently asked questions accordion in a Blogger article, opening and closing each answer, with FAQPage schema" title="The accordion FAQ with FAQPage schema" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/faq.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1680" data-original-height="714" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">The accordion FAQ, clicking to open and close each answer, building FAQPage JSON-LD that matches the displayed text automatically.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What an FAQ is, and why it is powerful in the AI era</h2>
<p><strong>An FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) section is a set of short questions and answers collecting the common doubts about a topic.</strong> It usually sits at the end of an article as an accordion you can open and close. The upside is that it answers specific questions the main content may not cover directly, and each question is an "answer-first" content unit in itself.</p>
<p>In an age where people type full-sentence questions into search and ask AI directly, an FAQ becomes a real asset, because the question-and-answer format matches how users ask and how AI looks for answers. When an article has a well-written FAQ, the odds that one of its questions matches what someone searches and gets cited go up.</p>

<h2>The latest to know: how FAQ rich results changed</h2>
<p>For transparency, it has to be said plainly that since mid-2023 Google reduced the display of FAQ rich results (the dropdown under a result), limiting them mainly to trusted health and government sites. So general sites may not see that dropdown in the results the way they used to.</p>
<p>That said, <strong>adding FAQPage schema still has value</strong>, for reasons broader than showing a rich result alone. It helps search engines, and especially AI Search, understand which part is a question and which is an answer, giving the content a structure answer engines can use easily. The accordion itself also helps UX directly, rich result or not. In short, keep doing FAQs fully, just set your expectations about the search-result dropdown to match reality.</p>

<h2>How BlogKub's FAQ works</h2>
<p>BlogKub splits two parts that work together. The first is the <strong>accordion style and script</strong> installed in the theme when you add the FAQ block. The second is the <strong>FAQ content you write in each post</strong> using the <code>.bk-faq</code> structure. When the two meet, the script makes the questions open and close, and reads the actually-displayed questions and answers to build matching FAQPage JSON-LD automatically.</p>
<p>The upside of this approach is that the schema always matches what the reader sees, which is a key Google requirement forbidding FAQ content in structured data that does not appear on the page. So you never risk hand-writing schema and breaking policy.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add an FAQ in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Enable the FAQ feature in the theme.</strong> Open the left library, category "Article &amp; UX", and drag the "FAQ" block in to embed the FAQ styles and script in the theme.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Write questions and answers in the post.</strong> In the post editor, switch to HTML view and place the FAQ block as in this example, wrapping it in <code>&lt;div class="bk-faq"&gt;</code> with each question as a <code>&lt;details&gt;</code>:
    <pre>&lt;div class="bk-faq"&gt;
  &lt;details&gt;
    &lt;summary&gt;How many minutes to soft-boil an egg?&lt;/summary&gt;
    &lt;p&gt;Boil for 6 minutes, then straight into cold water.&lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;/details&gt;
  &lt;details&gt;
    &lt;summary&gt;How long do soft-boiled eggs keep?&lt;/summary&gt;
    &lt;p&gt;1 to 2 days in the fridge, and reheat before eating.&lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;/details&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;</pre>
  </li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Publish and check Rich Results.</strong> Publish the post, then put the URL into Google's Rich Results Test to confirm the FAQPage reads correctly with no errors.</li>
</ol>
<p class="note">Each question is one <code>&lt;details&gt;</code>, where <code>&lt;summary&gt;</code> is the question and the following paragraph is the answer. BlogKub's script pairs these questions and answers to build matching schema.</p>

<h2>How to write a quality FAQ that gets cited</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Use real questions people ask.</strong> Think about what readers genuinely wonder after the article, or the words people type to search. Do not invent questions no one asks.</li>
  <li><strong>Answer completely in one answer.</strong> The answer should be concise and to the point, 1 to 3 sentences, so people get the answer at once without clicking elsewhere.</li>
  <li><strong>One question per point.</strong> Do not stuff several questions into one, because it is both hard to read and confuses the schema.</li>
  <li><strong>Relevant to the article.</strong> The FAQ should build on the main content, not be a floating unrelated question hoping for schema.</li>
  <li><strong>Write complete sentences,</strong> because AI and voice assistants read the answer straight from this text.</li>
</ul>

<h2>The FAQ with AEO/GEO and the summary box</h2>
<p>An FAQ pairs neatly with the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo">AEO summary box</a>. The summary box answers one main question at the top of the article, and the FAQ answers several secondary questions at the end. Using both, your content covers the big question and the smaller ones, expanding the space where AI Search can cite you with a link back to your site.</p>
<p>For GEO in particular, the question-and-answer format is a language model's favorite food, because it is clear what is a question and what is an answer. When ChatGPT Search or Perplexity scans a page, a well-structured FAQ is a spot that gets pulled in often.</p>
<p>Another angle not to miss is that an FAQ captures "long-tail" searches the main article may not target specifically. People may not search just a broad topic title but a specific question. When your FAQ has a question that matches what they typed, your page has a chance to appear and answer it precisely. The more articles you accumulate with FAQs covering varied questions, the wider your site catches searches, without writing a new article for every question.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The Rich Results Test does not find FAQPage</h3>
<p>Check that you wrapped all questions in <code>&lt;div class="bk-faq"&gt;</code> and each question is a correct <code>&lt;details&gt;&lt;summary&gt;</code>. If the structure is off, the script cannot build the schema.</p>
<h3>Questions do not open and close</h3>
<p>It means the FAQ block is not added in the theme yet (the script and styles are not embedded). Add the FAQ block in BlogKub and Export again.</p>
<h3>Answers too long in the box</h3>
<p>Trim to a concise 1 to 3 sentences. If there is a lot of detail, put it in the main content and summarize briefly in the FAQ.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Include 3 to 8 real, relevant questions. Quality matters more than quantity.</li>
  <li>Place the FAQ at the end of the article after the main content, to answer remaining doubts before the reader leaves.</li>
  <li>Do not repeat an answer from the content word for word. Summarize or add a new angle.</li>
  <li>Review the FAQ when you update the article, so answers match the current information.</li>
  <li>Check the Rich Results Test after publishing to confirm the schema works.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Example FAQs for different kinds of blog</h2>
<p>A good FAQ starts from understanding what your readers genuinely wonder. Here are question styles that tend to work well in each kind of blog, as inspiration for writing your own.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Travel blog:</strong> "When is the best time to visit", "How do I get there from downtown", "How many hours should I allow", "Is there an entry fee". Practical questions trip planners want answered right away.</li>
  <li><strong>Product review blog:</strong> "How is this model different from the last", "Is it worth the price", "What does it work with", "How many years of warranty". Questions that help people decide to buy.</li>
  <li><strong>How-to / tutorial blog:</strong> "How long does it take", "What equipment do I need", "Can a beginner do it", "What if I miss this step". Questions that unblock the person following along.</li>
  <li><strong>Health blog:</strong> "Who is it for", "Are there precautions", "When will I see results", emphasizing accuracy and citing credible sources, because it is YMYL content.</li>
</ul>
<p>Notice that good questions often start with how, when, why, or whether, matching how people type searches and ask AI. Phrasing questions to match the language your readers actually use is the key to getting your FAQ cited.</p>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>An FAQ section is a worthwhile investment for both the reader experience and AI-era search. Even though the FAQ rich result in the results has been limited, FAQPage schema still gives your content a structure that AI and search engines understand. With BlogKub, you just add the FAQ block to enable the styles and script in the theme, then write real questions and answers in the <code>.bk-faq</code> block, and the schema matching what is displayed is built for you automatically, so every article is ready to answer both readers and AI at once.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Does FAQPage schema still help SEO after Google cut back the rich result?</summary><p>It still helps. Even though Google limited the FAQ rich result (the dropdown under a result) mainly to trusted health and government sites since 2023, FAQPage schema still helps search engines and AI understand the question-and-answer structure, which is good for AEO/GEO and being cited in AI Overviews.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does FAQ in BlogKub embed schema automatically?</summary><p>Yes, automatically. When you write questions and answers in the .bk-faq block, the theme script reads the displayed questions and answers and builds matching FAQPage JSON-LD for you, with no hand-written schema.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where do I write the FAQ in a post?</summary><p>In the post content itself. Switch to HTML view and place the .bk-faq block with each question as a details/summary, so you can put the FAQ exactly where it fits each article.</p></details>
<details><summary>Must the questions in the schema match what shows on the page?</summary><p>They must match exactly. Per Google's policy, FAQ content in the structured data must be the same text the user sees on the page. BlogKub always builds the schema from the actually-displayed questions and answers, so you stay within policy.</p></details>
<details><summary>How many FAQ items should I include per article?</summary><p>We recommend 3 to 8 real questions relevant to the article. Do not stuff unrelated questions hoping for schema, because quality and relevance matter more than quantity.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/faq">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add image zoom (Lightbox) in Blogger articles</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/lightbox</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/lightbox</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add image zoom (Lightbox) to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: click an image in an article to expand it full screen, close by clicking or a button, ideal for photos, infographics, and screenshots, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/lightbox.png" type="image/png" length="322728"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/lightbox.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/lightbox.png" alt="How to add image zoom (Lightbox) in Blogger articles" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add image zoom (Lightbox) in Blogger articles: click to expand full screen</h1>
<p class="lead">Many kinds of images in an article, whether photos, infographics, or screenshots, often have details readers want to see up close. Letting them click an image to expand it full screen is a flourish that instantly raises the reading experience. This article teaches you how to add a Lightbox to a Blogger theme with BlogKub automatically, along with the reasoning and the settings.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Image zoom (Lightbox)</strong> block in BlogKub (many templates already include it), then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. Then insert images in posts as usual, and the <strong>content images become click-to-expand full screen automatically</strong>. Close by clicking the background or the close button. It uses a small script, does not affect speed, and suits photos, infographics, and screenshots.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/lightbox.png" aria-label="View the Lightbox expanding an image full screen at full size">
    <img alt="An open Lightbox view showing an image expanded full screen on a dark background with a close button, in a Blogger article" title="A Lightbox expanding an image full screen" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/lightbox.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1640" data-original-height="1040" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">Click an image in an article to expand it full screen on a dark background, close by clicking the background or the close button.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a Lightbox is</h2>
<p><strong>A Lightbox is a feature where, when a reader clicks an image in an article, the image expands to full screen on a dark background so the details are clearer,</strong> then closes back to the article by clicking the background or a close button. The name Lightbox comes from the light box photographers use to view film. The idea is to isolate an image to view it alone with nothing else distracting the eye.</p>
<p>On a web page, images are usually scaled to fit the content width, which may be too small to see some details. A Lightbox solves this by letting readers expand an image full screen when they want, then return to reading immediately. It offers the option to "look closely" without affecting the article's layout.</p>

<h2>Why articles with many images should have a Lightbox</h2>
<p>A Lightbox is not necessary for every site, but it is very valuable for certain kinds of articles where images carry important details.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Photos:</strong> travel, food, or fashion blogs where readers want to see the beauty and detail of an image in full.</li>
  <li><strong>Infographics and charts:</strong> images with small text or numbers that cannot be read at reduced size and must be enlarged to see clearly.</li>
  <li><strong>Screenshots:</strong> tutorials or reviews with step images, where readers often need to expand to see a button or menu in the image.</li>
  <li><strong>Work and examples:</strong> sites showing design work or results where detail is everything.</li>
</ul>
<p>In these cases, without a Lightbox, readers have to open the image in a new tab or pinch zoom on mobile, which is inconvenient and takes them out of the article. A Lightbox makes it all happen on one page smoothly.</p>

<h2>How BlogKub's Lightbox works (automatically)</h2>
<p>The highlight is that it <strong>works automatically with the images in the article content</strong>. Once you add the image zoom block to the theme, you just insert images in the post as usual through the Blogger editor, and those images become click-to-expand on their own with no per-image setup, no special code or extra tags needed.</p>
<p>When a reader clicks an image, the system shows the image full screen on a dark background, with a close button in the top corner. Readers can close by clicking the background, pressing the close button, or pressing the Esc key. It all uses a small script that loads no external files, and the image shown is the same one in the article, so it adds no loading burden and does not affect speed.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the Lightbox in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the image zoom block.</strong> Many templates already include it. If yours does not, open the left library, the "Article &amp; UX" category, and drag the "Image zoom (Lightbox)" block in.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Insert images in the article as usual.</strong> Insert images in the post through the Blogger editor as normal, and the content images become click-to-expand automatically with no extra setup.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test the zoom.</strong> Open a live article, click an image to see it expand full screen on the dark background, then close by clicking the background or the close button.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Lightbox and image SEO</h2>
<p>A Lightbox does not replace image SEO, but the two work well together. What gets an image into Google Images is a crawlable image URL, meaningful ALT text, and references in the content, which is about inserting images correctly. The Lightbox is about the user experience when viewing images on the page.</p>
<p>Because the Lightbox shows the same image that is in the article, without hiding or replacing it with something else, it does not affect how Google collects image data. You should still write good ALT text and use suitably high-quality images per image SEO principles, and let the Lightbox add a layer of viewing experience.</p>

<h2>Lightbox vs galleries and image sliders</h2>
<p>A Lightbox is often confused with a gallery or an image slider, but all three do different jobs and can complement each other. A Lightbox is clicking a single image to expand and view it closely. An image slider is arranging several images to scroll through in one area. A gallery is laying out several images as a grid. Each suits a different situation.</p>
<p>In practice, one article may use several together, such as an image slider to show a set of images concisely, and a Lightbox to expand and see the detail when a reader is especially interested in one image. Understanding the role of each feature helps you choose the right one for the content, instead of using everything at once until it is cluttered.</p>

<h2>Tips for preparing images for a Lightbox</h2>
<p>Because a Lightbox expands images full screen, the quality of the source image matters more than usual. Follow these principles so images still look good when expanded.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Upload a reasonable resolution.</strong> An image to be expanded should be wide enough (for example at least 1200 to 1600 pixels for important images) so it stays sharp full screen, but not so large that the file is heavy.</li>
  <li><strong>Balance sharpness and file size.</strong> Compress images suitably and use an appropriate image format so the page does not load slowly, especially articles with many images.</li>
  <li><strong>Make infographic text readable when expanded.</strong> If an image has text, check that it is actually readable when expanded full screen, because that is the main reason people expand it.</li>
  <li><strong>Write meaningful ALT for every image,</strong> for the benefit of both accessibility and image SEO.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Lightbox, speed, and accessibility</h2>
<p>A common worry is whether a feature like this will slow the site down. The answer is no, because BlogKub builds the Lightbox with a small script that catches the click and shows the expanded view. It does not load a heavy external library, and it does nothing until the reader clicks an image, so readers who do not click are not affected by speed at all.</p>
<p>On accessibility, offering several ways to close, clicking the background, the close button, and the Esc key, helps users with different preferences leave the expanded view easily. And because the image shown is the same one with the same ALT, the information for screen reader users remains complete.</p>

<p>In experience terms, in short, a Lightbox turns images from something glanced at into something readers can interact with. Being able to click and expand for a closer look makes readers stop and spend more time with the content, which is good for both reader understanding and the page's engagement signals.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>Clicking an image does not expand it</h3>
<p>Check that you added the image zoom block to the theme and Exported again. Images outside the article content (such as a logo or a UI icon) may not be set to expand, which is correct behavior.</p>
<h3>The expanded image is blurry</h3>
<p>This is because the source image is low resolution, so expanding it full screen is not sharp. We recommend uploading a sufficiently high resolution image, especially infographics and screenshots with text.</p>
<h3>You cannot close the Lightbox</h3>
<p>Normally you close by clicking the background, the close button, or Esc. If it sticks, check that there is no duplicate Lightbox script from elsewhere that might conflict.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Enable the Lightbox for blogs with high-detail images, such as photos, infographics, or screenshots.</li>
  <li>Upload sufficiently high resolution images so they stay sharp when expanded, especially images with text.</li>
  <li>Write meaningful ALT for every image per image SEO principles, so both search and accessibility benefit, and if you want readers to navigate long articles easily, try pairing it with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/back-to-top">Back to Top button</a>.</li>
  <li>Test clicking and closing on both desktop and mobile, since tapping to expand is used even more on mobile.</li>
  <li>If you have several related images, try grouping them in an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/slider">image slider/gallery</a> and let readers expand them with the Lightbox for a complete viewing experience.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>A Lightbox is a flourish that raises image viewing in an article to something convenient and professional, especially for photos, infographics, and screenshots with details to see up close. With BlogKub you just add the image zoom block and Export it to use, and the content images become click-to-expand full screen automatically, easy to close in several ways, using a light script that does not affect speed, and working well on both desktop and mobile, so readers can fully enjoy the images in your articles without leaving the page.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Do I have to set up each image one by one for Lightbox in BlogKub?</summary><p>No. Once you add the image zoom block to the theme, the images in the article content become click-to-expand full screen automatically. You just insert images in the post as usual, with no per-image setup.</p></details>
<details><summary>How do I close the Lightbox?</summary><p>You can close it several ways: click the dark background around the image, press the close button in the top corner, or in some cases press the Esc key on the keyboard, so readers can leave the expanded view easily.</p></details>
<details><summary>What kind of images is Lightbox good for?</summary><p>It suits images with details to see up close, such as photos, infographics, charts, and screenshots, because readers often want to expand to read text or small details that are not clear at normal size.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does Lightbox slow the site down?</summary><p>No. It uses a small script that catches the image click and shows the expanded view. It loads no extra external files, and the image is the same one in the article, so it does not affect Core Web Vitals.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does Lightbox work on mobile?</summary><p>Yes. On mobile, tapping an image to expand full screen is even more useful, because a small screen makes image details hard to see. Full screen expansion makes them clearer without pinch zooming.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/lightbox">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add a reading progress bar in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/progress</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/progress</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a reading progress bar at the top of the screen in a Blogger theme with BlogKub: adjust the height and color, light and does not affect speed, improves UX on long articles, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/progress.png" type="image/png" length="327427"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/progress.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/progress.png" alt="How to add a reading progress bar in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add a reading progress bar in a Blogger theme</h1>
<p class="lead">A thin bar at the top of the screen that fills as you scroll is a small detail that makes long articles feel manageable. This article teaches you how to add a reading progress bar to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, one whose color and height you can adjust, light and not affecting speed, along with the UX reasoning and the settings.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Progress Bar</strong> block in BlogKub (many templates already include it), choose the height and color (primary/accent/gradient), then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. You get a <strong>bar at the very top that fills from left to right as the reader scrolls</strong>. It uses a small script, does not affect speed, and makes long articles feel easy to read and encourages reading to the end.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/progress.png" aria-label="View the reading progress bar at full size">
    <img alt="A reading progress bar at the very top of a Blogger article page, filling according to how far the reader has scrolled" title="A reading progress bar" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/progress.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1640" data-original-height="532" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A reading progress bar at the very top, filling according to how far you have scrolled (about 62% in the image).</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a reading progress bar is</h2>
<p><strong>A reading progress bar is a thin bar fixed at the very top of the screen that gradually fills from left to right in proportion to how far the reader has scrolled down the article.</strong> When you scroll to the end of the article, the bar fills exactly. It acts like a gauge that says "how far you have read, and how much is left".</p>
<p>This idea comes from reading a paper book, where we can see the thickness of the remaining pages with our eyes. But on a screen we have no such signal. The progress bar fills this gap, giving readers a sense of control and a way to predict when they are about to finish.</p>

<h2>Why a progress bar helps people read to the end</h2>
<p>Behind this small feature is a powerful psychological principle. People tend to want to finish something they have started (the goal-gradient effect). When we see we have read halfway, we are more motivated to keep reading to the end than when we do not know how much is left. The progress bar turns the feeling of "is there still a long way to go?" into "just a little more and it is done".</p>
<p>For long articles, this feeling matters a lot, because an article with no signal of its length may make readers discouraged and quit midway. Conversely, when readers see they are near the end, they usually keep reading to the conclusion and the end sections, which is where you often place read-on links or various invitations.</p>

<h2>How BlogKub's progress bar works</h2>
<p>BlogKub's bar is a fixed element at the very top of the screen, with a small script that calculates what percentage of the page height the reader has scrolled down, then adjusts the bar's width to match. All of this uses very few resources, loads no external files, and does not affect site speed.</p>
<p>You can adjust both the bar's height (razor thin or slightly thicker) and its color, which can be the theme's primary, accent, or a gradient that feels premium. The bar also uses colors based on theme variables, so it changes automatically when you switch to dark mode or change the theme color.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the progress bar in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the Progress Bar block.</strong> Many templates already include it. If yours does not, open the left library, the "Article &amp; UX" category, and drag the "Progress Bar" block in.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Choose the bar height and color.</strong> Click the block to set the height (3 pixels is recommended for a nice thin look) and color (primary, accent, or gradient) to match your site's design.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test the scroll reading.</strong> Open a live article, scroll down and check the top bar fills according to how far you go. When you reach the end of the article, the bar should fill exactly.</li>
</ol>

<h2>How to choose a height and color that look good</h2>
<p>A good progress bar should be "noticeable but not intrusive". Follow these principles when setting it up.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Keep the height thin.</strong> Around 2 to 4 pixels is just right, thin enough not to steal attention from the content, but thick enough to see.</li>
  <li><strong>Use a color that contrasts with the header,</strong> so the bar stands out from the background. The theme's primary or accent color usually works well.</li>
  <li><strong>A gradient adds a premium touch.</strong> If you want a modern look, a gradient between the primary and accent colors gives a flowing feel as the bar expands.</li>
  <li><strong>Test both <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode</a> and light,</strong> because the bar is based on theme colors, so make sure it is clearly visible in both modes.</li>
</ul>

<h2>The progress bar and other features that pair with it</h2>
<p>The progress bar works best used together with other reading aids in long articles, such as a table of contents to jump to a heading, a back to top button for a quick return, and a read time badge that says in advance how many minutes it takes. Together these create a complete and professional reading experience.</p>
<p>In particular, pairing "read time" at the start of the article with the "progress bar" during reading gives readers two layers of information: knowing from the outset how long it will take, and seeing progress throughout, which reduces hesitation and encourages reading to the end.</p>
<p>Another benefit of seeing these features as a "set" is the consistency of experience. When every article on your site has a progress bar, a table of contents, and a back to top button that all work the same, readers learn how to use them once and become familiar on every page. This familiarity reduces reading friction and makes the site feel systematic and trustworthy, which is what readers remember and return for.</p>

<h2>The progress bar on mobile vs desktop</h2>
<p>Reading behavior on mobile and desktop differs, and the progress bar plays a different role on these two devices. On mobile, the narrow screen makes the same article run longer vertically, so readers scroll more often and longer. The progress bar is therefore even more useful, because it helps the seemingly endless scrolling feel like it has a visible end.</p>
<p>On desktop, the wide screen shows more content at once, but the bar still helps give an overview of where you are in the article. The advantage of a top-line bar is that it works the same on both devices with no separate adjustment, and because it is thin and at the very top edge, it does not take up valuable reading space on a mobile screen, unlike a circular or numeric progress indicator that may clutter a small screen.</p>

<h2>Why leading sites favor the progress bar</h2>
<p>If you observe many leading article and online media sites, you will see the progress bar has become a standard element of long-form pages. The reason is not just aesthetics, but that it solves a real problem of on-screen reading, namely the lack of a length signal that a paper book has naturally.</p>
<p>Those sites value metrics like time on page and completion rate, because they relate to revenue and reader engagement. The progress bar is one of the small tools that helps push these numbers up without bothering readers. Because BlogKub builds this same-level feature into the theme, your Blogger blog looks and works on the same level as a professional site, without you having to write any code yourself.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The bar does not move</h3>
<p>This means the page content is too short to scroll, or you have not added the Progress Bar block to the theme. Check that you added the block and test on an article long enough to scroll.</p>
<h3>The bar is hard to see</h3>
<p>Increase the height slightly or change to a color that contrasts more with the header, so it is clearly visible in both modes.</p>
<h3>The bar overlaps a sticky header</h3>
<p>The bar sits at the very top above everything, which is the standard position. If it feels like it overlaps a sticky header, reduce the bar height so it looks like a thin, blending line.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Use the progress bar on long articles that require scrolling, where it is most meaningful.</li>
  <li>Set the height thin (2 to 4 pixels) so it does not steal attention from the content.</li>
  <li>Choose a color clearly visible in both dark and light mode.</li>
  <li>Pair it with a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a>, a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/back-to-top">back to top button</a>, and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/readtime">read time</a> for a complete reading experience.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The reading progress bar is a small detail that has more of a feeling effect than you might think. It tells readers where they are and how much is left, which reduces discouragement and encourages reading to the end. With BlogKub you just add the Progress Bar block, choose the height and color you like, and Export it to use, getting a bar that is light, does not affect speed, and adjusts to the theme automatically. Paired with other reading aids, your long articles instantly look professional and become more enjoyable to read.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Does the reading progress bar slow the site down?</summary><p>No, it does not slow things down. The bar uses a very small script that only calculates the scroll position and adjusts the bar width. It loads no external files and does not significantly affect Core Web Vitals.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I adjust the bar's color and height?</summary><p>Yes. You can choose the bar height and color in the block settings, with the color set to the theme's primary, accent, or a gradient.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the progress bar show on every page or only articles?</summary><p>It is most suitable and meaningful on long article pages, because that is where readers want to know how much is left. You should use it on pages with content to scroll through.</p></details>
<details><summary>Where is the progress bar positioned?</summary><p>It sits fixed at the very top of the screen, filling from left to right in proportion to how far the reader has scrolled down, so it is always visible without covering content.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the progress bar help SEO?</summary><p>It is not a direct ranking factor, but it helps indirectly by making readers want to keep reading to the end, increasing time on page and reducing bounce, which are behavioral quality signals.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/progress">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build related posts in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add related posts to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, pulled automatically from the JSON feed by label, to raise further reading, reduce bounce, and build internal links that are good for SEO.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/related.png" type="image/png" length="312902"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/related.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/related.png" alt="How to build related posts in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build related posts in a Blogger theme, pulled automatically by label</h1>
<p class="lead">Offering "further reading" at the moment someone just finished reading is the easiest way to raise visits per session. This article teaches you how to add a related posts section to a Blogger theme with BlogKub that pulls posts in the same category automatically, along with the SEO reasoning and fixes.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner to Intermediate</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Related Posts</strong> block in BlogKub, set the heading, count, and columns, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. From there, <strong>add a category label to every post</strong> and the system pulls posts in the same category from the JSON feed and shows them at the end of the article automatically (excluding the one being read). It raises further reading and builds internal links good for SEO, with no plugin.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/related.png" aria-label="View the related posts section at the end of an article at full size">
    <img alt="A related posts section at the end of a Blogger article showing 4 cards of posts in the same category with images" title="Related posts at the end of an article" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/related.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1800" data-original-height="580" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">The related posts section, pulling posts in the same category from the JSON feed automatically.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What related posts is, and why every blog should have one</h2>
<p><strong>Related posts is a section that shows links to other articles on a similar topic, usually at the end of the content.</strong> The goal is to catch the moment a reader has just finished, the golden second when they are still interested in the subject, and offer further reading immediately, instead of letting them close the tab.</p>
<p>Think about your own experience. When you finish an article and see "other posts you might like" with a compelling heading, you often click through without realizing it. That is the power of related posts. It turns a single visit into reading several articles, raising both the reader's bond with the site and the chance they remember it and come back.</p>

<h2>How BlogKub's related posts works</h2>
<p>The highlight is that it <strong>pulls data automatically from Blogger's JSON feed by the current post's first label.</strong> When a reader opens an article in the "Travel" category, the system calls that category's feed, pulls other posts in the same category, filters out the one being read, and shows them as cards with an image and heading. All of this happens with no database setup, no plugin to install, and no manually picking articles one by one.</p>
<p>Because it is a live pull, every time you publish a new post in a category, the related posts section of the older posts in that category can update automatically. This keeps your content interlinked in a living way, with no need to go back and edit old links.</p>

<h2>How related posts helps SEO</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>More pages per session:</strong> readers click to read on, viewing several pages in one visit, a signal that the site has content people care about.</li>
  <li><strong>Lower immediate bounce:</strong> having on-target further reading reduces the chance someone closes the tab after a single article.</li>
  <li><strong>Builds internal links with context:</strong> links between posts in the same category help Google understand that this group of content is related, and spread internal link equity.</li>
  <li><strong>Reinforces topical authority:</strong> when articles on the same topic interlink densely, the site looks like an in-depth source on that subject, which is good for the rankings of the whole category.</li>
</ul>

<h2 id="step1">How to add related posts in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li id="step2"><strong>Add the Related Posts block.</strong> Many templates install it already. If yours does not, open the left library, category "Article &amp; UX", and drag the "Related Posts" block in. The system places it at the end of the article automatically.</li>
  <li><strong>Set the heading, count, and columns.</strong> Click the block to set the section heading (such as "Related posts" or "Keep reading"), the number of articles shown, the number of columns, and whether to show images in the cards.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Add a category label to every post.</strong> In the post editor's label field, add the post's category, because the system pulls related posts from the first label. A well-planned label makes the recommendations accurate.</li>
</ol>
<p class="note">The related posts section is wrapped in a <code>data:view.isSingleItem</code> condition, so it shows only on article pages, and if there are no other posts in the category, the system hides the section automatically so it does not leave an empty space.</p>

<h2>Plan your labels so related posts are accurate</h2>
<p>Because the system uses the first label to find posts in the same category, the quality of your related posts depends on your labeling system. Follow these principles:</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Plan your main categories in advance,</strong> roughly 5 to 8 for a typical blog, then sort every post into these categories, so you get clearly connected groups of articles.</li>
  <li><strong>Make the first label the main category,</strong> broad enough to hold several articles, not a specific term with a single article, because a category with one article has no recommendations to offer.</li>
  <li><strong>Write enough articles in each category,</strong> at least 4 to 5 per category, so the system has options to show.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Related posts vs random/latest, which to use</h2>
<p>BlogKub has both a "Related Posts" block (by category) and a "Random/Latest by label" block, which serve different purposes.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Related posts</strong> emphasizes being "on topic", ideal at the end of an article to offer further reading on the same subject, good for topical authority.</li>
  <li><strong>Random/latest</strong> emphasizes "variety or freshness", ideal for pulling people to explore the site's other content, or showing the newest articles.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can use both on one page, such as related posts at the end of the content and random/latest in the sidebar or at the very bottom, so readers have both an on-topic and an exploratory path to read on.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The related posts section does not show</h3>
<p>The common cause is that the post has no label, or the category has only one article (the one being read). Add a category label and write more articles in that category, and the section will appear.</p>
<h3>The recommendations are not on topic</h3>
<p>This comes from a first label that is too broad or mixed. Reorganize your labels so the first label is a category that clearly conveys the topic, and the recommendations will be more accurate.</p>
<h3>Card images do not show</h3>
<p>Because the source article has no first image or featured image. Add at least one image to the article so the system can pull it as the card image.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Place related posts at the end of the content before the comments, to catch the moment the reader has just finished.</li>
  <li>Setting 4 articles in 2 columns is a good default that looks good on both desktop and mobile.</li>
  <li>Add a featured image to every article so the related posts cards are clickable.</li>
  <li>Pair it with <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/breadcrumb">breadcrumbs</a> and in-content internal links to build a web of links that helps both readers and rankings.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Make related posts cards more clickable</h2>
<p>The system pulls articles for you automatically, but what decides whether people click is the "heading" and "featured image" of the destination article. So making related posts genuinely clickable starts when you write each article, not on the block itself.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Write article headings that invite the click.</strong> A heading that states a clear benefit or sparks curiosity draws clicks well when it appears in another article's related posts card.</li>
  <li><strong>Add a meaningful, sharp featured image,</strong> because the card uses the article's first or featured image. A good image makes the card catch the eye and feel credible.</li>
  <li><strong>Write articles in the same category as a connected series,</strong> such as several angles on "visiting Chiang Mai", so when someone finishes one, the cards offer other pieces in the series they are likely to want next.</li>
</ul>
<p>When every article in a category is written with care in both heading and image, the related posts section becomes a powerful engine for further reading, because every card that appears is clickable.</p>

<h2>Related posts and the mobile experience</h2>
<p>Most people read blogs on mobile, so the layout of related posts has to account for a narrow screen. The recommended value is 2 columns, which on mobile stack or shrink to thumb-sized cards that are easy to read and tap. Setting 4 articles is just right, not so many that you scroll a long way after finishing, and not so few that there is no choice.</p>
<p>Be careful not to set too many columns on mobile, because the cards get so small the heading is unreadable and the image unclear. Let the system handle the responsive behavior from the values you set, for a balanced result on both desktop and mobile.</p>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>Related posts is a feature that turns a single visit into reading several articles, helping raise time on site, reduce bounce, and build internal links good for SEO. With BlogKub, you just add the block, set the heading and count, and label your posts by category with discipline, and the system pulls posts in the same category from the JSON feed for you automatically, with no plugin or complex setup.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Where does related posts in BlogKub get its data?</summary><p>It pulls automatically from Blogger's JSON feed by the current post's first label. The system pulls other posts in the same category, excludes the article being read, and needs no database setup or plugin.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do I have to label posts to get related posts?</summary><p>Yes. The system uses the first label to find posts in the same category. If a post has no label, the related posts section will not show, so it does not leave a gap.</p></details>
<details><summary>How do related posts help SEO?</summary><p>They raise time on site and pages per visit, reduce bounce, and build internal links between posts in the same category, which spreads link equity and reinforces the site's topical authority.</p></details>
<details><summary>What if a category has few posts?</summary><p>The system shows what it has. If there are no other posts in the category, the section hides automatically. So write a reasonable number of posts per category to have recommendations to offer.</p></details>
<details><summary>Which pages show related posts?</summary><p>They show on single article pages, usually at the end of the content before the comments, to offer further reading right when the reader has just finished.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add a sticky side share bar in Blogger articles</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sharebar</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sharebar</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a sticky side share bar to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: buttons for Facebook, X, LINE, and copy link, floating along with scroll on article pages, choose the left or right side, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/sharebar.png" type="image/png" length="327470"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/sharebar.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/sharebar.png" alt="How to add a sticky side share bar in Blogger articles" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add a sticky side share bar in Blogger articles</h1>
<p class="lead">When readers like your article, what you want them to do next is share it with friends. A sticky side share bar keeps the share buttons in view throughout the reading, clickable the moment they feel like spreading the word. This article teaches you how to add one to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, with a copy link button, a choice of side, and showing only on article pages.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>sticky side share bar</strong> block in BlogKub, choose the <strong>left/right</strong> side and the <strong>Facebook, X, LINE, copy link</strong> channels, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. The bar floats on the side, mid-screen, only on article pages, uses the clean canonical link (stripping m=1), and hides on mobile automatically so as not to cover content.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/sharebar.png" aria-label="View the sticky side share bar on an article page at full size">
    <img alt="A vertical floating share bar on the left of a Blogger article page with Facebook, X, LINE, and copy link buttons" title="A sticky side share bar on an article page" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/sharebar.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1520" data-original-height="640" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A floating share bar on the left, following the eye throughout the reading, with Facebook, X, LINE, and copy link buttons.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What a sticky side share bar is</h2>
<p><strong>A sticky side share bar is a vertical bar of social share buttons fixed mid-edge on the left or right of the screen, floating along with the reader's eye throughout scrolling.</strong> Unlike share buttons placed at the end of an article, which readers only see once they finish, the floating bar keeps the share buttons within reach at all times. Whenever a reader feels impressed, they can click share immediately without scrolling to find it.</p>
<p>This format is a standard on many news sites and professional blogs, because it captures the "urge to share" best. The intent to share is a fleeting moment. If the button is out of reach, the impulse fades. The floating side bar therefore helps turn a good feeling into an actual action.</p>

<h2>Why it shows only on article pages</h2>
<p>BlogKub's share bar is designed to <strong>show only on single post pages</strong>, not appearing on the homepage or index pages. The reason is straightforward: people share an "article", not an "index page". Showing share buttons on the homepage is useless and just clutters the eye. The system uses Blogger's condition to check that the current page is an article first, then shows the bar.</p>
<p>Scoping it this way is an example of context-aware design. Each element should appear where it is meaningful. When the share bar is only on pages where readers are actually consuming content, it does its job fully without becoming a distraction on other pages.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the sticky side share bar in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the share bar block.</strong> Open the left block library, the "Article &amp; UX" category, and drag the "Sticky side share bar" block into the page.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Choose the side and share channels.</strong> Set the bar to the left or right side, and toggle the Facebook, X (Twitter), LINE, and copy link channels as you like.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test the sharing.</strong> Open a live article page, click each share channel and the copy link button, confirming the shared link matches the page and is a clean URL.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Which side to choose: left or right</h2>
<p>Choosing the share bar's side depends on your layout and reader behavior. Generally, the ideas are as follows.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Left:</strong> the classic position many news sites and blogs use, because the eye of readers of left-to-right languages usually starts on the left. It suits layouts where content is centered with free space on the left.</li>
  <li><strong>Right:</strong> ideal when your layout already has a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">table of contents</a> or other element on the left. Placing the share bar on the right keeps the two from colliding, and most people's mouse hand reaches right easily.</li>
</ul>
<p>The recommendation is to see which side of the site has more free space and does not overlap other floating elements, such as a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/back-to-top">back to top button</a>, and choose that side. Test it on a wide screen to make sure the bar does not cover content or other buttons.</p>

<h2>The copy link button: an overlooked share channel</h2>
<p>Many people think only of the big social buttons, but in reality, a lot of sharing happens by "copying the link and pasting it" into a private chat, a LINE group, or an app with no dedicated share button. The copy link button is therefore a powerful but often overlooked share channel. BlogKub's share bar includes it, and when clicked, it shows a brief confirmation that it was copied.</p>
<p>The refined part is that the copied link and the link shared to every channel are made clean. The system pulls the page's canonical link and strips the <code>m=1</code> parameter that Blogger appends for the mobile version, so the link readers share out is always the main URL that matches the real page, not a version with a trailing parameter that looks ugly and may cause confusion.</p>

<h2>The share bar on mobile: why it hides</h2>
<p>On mobile, screen space is very limited, and a vertical floating bar on the side would cover content and take up reading space unnecessarily. BlogKub therefore <strong>hides the floating bar on small screens automatically</strong> to keep the mobile reading experience clean. This is a reader-first design decision, rather than cramming share buttons everywhere.</p>
<p>If you want mobile readers to be able to share too, the good solution is the inline Social Share block that places share buttons in the article content (such as at the end), which suits every screen size. Used together with the floating side bar on desktop, it covers both reader groups neatly, with each working where it fits best.</p>

<h2>The share bar and site growth</h2>
<p>Social sharing is one of a blog's most powerful growth channels, because it is word of mouth from person to person, which carries more credibility than ads. When readers share your article with friends, those who see it usually click out of trust, and some become new readers who share again, creating a natural growth cycle.</p>
<p>Although share counts are not a direct ranking factor, the increased traffic and visibility from sharing often lead to other positive signals such as mentions and backlinks from other sites. Used together with quality content and reading aids such as <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related articles</a> that invite reading on, your site has a chance to grow sustainably.</p>

<h2>Examples of use in different kinds of blogs</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>News and trending blogs:</strong> timely content is often shared the moment it is read, and the floating side bar captures this well.</li>
  <li><strong>How-to and tips blogs:</strong> readers often want to send good tips to a friend facing the same problem, and the share and copy link buttons make forwarding easy.</li>
  <li><strong>Review blogs:</strong> people often share reviews with someone deciding to buy, and the copy link button suits sending in a private chat.</li>
  <li><strong>Travel and lifestyle blogs:</strong> content with beautiful images and interesting stories tends to be shared a lot, and the floating bar lets people share at any moment.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The share bar does not appear</h3>
<p>Check that you added the share bar block and Exported again, and view it on a real "single post page", because the bar shows only on article pages, not the homepage. If viewing on mobile, the bar is hidden by design, so test on a wide screen.</p>
<h3>The shared link has m=1 at the end</h3>
<p>Normally the system strips this parameter. If you still see it, check that your page has a correct canonical tag, which BlogKub's theme already includes. A correct canonical helps keep the shared link clean.</p>
<h3>The bar overlaps another floating button</h3>
<p>If you use several floating buttons, such as a back to top button or a theme color picker, choose a side for the share bar different from those buttons so they do not overlap.</p>
<h3>You want share buttons on mobile too</h3>
<p>Use the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/share">inline Social Share block</a> placed in the article alongside the floating bar, to cover mobile readers for whom the floating bar is hidden.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Choose the side with free space that does not overlap the table of contents or other floating buttons.</li>
  <li>Always enable the copy link button, because it is a share channel people really use in private chat.</li>
  <li>Choose only the channels your readers actually use, no need to enable every button and clutter it.</li>
  <li>Complement it with the inline Social Share block to serve mobile readers.</li>
  <li>Test that the shared link is a clean URL and opens the correct page.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The sticky side share bar is a tool that precisely captures a reader's "urge to share". With BlogKub you just add the block, choose the left/right side and the Facebook, X, LINE channels plus a copy link button, and Export it to use. The bar floats on the side only on article pages, uses the clean canonical link, and hides on mobile so as not to cover content. Complemented with an inline share button for mobile, your site is ready for readers to spread the word at every moment and on every device, which is a key foundation of word-of-mouth growth.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>On which pages does the sticky side share bar show?</summary><p>It shows only on single post pages, because that is where readers are reading content and are likely to want to share. The system uses Blogger's condition to check the page is an article before showing the bar, so it does not clutter the homepage or index pages.</p></details>
<details><summary>Which channels can I share to?</summary><p>It supports Facebook, X (Twitter), and LINE, plus a copy link button. You can toggle each channel as you like. The copy link button is very useful for sharing through chat or other channels with no dedicated button.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the share bar show on mobile?</summary><p>The floating side bar is designed for wide screens and hides on mobile automatically so as not to cover content. If you want share buttons on mobile, we recommend using the inline Social Share block in the article alongside.</p></details>
<details><summary>Is the shared link a correct URL?</summary><p>Yes. The system pulls the page's canonical link and strips parameters like Blogger's m=1, so the shared link is a clean URL that matches the real page, not the mobile version with a trailing parameter.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the share bar help SEO and reach?</summary><p>It helps indirectly. Social sharing increases reach and traffic, which may lead to links and popularity signals. When more people share your content, the chance of mentions and backlinks grows naturally.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/sharebar">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add Web Stories (tap-to-view fullscreen circles) in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/stories</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/stories</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add Web Stories to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: show story circles from your latest posts, tap to view fullscreen with auto-advance like Instagram/IG Stories, pulled from your own Blogger feed, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/stories.png" type="image/png" length="334675"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/stories.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/stories.png" alt="How to add Web Stories (tap-to-view fullscreen circles) in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add Web Stories (tap-to-view fullscreen circles) in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">The "stories" format of tap-to-view fullscreen circles we know from Instagram and Facebook is a presentation users love and understand instantly. BlogKub brings this format to Blogger by pulling your own posts to show as stories automatically. This article teaches you how to set it up from start to finish, along with the engagement reasoning and how to fix problems.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 10 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Stories (Web Stories)</strong> block in BlogKub, set the count, label, and time per slide, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. The system shows <strong>story circles from your latest posts</strong>, tapped to view <strong>fullscreen with auto-advance</strong>, with a progress bar, previous/next buttons, and a read article button, pulling from your own Blogger feed with no separate story uploads.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/stories.png" aria-label="View the Web Stories circles bar at full size">
    <img alt="A bar of Web Stories circles from the latest posts on a Blogger site, a colored ring means unviewed, a gray ring means viewed" title="A bar of Web Stories circles" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/stories.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1520" data-original-height="486" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">Story circles from the latest posts, tap to view fullscreen. A colored ring means unviewed, a gray ring means viewed.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What Web Stories as circles are</h2>
<p><strong>Web Stories in this context are a bar of circular post cover images placed at the top of the page. When tapped, a fullscreen view opens showing the image and title one slide at a time, with auto-advance,</strong> like viewing stories on social media. This format is powerful because today's users are deeply familiar with it and need to learn nothing new. They instinctively know to tap to view, tap left to go back, and tap right to skip.</p>
<p>What makes this feature special on BlogKub is that it <strong>pulls your own posts to show automatically</strong>. You do not create or upload stories separately like standard Web Stories that require separate AMP pages. Instead, the system takes the cover image and title of the posts you have already published and wraps them into stories, giving a story experience with almost no extra work.</p>

<h2>How the stories pull data from the Blogger feed</h2>
<p>The heart of this feature is using the <strong>Blogger post feed</strong> (the JSON feed system Blogger provides built-in). When the page loads, the system calls the latest posts feed for the number you set, pulls the cover image and title of each post to build the story circles, and when a reader taps to view, the system shows a larger version of the image in the fullscreen view, with a link to the real article.</p>
<p>Because it works with the feed directly, your stories <strong>update themselves automatically</strong>. Every time you publish a new post, it appears in the stories without you editing the theme or adding anything. This is a key advantage over building fixed stories that must be updated by hand each time.</p>
<div class="note">Tip: because the stories use post cover images, choosing beautiful, meaningful cover images matters a lot. An attractive cover image makes the story circle clickable and the fullscreen view look good.</div>

<h2 id="step1">How to add Web Stories in BlogKub step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the stories block.</strong> Open the left block library and drag the "Stories (Web Stories)" block into the page, usually near the top of the homepage so it is seen before other content.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Set the count, label, and time per slide.</strong> Set the number of stories to show, add a label if you want to pull only certain categories, and set the time each slide shows before auto-advancing (default around 5 seconds).</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test opening the stories.</strong> Open the live site, tap a story circle to view fullscreen, check the auto-advance, the top progress bar, the previous/next buttons, closing, and the read article button.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Elements of the fullscreen story view</h2>
<p>When a reader taps a story circle, the fullscreen view opens with elements designed to be familiar and easy to use.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Top progress bar:</strong> shows which slide out of the total you are viewing and the remaining time of the current slide, exactly like stories on social media.</li>
  <li><strong>Fullscreen image:</strong> a larger version of the post cover image, filling the screen, giving an immersive feel.</li>
  <li><strong>Title and date:</strong> the post title and publish date at the bottom, helping readers know what they are viewing.</li>
  <li><strong>Read article button:</strong> a button that goes to the full article, turning "viewing a story" into "actually reading".</li>
  <li><strong>Navigation:</strong> tap the left side to go back, the right side to skip, a close button in the top right, and keyboard arrow key support for desktop users.</li>
</ul>

<h2>The "viewed/unviewed" ring: a familiar detail</h2>
<p>The small detail that makes this feature feel like real stories is the <strong>colored ring around the circle</strong>. An unviewed story has a bright gradient ring, while a viewed story's ring turns gray, like we see on social apps. The system remembers this state in the reader's browser, so they instantly know which stories they have not yet viewed.</p>
<p>This detail may seem minor, but it is what creates "familiarity", which is the key to a good experience. When everything works as users expect from social stories, they use it smoothly without thinking, and that makes them willing to explore more of your posts.</p>

<h2>Web Stories, engagement, and content discovery</h2>
<p>The classic blog problem is that readers often come to read one article and leave, without knowing you have much more good content. Web Stories solve this in a fun way, because they invite readers to "swipe" through several posts quickly in an enjoyable format. When they find a topic of interest, they tap the read article button to read it in full.</p>
<p>The result is that readers explore more of your content, stay on the site longer, and have a chance of finding an article that resonates until they become regular readers. Used together with other discovery elements such as <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related articles</a> that recommend nearby topics and <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/bookmark">bookmarks</a> to save for later, your site systematically turns passing visitors into engaged readers.</p>

<h2>Performance considerations</h2>
<p>Because the stories pull data from the feed when the page loads, you should set a reasonable number of stories, not more than necessary. Showing around 6 to 10 stories is usually just right for both interest and speed. The images used in the circles are small thumbnails, so they load fast, while the large images in the fullscreen view load only when a reader taps to view.</p>
<p>This approach keeps the feature beautiful without affecting homepage speed much. That said, choosing post cover images with suitable file sizes also helps both the stories and the overall page load fast, which is good for both readers and Core Web Vitals scores.</p>

<h2>Examples of using Web Stories in different kinds of blogs</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Travel blogs:</strong> stories full of beautiful destination images invite swiping and tapping into full reviews, ideal for image-led content.</li>
  <li><strong>Food and cafe blogs:</strong> images of menus and the atmosphere in story format stir appetite very well.</li>
  <li><strong>Fashion and lifestyle blogs:</strong> the story format fits image-led content naturally and matches this audience's behavior.</li>
  <li><strong>News/update blogs:</strong> use stories to highlight the latest posts or important categories, letting readers see the activity before scrolling to read.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The story circles do not show</h3>
<p>The system hides the story bar if it cannot pull posts. Check that your blog has published posts, and if you set a label, make sure there are actually posts in that category. If you set a label with no posts, there are no stories to show.</p>
<h3>The image in a story does not appear or is blurry</h3>
<p>The stories use post cover images. If a post has no cover image, its story may have no image. We recommend adding a quality cover image to every post so the stories look good.</p>
<h3>The stories show posts not in the category you want</h3>
<p>Check that you set the label to match the label actually used on the posts. The label must be spelled the same to pull the right category.</p>
<h3>You want the stories to show only on the homepage</h3>
<p>Place the stories block in the position you want, and consider your page structure so the stories appear in a suitable spot, such as the top of the homepage where readers see it first.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Add beautiful, meaningful cover images to every post, because the stories use these directly.</li>
  <li>Set a reasonable number of stories (around 6 to 10) to balance interest and speed.</li>
  <li>Place the story bar near the top of the homepage so it is seen before other content.</li>
  <li>Use a label if you want to highlight only a category you want to promote.</li>
  <li>Complement it with <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/related">related articles</a> so readers who tap from a story can read on.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>Web Stories bring the presentation format users love from social media to your Blogger blog. With BlogKub you just add the stories block, set the count, label, and time per slide, and Export it to use, and the system pulls your latest posts to show as story circles tapped to view fullscreen with auto-advance, with a progress bar, a viewed/unviewed ring, and a read article button, all updating themselves from the Blogger feed with no separate story creation. This feature boosts engagement, gets readers exploring more of your content, and turns visitors into engaged readers in a fun and natural way.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Where do the post stories pull their data from?</summary><p>They pull from your own Blogger post feed (feeds/posts/default), using the cover image and title of your latest posts, so you do not upload stories separately. The system creates stories from the posts you have already published automatically.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I limit it to pull only certain categories?</summary><p>Yes. Set a label to pull stories only from posts in that category, such as showing only travel posts. If you set no label, the system pulls from all the latest posts.</p></details>
<details><summary>Do the stories remember which have been viewed?</summary><p>Yes. When a reader views a story, that story's colored ring turns gray to show it has been viewed, storing the state in the reader's browser, helping them know which stories they have not yet viewed.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can viewers skip or go back a slide?</summary><p>Yes. Each slide auto-advances by the set time, with a progress bar at the top. Viewers tap the left side to go back, the right side to skip, tap close, or use the keyboard arrow keys, and there is a read article button to go to the full content.</p></details>
<details><summary>How do Web Stories help engagement?</summary><p>They grab attention with a format users are familiar with from social media, letting readers explore several posts fun and fast, increasing clicks into full articles and time on the site.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/stories">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add a Theme Color Picker letting readers change your site color in Blogger</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/themepicker</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/themepicker</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a Theme Color Picker to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, letting readers change the site&apos;s main color themselves: several preset color tones, remembers the choice in the browser, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/themepicker.png" type="image/png" length="344195"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/themepicker.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/themepicker.png" alt="How to add a Theme Color Picker letting readers change your site color in Blogger" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add a Theme Color Picker letting readers change your site color in Blogger</h1>
<p class="lead">What if readers could choose your site's color to their liking? A theme color picker gives readers that small power, creating a sense of ownership and fun in interacting. This article teaches you how to add one to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, with preset colors, remembering the choice, and the reasoning for why this feature is appealing.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About an 8 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Theme color</strong> block in BlogKub, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. You get a <strong>floating button</strong> readers click to open a color panel with <strong>several preset tones</strong> (indigo, rose, green, amber, blue, purple, gray, plus the original). When chosen, the site's accent color changes immediately, and it <strong>remembers the value in each reader's browser</strong> without affecting other readers.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/themepicker.png" aria-label="View the theme color button and preset color panel at full size">
    <img alt="A floating theme color button and a preset color panel on a Blogger site, letting readers change the site's accent color" title="The theme color button and preset color panel" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/themepicker.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1280" data-original-height="860" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A floating button in the bottom right opens the theme color panel, readers choose the site's accent tone themselves, and the color changes immediately.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>What the theme color picker is</h2>
<p><strong>A Theme Color Picker is a floating button that lets readers open a panel to choose the site's "accent color" themselves.</strong> The accent color is the main color that appears on important elements such as buttons, links, icons, and spots that draw the eye. When a reader picks a tone they like, these elements across the whole site change color immediately in real time.</p>
<p>This is a "personalization" feature that lets readers customize their own experience. Even though it is a small change, it creates a sense of engagement and fun. Some readers like a calming blue, some like a bright pink. Letting them choose makes your site feel "friendly" and attentive to each person's preference.</p>

<h2>How it works: changes immediately and remembers</h2>
<p>When you add this block, the system places a round floating button in the bottom right of the screen. When a reader clicks, a small panel opens with color previews as circles to choose from. When the reader taps a color, the system updates the site's main color variable immediately, so every element using the accent color changes in an instant, with no page reload.</p>
<p>The key point is that the system <strong>remembers the reader's chosen color in their browser</strong>, so when they return on the same device, the color they picked is still there, with no need to choose again every time. And because it is stored on the reader's side, one person's color change <strong>does not affect other readers</strong> or the site's default. Each person has their own color version.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the theme color picker in BlogKub step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li><strong>Add the theme color block.</strong> Open the left block library and drag the "Theme color" block into the page, to place the floating button and color panel.</li>
  <li id="step2"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Test the color change.</strong> Open the live site, click the floating theme color button, and choose various tones, checking that the site's accent color (buttons, links) changes immediately.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Check it remembers after refresh.</strong> Refresh the page to confirm the chosen color stays, because the system stores the value in the reader's browser.</li>
</ol>

<h2>Preset colors: why not free color choice</h2>
<p>BlogKub's theme color picker offers <strong>curated preset colors</strong> rather than free choice of every shade. This is a deliberate design decision, because each curated tone is paired to go together and read easily on the site's background, in both light and dark mode. If free color choice were allowed, readers might pick a color too faint to read, or one that clashes with the background and looks bad.</p>
<p>The available tones cover popular main colors such as indigo, rose, emerald green, amber, blue, purple, and gray, plus a "return to the original" option for the theme. This set is wide enough for readers to find a color they like, but not so many as to confuse, a balance between freedom to choose and the guarantee that the result always looks good.</p>
<div class="note">This same principle applies to good design in general: offering choices that are "all good" beats offering unlimited freedom that may lead to bad results.</div>

<h2>Theme color picker vs dark mode: different dimensions, usable together</h2>
<p>Many readers confuse the theme color picker with <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode</a>. Both are reader-side customization, but they do different things.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Dark mode:</strong> switches the "brightness" of the background between light and dark, for comfortable reading in different lighting.</li>
  <li><strong>Theme color picker:</strong> changes the site's "accent tone", for color preference and identity.</li>
</ul>
<p>The two work in different dimensions and complement each other perfectly. A reader might choose dark mode with an emerald green accent, or light mode with pink, as they like. Enabling both features makes your site fully customizable in both brightness and color tone, letting readers design their own experience fully.</p>

<h2>Benefits for engagement and a sense of ownership</h2>
<p>A personalization feature like this has an interesting psychological effect. When a reader takes action to customize something on your site, even just changing a color, they feel more engaged and attached to it, because it becomes "their version" of the site. This small sense of ownership increases the chance they remember the site and return.</p>
<p>Besides, having a color picker also signals that your site is modern and attentive to detail, which affects the first impression and credibility. Used together with other experience-raising features such as dark mode and a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/progress">reading progress bar</a>, your site feels like a polished product, not just an ordinary blog.</p>

<h2>A consideration: do not let floating buttons clutter</h2>
<p>The theme color picker is a floating button in the bottom right, the same area other floating buttons often sit, such as a <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/back-to-top">back to top button</a> or a dark mode button in some layouts. If you enable several floating buttons at once, check that they do not overlap or crowd until it looks cluttered.</p>
<p>The recommendation is to enable only the floating features genuinely necessary for your site's experience. The theme color picker suits sites that want to emphasize fun and personalization, while sites focused on simplicity might choose not to enable it. Having the right features beats cramming everything in until the screen is full of buttons.</p>

<h2>Examples of use in different kinds of blogs</h2>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Personal and lifestyle blogs:</strong> fits a fun character, letting readers choose a color reflecting their mood.</li>
  <li><strong>Tech and tool blogs:</strong> these readers love to customize, and a color feature matches their expectation of flexibility.</li>
  <li><strong>Fashion and creative blogs:</strong> playing with color is part of the site's identity, and a color picker adds appeal.</li>
  <li><strong>Portfolio sites:</strong> shows you care about detail and UX, which is a selling point for creative professionals.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The floating button does not appear</h3>
<p>Check that you added the theme color block and Exported again. The button floats in the bottom right. If another floating button is in the same spot, you may need to check they do not overlap.</p>
<h3>Choosing a color does not change some parts</h3>
<p>The color picker changes the "accent color" used on buttons, links, and main elements. Elements with their own fixed color may not change, which is normal when using the accent as a central variable.</p>
<h3>The chosen color is lost after clearing browser data</h3>
<p>This is normal behavior, because the chosen color is stored in the browser. If the reader clears the site data, the value returns to the theme's default.</p>
<h3>You want to lock the default color to the brand color</h3>
<p>You can already set the theme's default color in BlogKub. The color picker is just an extra option for readers. The default that new visitors always see first is the brand color you set.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Set the theme's default color to your brand color, with the color picker as an extra option for readers.</li>
  <li>Enable the color picker when your site emphasizes fun and personalization, not every site needs it.</li>
  <li>Be careful not to let several floating buttons overlap into clutter, enable only what is necessary.</li>
  <li>Use it together with <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode</a> so readers can adjust both brightness and color tone.</li>
  <li>Test that every selectable tone still reads easily in both light and dark mode.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The theme color picker gives readers a small customization power, changing the site's accent color to their liking in a few clicks. With BlogKub you just add the theme color block and Export it to use, and readers get a floating button that opens a panel of several preset tones, and choosing one changes the site color immediately and remembers the value in their own browser without affecting others. This feature creates a sense of engagement and ownership, makes the site feel modern and detail-attentive, and used together with dark mode, lets readers design their own experience fully in both brightness and color tone.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>What does the theme color picker do?</summary><p>It is a floating button that lets readers open a panel to choose the site's main (accent) color themselves. When they pick a tone, the site's accent color across the whole page changes immediately, such as buttons, links, and elements using the main color, letting readers adjust the site's look to their liking.</p></details>
<details><summary>How many colors are there to choose from?</summary><p>There are several preset tones to choose from, such as indigo, rose, emerald green, amber, blue, purple, and gray, plus an option to return to the theme's original color. It covers the popular main tones without confusing readers with too many choices.</p></details>
<details><summary>Is the reader's chosen color remembered?</summary><p>Yes. The system stores the reader's chosen color in their browser. When they return on the same device, the color they picked is still there, giving a continuous experience without choosing again every time.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does one reader's color change affect other readers?</summary><p>No. The color change is each reader's own value stored in their own browser. Other readers and the site's default do not change. As the site owner, you still set the default color as usual.</p></details>
<details><summary>How is the theme color picker different from dark mode?</summary><p>Dark mode switches between a light and dark background for comfortable reading, while the theme color picker changes the site's accent color. They are different dimensions of reader-side customization and can be used together, so readers can adjust both brightness and color tone.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/themepicker">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to build an automatic table of contents (TOC) in Blogger, a detailed guide</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to build an automatic table of contents (TOC) in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, generated from your H2/H3 headings with clickable jumps, plus the SEO benefits, settings, common problems, and detailed fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/toc.png" type="image/png" length="310760"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/toc.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/toc.png" alt="How to build an automatic table of contents (TOC) in Blogger, a detailed guide" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to build an automatic table of contents in a Blogger theme, a detailed step-by-step guide</h1>
<p class="lead">A clickable table of contents is one of the elements that instantly makes a long article feel professional. This article teaches you how to add a table of contents generated automatically from your H2/H3 headings in a Blogger theme with BlogKub, from the start to uploading it live, along with the SEO reasoning and fixes for common problems.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Table of Contents (TOC)</strong> block in BlogKub (many templates install it already), set the heading, depth (H2 or H2+H3), and numbering, then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. From there, write your article with headings set as H2/H3 and the table of contents is generated and updated automatically. It raises time on page and opens the door to jump-links in the Google results.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/toc.png" aria-label="View the automatic table of contents that BlogKub generates at full size">
    <img alt="An automatic table of contents in a Blogger article, built from H2 and H3 headings with jump links to each heading" title="The automatic table of contents that BlogKub generates" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/toc.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="740" data-original-width="1480" data-original-height="366" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">The table of contents BlogKub builds from H2/H3 headings automatically. Click any item to jump to that heading.</figcaption>
</figure>




<h2>What a table of contents is, and why long articles need one</h2>
<p><strong>A table of contents (TOC) is a box of headings placed at the top of an article, where each item is a link that jumps straight to that heading when clicked.</strong> For an article longer than one screen, a table of contents changes the reading experience from "scroll around looking" to "see the overview and pick what you want to read", instantly.</p>
<p>In reader psychology, a table of contents acts like a map. When people see that an article covers the topic they are looking for, they are confident they are in the right place and stay to read, instead of closing within a few seconds. This is why world-class quality sites, such as online encyclopedias and technical manuals, almost all use a table of contents on long content.</p>
<p>The problem is that Blogger has no built-in table of contents, and the old way to make one means inserting a long block of JavaScript into every post, which is fiddly and breaks easily. BlogKub solves this by embedding the table of contents system into the theme at the template level once, so every article gets an automatic table of contents without you ever touching code in the post.</p>

<h2>How a table of contents helps SEO</h2>
<p>A table of contents helps more than just the reader. It sends several positive signals to search engines:</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>More time on page (dwell time):</strong> when people find the heading they want quickly, they stay longer and tend to read several sections, reducing bounce, which is an indirect quality signal.</li>
  <li><strong>A chance at jump-to links in the results:</strong> Google often pulls anchor links from the table of contents to show as sub-links under a result, letting users jump straight to the section they want, adding space and click-through.</li>
  <li><strong>Forces a clear heading structure:</strong> because the table of contents is built from H2/H3, to get a clean one you have to order your headings logically, which is exactly what Google uses to understand the outline, and helps AI summarize the content accurately.</li>
  <li><strong>Supports AEO/GEO:</strong> a clear heading structure makes it easier for answer engines and AI Overviews to lift a heading into an answer for a user.</li>
</ul>

<h2 id="step1">How to add a table of contents in BlogKub, step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li id="step2"><strong>Open BlogKub and pick a template.</strong> Many templates install the TOC block from the start. Check the page structure for a "Table of Contents (TOC)" block already present.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Add the TOC block (if you do not have one).</strong> Open the left library, category "Article &amp; UX", and drag the "Table of Contents (TOC)" block in. The system places it in the correct spot (the top of the article) automatically.</li>
  <li><strong>Configure the table of contents.</strong> Click the block to open its properties panel, then set: the TOC heading (such as "Contents" or "In this article"), the depth (H2 only, or H2 + H3), and whether to number each item.</li>
  <li><strong>Export the XML and upload to Blogger.</strong> Click Export, then take the XML to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Write your article with H2/H3 headings.</strong> In the post editor, set your main headings as "Heading (Heading 2)" and sub-headings as "Subheading (Heading 3)". That is all it takes for the table of contents to be built and ordered for you every time you publish.</li>
</ol>
<p class="note">BlogKub's table of contents system is placed directly in the post's includable, so it always appears above the content no matter how you order your blocks, and it works only on article pages (keeping the homepage clean).</p>

<h2 id="step5">Settings options and what they mean</h2>
<table>
  <thead><tr><th>Option</th><th>Meaning</th><th>Recommendation</th></tr></thead>
  <tbody>
    <tr><td>TOC heading</td><td>The heading text of the box</td><td>Use a familiar word, such as "Contents" or "In this article"</td></tr>
    <tr><td>Depth (maxDepth)</td><td>Show H2 only, or H2 + H3</td><td>Short articles need only H2, long articles with many sub-headings use H2+H3</td></tr>
    <tr><td>Numbering</td><td>Add 1, 2, 3 before each item</td><td>Leave on for clarity of the content order</td></tr>
  </tbody>
</table>

<h2>How to write an article so the table of contents looks good</h2>
<p>A good table of contents starts from a good outline. Follow these principles when writing a post:</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Use H2 for main headings and H3 for sub-headings only.</strong> Do not use bold text in place of a heading, because the table of contents and Google will not recognize it as a heading.</li>
  <li><strong>Name headings meaningfully and with keywords.</strong> A good heading is one that, read in sequence in the table of contents, conveys the outline of the whole article.</li>
  <li><strong>Do not make headings too short or vague.</strong> "Point 1" is useless. It should be "Step 1: pick a template", for instance.</li>
  <li><strong>Keep the hierarchy correct.</strong> Do not jump from H2 to H4, skipping H3, because it distorts the table of contents and the document structure.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The table of contents is empty or does not appear</h3>
<p>The most common cause is that the article has no H2/H3 headings, because the table of contents is built from them. Open the post editor and change your heading text from "Normal" to "Heading (Heading 2)" or "Subheading (Heading 3)", then save and view the live page again.</p>
<h3>The table of contents shows headings you do not want</h3>
<p>Sometimes a template or another widget creates unrelated H2/H3. Check that you are not using the same heading level as a UI element, and set the table of contents depth to H2 only to keep it concise.</p>
<h3>Clicking does not jump, or jumps past the heading</h3>
<p>This usually happens when a sticky header covers the heading. BlogKub's system already reserves scroll spacing, but if you have raised the header height a lot, test and reduce the sticky height slightly.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Use a table of contents on articles longer than roughly 800 to 1,000 words, or with 3 or more headings. Very short articles do not need one.</li>
  <li>Place the table of contents at the top of the article (BlogKub does this automatically) so readers see it immediately before deciding to read on.</li>
  <li>Pair the table of contents with the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/anchorlink">anchor link</a> feature so readers can copy a link straight to a heading and share it.</li>
  <li>Write headings as questions or sentences people actually search, which helps both the table of contents and your odds of appearing in AI Overviews.</li>
</ul>

<h2>The table of contents with AEO/GEO: getting AI to lift your headings into answers</h2>
<p>In an age where more people ask Google AI Overviews, ChatGPT Search, and Perplexity, a clear heading structure becomes a real asset, because these AI systems "read" an article by relying on the heading hierarchy to understand what each section answers. When your article has well-named H2/H3 and a table of contents that reflects the outline, the odds that AI lifts one of your headings into an answer for a user, and cites your site, go up.</p>
<p>The trick is to write headings in the form people actually ask. For example, instead of "Installation", write "How to install, step by step", or instead of "Benefits", write "How does a table of contents help SEO". Question-form or how-to headings are a magnet for both a readable table of contents and being lifted into AI Overviews. Pair it with an <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/aeo">AEO summary box</a> at the top of the article, and your content is even more ready for modern search.</p>

<h2>Comparison: automatic table of contents vs typing it yourself vs a plugin</h2>
<p>Before, Blogger owners had only a few options for making a table of contents, and each had clear downsides. Understanding the difference shows why the automatic approach is the most worthwhile.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Typing the table of contents yourself:</strong> full control over the format, but you type the links and anchors yourself on every article, and every time you edit a heading you have to come back and edit the table of contents too. It is time-consuming and error-prone, and the more articles you have, the bigger the burden.</li>
  <li><strong>Pasting JavaScript per post:</strong> it does give an automatic table of contents, but you have to paste the script into every post, and if you forget or place it wrong, it breaks, and code scattered through the content is hard to manage over the long term.</li>
  <li><strong>BlogKub's theme-level table of contents:</strong> set it once in the theme, and it works on every article forever, with no touching posts, no clutter code in the content, updating from your headings automatically, and always placed correctly. This is the easiest and most consistent approach.</li>
</ul>
<p>Put simply, the automatic theme-level approach moves the burden from "every article" to "once when setting up the theme", which suits anyone serious about blogging long term with a large archive of articles.</p>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>An automatic table of contents is a high-return improvement for the effort, because you install it once in the theme and it works on every article forever. It lifts the reader experience, reduces bounce, and opens the door to special space in the results. All you have to do is add the TOC block in BlogKub, set it to suit your content length, and write your articles with disciplined H2/H3 headings. With that, your Blogger site looks more professional at once.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Is the table of contents in BlogKub generated automatically, or do I type it myself?</summary><p>It is generated automatically from the H2 and H3 headings in your article. You do not type the list yourself. When you add or edit a heading, the table of contents updates immediately.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does clicking the table of contents jump to the heading?</summary><p>Yes. Each item is an anchor link, and clicking it scrolls smoothly to that heading. It also helps Google show sitelinks for your sub-headings in the results.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can I show only H2 in the table of contents?</summary><p>Yes. In the TOC block settings, choose a depth of H2 only, or H2 + H3, as you prefer, to make the table of contents concise or detailed to match the content.</p></details>
<details><summary>How does a table of contents affect SEO?</summary><p>A table of contents raises time on page, reduces bounce, and opens the door for Google to show 'jump to' links and heading sitelinks in the results. It also forces a clear heading structure, which is good for crawling.</p></details>
<details><summary>Why is my table of contents empty?</summary><p>Because the article has no H2/H3 headings yet. The table of contents is built from these headings. Set your post headings to 'Heading (H2)' or 'Subheading (H3)' in the Blogger editor and the table of contents will appear.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/toc">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to add a Translate button in Blogger (no API key)</title>
      <link>https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/translate</link>
      <guid isPermaLink="true">https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/translate</guid>
      <pubDate>Tue, 14 Jul 2026 02:00:00 +0000</pubDate>
      <dc:creator>Patpisan Dathong (Ben)</dc:creator>
      <category>Feature guide</category>
      <description>How to add a translate button to a Blogger theme with BlogKub: uses Google Translate to translate the whole page for readers, choose several languages, no API key needed, free, plus settings and fixes.</description>
      <enclosure url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/translate.png" type="image/png" length="307898"/>
      <media:content url="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/translate.png" medium="image" type="image/png"/>
      <content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/og/translate.png" alt="How to add a Translate button in Blogger (no API key)" style="max-width:100%;height:auto"/></p><h1>How to add a Translate button in a Blogger theme: multi-language, no API key</h1>
<p class="lead">Opening your site to readers of other languages is a way to expand your audience that is easier than you might think. This article teaches you how to add a translate button to a Blogger theme with BlogKub, which uses Google Translate to translate the whole page for readers, with no API key and no cost.</p>
<p class="meta">Updated 14 July 2026 &nbsp; About a 9 minute read &nbsp; Level: Beginner</p>

<div class="tldr"><p><strong>Quick summary:</strong> add the <strong>Translate</strong> block in BlogKub, choose the source language and the languages to translate to (English, Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc.), then Export the XML and upload it to Blogger. You get a translate button in the header that uses <strong>Google Translate to translate the whole page for readers, free, no API key needed</strong>. On mobile the language menu shows full width without running off the screen.</p></div>

<figure class="separator" style="clear:both;margin:1.6em 0;text-align:center">
  <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/translate.png" aria-label="View the Translate button with the language menu at full size">
    <img alt="A translate button in a Blogger header with a language menu of English, Chinese, Japanese, Korean" title="A Translate button with the language menu" src="https://www.blogkub.com/learn/images/translate.png" loading="lazy" decoding="async" border="0" width="760" data-original-width="1720" data-original-height="220" style="max-width:100%;height:auto;border:1px solid var(--border,#e8eaf2);border-radius:12px"/>
  </a>
  <figcaption style="font-size:13px;color:#0d9488;margin-top:8px">A translate button in the header opens a language menu, using Google Translate to translate the whole page, no API key needed.</figcaption>
</figure>


<h2>Why a Blogger blog should have a translate button</h2>
<p><strong>A translate button lets foreign readers translate the whole page's content into their own language in one click.</strong> Even if your site is written in Thai, the people who find your content may be foreigners interested in Thai topics, such as travelers, language learners, or people looking for specific information. Having a translate button lowers the language barrier and keeps them reading instead of leaving because they cannot read it.</p>
<p>For travel, food, culture, or product blogs with cross-border interest, this feature is even more valuable, because it turns visitors who might slip away into real readers, without you having to translate the content yourself or build a complicated multi-language site.</p>

<h2>How BlogKub's translate button works (no API key)</h2>
<p>The key highlight is that it <strong>uses Google Translate embedded directly in the page, so no API key, no signup, and no cost</strong>. When a reader clicks the button and chooses a language, Google Translate translates the whole page instantly on the reader's browser side, not translating and storing it as a new page on your site.</p>
<p>BlogKub also handles details that improve the experience, such as hiding the Google Translate toolbar that normally pushes the page around, keeping the layout stable, designing a clean language menu, and including an "Original" option to return to the source language anytime.</p>

<h2 id="step1">How to add the translate button in BlogKub step by step</h2>
<ol class="steps">
  <li id="step2"><strong>Add the translate block.</strong> Open the left library, the "Add-ons" category, and drag the "Translate" block in. The system places the button in the header automatically.</li>
  <li><strong>Choose the source language and the languages to show.</strong> Click the block to set the site's source language (such as Thai) and toggle on the languages you want readers to translate to, such as English, Chinese, Japanese, Korean. Choose only what is necessary to keep the menu concise.</li>
  <li id="step3"><strong>Export the XML and upload.</strong> Click Export, then take the file to blogger.com → Theme → three-dot menu → Backup/Restore → select the XML file.</li>
  <li id="step4"><strong>Test the translation on the live site.</strong> Open the site, click the translate button in the header, choose a language, and confirm the whole page is translated. Try it on mobile too to see the language menu show full width without running off the screen.</li>
</ol>
<p class="note">The translate button is inserted into the header bar automatically, and the language menu on mobile screens anchors to the screen edge as a full-width panel, so the menu does not overflow the screen.</p>

<h2>How to choose which languages to enable for your readers</h2>
<p>You do not need to enable every language. Choosing suitably keeps the menu short and easy to use. Consider:</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Your main reader group.</strong> If the content is about Thai travel, English, Chinese, and Japanese are often the largest groups.</li>
  <li><strong>Real statistics from Analytics.</strong> After the site has been up a while, see which countries visitors come from, then enable languages matching the groups.</li>
  <li><strong>Do not enable too many.</strong> A menu of 4 to 6 languages is just right. More than that is hard to choose from and cluttered unnecessarily.</li>
</ul>

<h2>The translate button, SEO, and serious multi-language sites</h2>
<p>You must understand that the translate button is a "reader aid tool", not a "multi-language SEO strategy". Translation happens on the reader's side only when they click. The Thai source content is still what Google indexes and ranks. So this feature has no negative SEO effect, and helps purely with user experience.</p>
<p>If you want serious multi-language SEO, meaning each language has its own pages and URLs to rank in that language, that is another strategy requiring actual content translation and an hreflang structure, suited to sites specifically targeting foreign markets. For a general blog, the translate button meets the accessibility need well without much effort.</p>

<h2>Common problems and how to fix them</h2>
<h3>The language menu runs off the screen on mobile</h3>
<p>BlogKub already fixes this by anchoring the menu to the screen edge as a full-width panel on mobile. If you use an old version, update the theme to the latest version to get this fix.</p>
<h3>The page shifts during translation</h3>
<p>This is caused by the Google Translate toolbar, which BlogKub hides so the layout does not shift. If you still see it, check that there is no duplicate translation script from elsewhere.</p>
<h3>Some parts are not translated</h3>
<p>Text that is an image will not be translated, because Google Translate can only translate real text. You should put important content as text, not embedded in images.</p>

<h2>Best practices</h2>
<ul>
  <li>Enable only the languages matching your real reader group, to keep the menu concise and easy to use.</li>
  <li>Write important content as text, not embedded in images, so it all translates.</li>
  <li>Test the translation on both desktop and mobile before publishing, especially the language menu on mobile.</li>
  <li>Place the translate button in the header where it is easy to see, like the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/dark-mode">dark mode button</a> (BlogKub does this automatically), so foreign readers find it right away.</li>
</ul>

<h2>Languages Thai blogs commonly enable, and why</h2>
<p>If you are unsure which languages to enable, here is the set most Thai blogs choose to enable, with the reasoning to guide your decision, which you can adjust later based on your real reader group.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>English:</strong> the world's common language, covering foreign readers most broadly, the first language you should always enable.</li>
  <li><strong>Chinese (simplified):</strong> a large group of travelers and people interested in Thai products/culture, ideal for travel, food, and review blogs.</li>
  <li><strong>Japanese and Korean:</strong> these two reader groups are quite interested in Thai content on travel, beauty, and lifestyle.</li>
</ul>
<p>Starting with this set is enough for a general blog, then look at real visitor statistics to add or remove languages to match your group later. Starting with a reasonable number keeps the menu easy to use from the outset.</p>

<h2>The translate button and site speed (Core Web Vitals)</h2>
<p>A question many worry about is whether embedding Google Translate slows the site down. The answer is that the effect is very small and designed to be safe, because the Google Translate script loads without blocking page rendering and works only when a reader clicks to choose a language. Readers who do not translate are barely affected by speed, and the source content shows as normal immediately.</p>
<p>BlogKub also hides the Google Translate toolbar that normally pushes the layout around, which helps prevent the Cumulative Layout Shift (CLS) issue that affects Core Web Vitals scores, keeping the experience stable and the speed score intact, consistent with the theme's whole philosophy of being light and fast.</p>

<h2>Limitations of automatic translation to know</h2>
<p>Machine translation is convenient and covers many languages, but it has limitations to understand so you set the right expectation. Automatic translation has improved a lot in recent years, but is still not as perfect as human translation, especially with idioms, jokes, or specialized terms that need context.</p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Idioms and jokes may come out wrong.</strong> Sentences that play on words or use specific Thai idioms may translate literally until the meaning is off. If the content is very important, write it directly so it translates accurately.</li>
  <li><strong>Text in images is not translated.</strong> Google Translate translates only real text, not characters embedded in an image, so put important content as text.</li>
  <li><strong>Proper names may be translated unnecessarily.</strong> Brand names or some proper nouns may get translated. If you want to keep the original word, consider formatting the text clearly.</li>
</ul>
<p>Overall, automatic translation suits "helping understand the content", which is enough for most readers of other languages. As long as you write clear content and put important information as text, foreign readers get the full benefit of the translate button.</p>

<h2>Wrapping up</h2>
<p>The translate button is an easy, free way to expand your site's reach to readers of other languages. With BlogKub you just add the translate block, choose the languages you want, and Export it to use, with no API key or cost. Readers from around the world can translate the whole page into their own language in one click, lowering the language barrier and opening the chance for your Thai content to reach more people.</p>

<h2>Frequently asked questions (FAQ)</h2>
<details><summary>Does BlogKub's translate button need an API key?</summary><p>No API key needed. This feature uses Google Translate embedded directly in the page. Readers click to choose a language and translate the whole page instantly, free, with no signup or key setup.</p></details>
<details><summary>How many languages does the translate button support?</summary><p>It supports the many languages Google Translate has. You choose which languages to show in the menu, such as English, Chinese, Japanese, Korean, and others, so the menu is not too long.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does translation affect the site's SEO?</summary><p>No negative effect, because translation happens on the reader's side only when they click. The Thai source content is still what Google indexes and ranks. This feature helps readers of other languages access the content more easily.</p></details>
<details><summary>Does the language menu overflow the screen on mobile?</summary><p>No overflow. On mobile the language menu shows as a full-width panel below the header, so choosing a language is easy and does not run off the screen edge. On desktop it is a normal dropdown menu.</p></details>
<details><summary>Can readers return to the source language?</summary><p>Yes. The menu has an 'Original' option to return to the site's original language anytime. The system clears the translation and shows the source content as normal.</p></details>
<hr>
<p class="meta">Part of the <a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/">BlogKub feature guides</a>, one article per feature covering the settings, the options and the problems people hit.</p><p><a href="https://www.blogkub.com/en/learn/translate">Read it on BlogKub →</a></p>]]></content:encoded>
    </item>
  </channel>
</rss>
